Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisThe only book to cover adhesion in pharmaceutical, biomedical and dental fields The phenomenon of adhesion is of cardinal importance in the pharmaceutical, biomedical and dental fields. A few eclectic examples will suffice to underscore the importance/relevance of adhesion in these three areas. For example, the adhesion between powdered solids is of crucial importance in tablet manufacture. The interaction between biodevices (e.g., stents, bio-implants) and body environment dictates the performance of such devices, and there is burgeoning research activity in modifying the surfaces of such implements to render them compatible with bodily components. In the field of dentistry, the modern trend is to shift from retaining of restorative materials by mechanical interlocking to adhesive bonding. The book contains 15 chapters written by internationally-renowned subject matter experts and is divided into four parts: Part 1: General Topics; Part 2: Adhesion in Pharmaceutical Field; Part 3: Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 General Topics 1 Theories and Mechanisms of Adhesion in the Pharmaceutical, Biomedical and Dental Fields 3Douglas J. Gardner 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Mechanisms of Adhesion 7 1.3 Summary 17 References 18 2 Wettability of Powders 23Emil Chibowski, Lucyna Holysz and Aleksandra Szczes 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Different Forms of Wetting 24 2.3 Hydrophilic and Hydrophobic Surfaces 27 2.4 Contact Angle Measurement in Wettability Studies of Powdered Materials 27 2.5 Contact Angle and Surface Free Energy 35 2.6 Surface Free Energy Determination of Powdered Solids by Thin Layer Wicking Method 38 2.7 Surface Free Energy Determination of Powdered Solids by Imbibition Drainage Method 42 2.8 Summary 44 Acknowledgement 44 References 44 Part 2 Adhesion in the Pharmaceutical Field 3 Tablet Tensile Strength: Role of Surface Free Energy 53Frank M. Etzler and Sorana Pisano 3.1 Introduction 54 3.2 Applicability of the Proposed Model to Pharmaceutical Materials 60 3.3 Discussion 70 3.4 Summary 72 3.5 Acknowledgements 72 References 72 4 Role of Surface Free Energy in Powder Behavior and Tablet Strength 75Changquan Calvin Sun 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Surface Free Energy 76 4.3 Role of Surface Free Energy in Solid Wetting 77 4.4 Role of Surface Free Energy in Powder Flow 80 4.5 Role of Surface Free Energy in Powder Tableting 82 4.6 Concluding Remarks 84 References 84 5 Mucoadhesive Polymers for Drug Delivery Systems 89Inderbir Singh, Pravin Pawar, Ebunoluwa A. Sanusi and Oluwatoyin A. Odeku 5.1 Introduction 90 5.2 Mucoadhesive Drug Delivery Systems 93 5.3 Mucoadhesive Polymers 95 5.4 Summary 107 References 108 6 Transdermal Patches: An Overview 115Subham Banerjee 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Factors Affecting Skin Absorption 117 6.3 Passive Transdermal Drug Delivery Systems 120 6.4 Types, Structural Components and Materials Used to Design Passive TDDS 121 6.5 Active Transdermal Drug Delivery Systems 126 6.6 Production of Transdermal Patches 127 6.7 Biopharmaceutical Concerns 128 6.8 Pharmacokinetics of Transdermal Absorption 130 6.9 Manufacture, Design and Quality Control 131 6.10 Commercialized Patches 133 6.11 Regulatory Aspects 133 6.12 Summary and Future Prospects 136 Acknowledgment 137 References 138 7 Film-Forming Technology and Skin Adhesion in Long-Wear Cosmetics 141Hy Si Bui and Debra Coleman-Nally 7.1 Introduction 141 7.2 Long-Wear Foundation: An overview 142 7.3 Effect of Skin Substrate on Adhesion 142 7.4 Long-Wear Technologies in Cosmetic Applications 150 7.5 Summary and Prospects 160 Acknowledgements 161 References 161 Part 3 Adhesion in the Biomedical Fields 8 Factors Affecting Microbial Adhesion 169Klemen Bohinc, Martina Oder, Rok Fink, Karmen Godiè Torkar, Goran Dražiæ and Peter Raspor 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Surface Characterization 174 8.3 Bacterial Adhesion to Material Surfaces 175 8.5 Summary 179 Acknowledgments 179 References 180 9 Factors Influencing Biofouling and Use of Polymeric Materials to Mitigate It 185Elena Ozzello, Chiara Mollea, Francesca Bosco and Roberta Bongiovanni 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 Origin of Biofouling 188 9.3 Prevention of Microorganisms Adhesion 189 9.4 Influence of Mechanical Properties 198 9.5 Influence of Surface Topography 200 9.6 Concluding Remarks 201 References 202 10 Coatings on Surgical Tools and How to Promote Adhesion of Bio-Friendly Coatings on Their Surfaces 207Sanjay Kumar, Pulak Bhushan and Shantanu Bhattacharya 10.1 Introduction 207 10.2 Coatings on Various Surgical Tools and Implants in Different Fields of Operative Care to Patients 209 10.3 Promotion of Adhesion of Bio-Friendly Coatings on Surfaces of Tools and Implants 224 10.4 Summary 227 References 227 11 Techniques for Deposition of Coatings with Enhanced Adhesion to Bio-Implants 235Proma Bhattacharya and Sudarsan Neogi 11.1 Bio-Implants: An Introduction 235 11.2 Deposition Methods for Enhanced Adhesion of Coatings on Implants 240 11.3 Summary 249 References 250 12 Relevance of Adhesion in Fabrication of Microarrays in Clinical Diagnostics 257Rishi Kant, Geeta Bhatt, Poonam Sundriyal and Shantanu Bhattacharya 12.1 Introduction 258 12.2 Protein Microarrays 259 12.3 Fabrication Techniques 262 12.4 Adhesion of Probes in Protein Microarray Fabrication 264 12.6 Antibody Microarrays 285 12.7 Summary 291 References 291 Part 4 Adhesion in the Dental Fields 13 Antibacterial Polymers for Dental Adhesives and Composites 301Mary Anne S. Melo, Michael D. Weir, Fazel Fakhari, Lei Cheng, Ke Zhang, Fang Li, Xuedong Zhou, Yuxing Bai and Hockin H. K. Xu 13.1 Introduction 302 13.2 Major Damage from Oral Biofilm Formed: The Acid Production 304 13.3 The Chemistry of Current Dental Adhesives and Composites 306 13.4 The Need for Treatments Targeting Oral Cariogenic Biofilms 308 13.5 Classification of Antibacterial Polymers for Dental Materials 310 13.6 Mechanisms of Action of Antibacterial Monomers 312 13.7 Antibacterial Properties of Dental Adhesives and Composites Containing Antibacterial Monomers 313 13.8 Considerations of Mechanical Properties 320 13.9 Summary and Prospects 322 Acknowledgments 323 References 323 14 Dental Adhesives: From Earlier Products to Bioactive and Smart Materials 331Eliseu A. Münchow and Marco C. Bottino 14.1 Introduction 331 14.2 Adhesion to Dental Substrates 334 14.3 Adhesive Strategies 339 14.4 Limitations in Bonding to Dental Substrates 345 14.5 Strategies to Reduce Bond Strength Degradation – Current Advances 346 14.6 Summary and Prospects 355 Acknowledgment 356 References 356 15 Testing of Dental Adhesive Joints 369Karl-Johan M. Söderholm 15.1 Introduction 370 15.2 Various Bond Strength Tests 372 15.3 Summary 394 References

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn this book, we have summarized recent progresses due to novel nanomaterials for sustainable water resources. Book provides a summary of the state of the art knowledge to scientists, engineers and policy makers, about recent developments due to nanotechnology for sustainable water resources arena. The advances in sustainable water resources technologies in the context of modern society's interests will be considered preferably which allow to identify grand challenges and directions for future research. The book contributors have been selected from all over the world and the essential functions of the nanotechnologies have presented rather than their anticipated applications. Moreover, up to date knowledge on economy, toxicity and regulation related to nanotechnology are presented in detail. In the end, role of nanotechnology for green and sustainable future has also been briefly debated.Table of ContentsPreface xix Part I Nanotechnology for Natural Resources 1 Application of Nanotechnology in Water Treatment, Wastewater Treatment and Other Domains of Environmental Engineering Science –A Broad Scientific Perspective and Critical Review 3SukanchanPalit 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 The Vision of the Study 5 1.3 The Need and the Rationale of the Study 6 1.4 The Scope of the Study 7 1.5 Environmental Sustainability, the Vision to Move Forward and the Immense Challenges 7 1.6 Water and Wastewater Treatment – The Scientific Doctrine and Immense Scientific Cognizance 7 1.6.1 Nanotechnology and Drinking Water Treatment 8 1.6.2 Nanotechnology and Industrial Wastewater Treatment 8 1.7 The Scientific Vision of Membrane Science 9 1.7.1 Classification of Membrane Separation Processes 9 1.7.2 A Review of Water Treatment Membrane Technologies 9 1.8 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Membrane Separation Processes 11 1.9 Recent Scientific Pursuit in the Field of Application of Nanotechnology in Water Treatment 11 1.10 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Application of Nanotechnology in Wastewater Treatment 15 1.11 Desalination and the Future of Human Society 16 1.11.1 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Desalination Procedure 16 1.11.2 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Desalination Science 18 1.12 NanofiltrationTechnologies, the Future of Reverse Osmosis and the Scientific Vision of Global Water Issues 19 1.13 Recent Advances in Membrane Science and Technology in Seawater Desalination 19 1.14 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Nanofiltration, Reverse Osmosis, Forward Osmosis and Other Branches of Membrane Science 20 1.14.1 Scientific Motivation and Technological Objectives in the Field of Nanofiltration, Reverse Osmosis and the Innovative World of Forward Osmosis 21 1.15 Current and Potential Applications for Water and Wastewater Treatment 22 1.15.1 Vision of Adsorption Techniques 22 1.15.2 Potential Application in Water Treatment 22 1.15.3 The Avenues of Membranes and Membrane Processes 23 1.15.4 The Science of Disinfection and Microbial Control 23 1.15.5 Potential Applications in Water Treatment 24 1.16 Water Treatment Membrane Technologies 24 1.17 Non-Traditional Advanced Oxidation Techniques and its Wide Vision 25 1.17.1 Ozonation Technique and its Broad Application in Environmental Engineering Science 25 1.17.2 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Ozonation Technique 26 1.18 Scientific Cognizance, Scientific Vision and the Future Avenues of Nanotechnology 26 1.18.1 The True Challenge and Vision of Industrial Wastewater Treatment 26 1.19 Advanced Oxidation Processes, Non-Traditional Environmental Engineering Techniques and its Vision for the Future 27 1.19.1 Scientific Research Endeavour in the Field of Advanced Oxidation Processes 27 1.20 Environmental Sustainability, the Futuristic Technologies and the Wide Vision of Nanotechnology 30 1.20.1 Vision of Science, Avenues of Nanotechnology and the Future of Industrial Pollution Control 30 1.20.2 Technological Validation, the Science of Industrial Wastewater Treatment and the Vision Towards Future 31 1.21 Integrated Water Quality Management System and Global Water Issues 31 1.21.1 Groundwater Remediation and Global Water Initiatives 31 1.21.2 Arsenic Groundwater Remediation, the Future of Environmental Engineering Science and the Vision for the Future 32 1.21.3 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in the Field of Arsenic Groundwater Remediation 32 1.21.4 Vision of Application of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology in Tackling Global Groundwater Quality Issues 33 1.21.5 Heavy Metal Groundwater Contamination and Solutions 33 1.21.6 Arsenic Groundwater Contamination and Vision for the Future 34 1.22 Integrated Groundwater Quality Management System and the Vision for the Future 34 1.23 Membrane Science and Wastewater Reclamation 34 1.24 Future of Groundwater Heavy Metal Remediation and Application of Nanotechnology 35 1.25 Future Research and Development Initiatives in the Field of Nanotechnology Applications in Wastewater Treatment 36 1.26 Futuristic Vision, the World of Scientific Validation and the Scientific Avenues for the Future 36 1.27 Future Research and Development Needs 37 1.28 Conclusions 37 References 37 2 Nanotechnology Solutions for Public Water Challenges 41Ankita Dhillon and Dinesh Kumar 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Application of Nanotechnology in Water and Wastewater Treatment 44 2.2.1 Photocatalysis 45 2.2.2 Nanofiltration 49 2.2.3 Nanosorbents 53 2.3 Effects of Nanotechnology 57 2.4 Conclusions 58 Acknowledgements 59 References 59 3 Nanotechnology: An Emerging Field for Sustainable Water Resources 73Pradeep Pratap Singh and Ambika 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Classification of Nanomaterials for Wastewater Treatment 74 3.2.1 Nanoadsorbents 74 3.2.2 Nanocatalysts 75 3.2.3 Nanomembranes 75 3.3 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 77 3.3.1 Conventional Approach for the Production of NPs 77 3.3.2 Precipitation of Nanoparticles 77 3.3.3 Nanoparticles from Emulsions 77 3.3.4 Green Approach for the Synthesis of Nanoparticles 78 3.4 Application of Nanotechnology in Wastewater Treatment 78 3.4.1 Nanoadsorbents 78 3.4.2 Nanocatalysts 81 3.4.3 Nanomembranes 86 3.4.4 Miscellaneous Nanomaterials 88 3.5 Risk of Nanotechnology 89 3.6 Conclusions 89 References 90 4 Removal of Hazardous Contaminants from Water or Wastewater Using Polymer Nanocomposites Materials 103Felycia Edi Soetaredjo, Suryadi Ismadji, Kuncoro Foe and Gladdy L. Woworuntu 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Adsorption of Heavy Metals 104 4.3 Adsorption of Dyes 106 4.4 Adsorption of Antibiotics and Other Organic Contaminants 111 4.5 Processing of Polymer-Based Nanocomposites as Adsorbents 113 4.5.1 Exfoliation Adsorption 113 4.5.2 Melt Intercalation 114 4.5.3 Template Synthesis 115 4.5.4 In-Situ Polymerization 115 4.6 Clay–Polymer Nanocomposites 116 4.7 Carbon Nanotube Polymer Nanocomposites 119 4.8 Magnetic Polymer Nanocomposites 119 4.9 Adsorption Equilibrium Studies 120 4.9.1 Langmuir Isotherm 120 4.9.2 Freundlich Isotherm 126 4.9.3 Dubinin Radushkevich 126 4.9.4 Temkin Adsorption Equation 128 4.9.5 Sips Isotherm Equation 129 4.9.6 Toth Adsorption Equation 130 4.10 Adsorption Kinetic Studies 130 4.11 Summary 132 Acknowledgment 133 References 133 5 Sustainable Nanocarbons as Potential Sensor for Safe Water 141Kumud Malika Tripathi, Anupriya Singh, Yusik Myung, TaeYoung Kim, and Sumit Kumar Sonkar 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Recent Advancement in Sustainable Nanocarbons 144 5.3 Sustainable Nanocarbons for Safe Water 149 5.3.1 Sensing of Toxic Metal Ions 150 5.3.2 Sensing of Inorganic Pollutants 156 5.3.3 Sensing of Organic Pollutants 161 5.3.4 Sensing of Nanomaterials 165 5.3.5 Sensing of Byproducts 166 5.4 Concluding Remarks and Future Trend 166 Acknowledgment 167 References 167 Part 2 Nanosensors as Tools for Water Resources 6 Nanosensors as Tools for Water Resources 179Ephraim Vunain and A. K. Mishra 6.1 Introduction 180 6.1.1 Water Resources Contamination Due to Heavy Metals 181 6.1.2 Water Resources Contamination Due to Nutrients 182 6.2 Contaminant Monitoring Procedures 183 6.2.1 Electrochemical-Based Sensors 184 6.2.2 Graphene and Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs)-Based Sensors 188 6.2.3 Biosensors 189 6.2.4 Nanoparticles- and Nanocomposites-Based Sensors 189 6.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 190 References 191 7 Emerging Nanosensing Strategies for Heavy Metal Detection 199S. Varun and S.C.G. Kiruba Daniel 7.1 Introduction 199 7.2 Recent Trends in Nanosensing Strategies: An Overview 201 7.2.1 Nanosensors Based on Biosensing Principle 201 7.2.2 Nanoparticle-Mediated Electrodes 208 7.2.3 Interference Sensing: A New Paradigm 213 7.3 Microfluidic Nanotechnology: Emerging Platform for Sensing 214 7.3.1 Microfluidic Sensors 214 7.3.2 Paper-Based Microfluidic Sensors 214 7.4 Summary and Outlook 220 Acknowledgement 220 References 220 8 Capture of Water Contaminants by a New Generation of Sorbents Based on Graphene and Related Materials 227Ana L. Cukierman and Pablo R. Bonelli 8.1 Introduction 228 8.2 Characterization of Physicochemical, Mechanical, and Magnetic Properties of Graphene-Based Materials 229 8.3 Removal of Inorganic and Water-Soluble Organic Contaminants with Graphene-Based Sorbents 231 8.3.1 Removal of Inorganic Contaminants: Heavy Metal and Nonmetal Ions 232 8.3.2 Removal of Water-Soluble Organic Contaminants: Dyes and Pharmaceuticals 241 8.4 Cleanup of Oil Spills and Other Water-Insoluble Organic Contaminants 255 8.5 Summary and Outlook 267 Acknowledgment 268 References 269 9 Design and Analysis of Carbon-Based Nanomaterials for Removal of Environmental Contaminants 277Yoshitaka Fujimoto 9.1 Introduction 277 9.2 Methodology 278 9.2.1 First Principles Total Energy Calculation 278 9.2.2 Formation Energy 279 9.2.3 Adsorption Energy 280 9.2.4 Charge Density Difference 280 9.2.5 Work Function 280 9.2.6 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy Image 280 9.2.7 Computational Details 281 9.3 Substitutionally Doped Graphene Bilayer 281 9.3.1 Structure 281 9.3.2 Energetics 282 9.3.3 Energy Band Structure 284 9.3.4 Work Function 285 9.3.5 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy Image 285 9.4 Gas Adsorption Effect 287 9.4.1 Structure and Energetics 287 9.4.2 Energy-Band Structures and Electron States 289 9.4.3 Total Charge Density 291 9.4.4 Work Function 293 9.4.5 Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy Image 294 9.5 Conclusions 295 Acknowledgment 295 References 296 10 Nanosensors: From Chemical to Green Synthesis for Wastewater Remediation 301Priyanka Joshi and Dinesh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 302 10.2 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 303 10.2.1 Physical Methods 303 10.2.2 Chemical Method 305 10.3 Biological Methods 309 10.3.1 Biomolecule 309 10.3.2 Microorganism 310 10.3.3 Plant Materials 311 10.4 Application of Nanoparticles 311 10.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 315 Acknowledgment 316 References 316 11 As-Prepared Carbon Nanotubes for Water Purification: Pollutant Removal and Magnetic Separation 329Jie Ma, Yao Ma and Fei Yu 11.1 Introduction 330 11.2 Experimental Method 331 11.2.1 Materials 331 11.2.2 Preparation of Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 331 11.2.3 Batch Adsorption Experiments 333 11.2.4 Characterization Method 335 11.3 Removal of Dye from Aqueous Solution by NaClO-Modified Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 336 11.3.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 336 11.3.2 Adsorption Properties 340 11.4 Removal of Toluene, Ethylbenzene, and Xylene from Aqueous Solution by KOH-Activated Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 343 11.4.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 343 11.4.2 Adsorption Properties 348 11.5 Removal of Organic Pollutants from Aqueous Solution by Chitason-Grafted Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 358 11.5.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 358 11.5.2 Adsorption Properties 359 11.6 Summary and Outlook 367 Reference 367 12 Nanoadsorbents: An Approach Towards Wastewater Treatment 371Rekha Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 12.1 Introduction 372 12.2 Classification of Nanomaterials as Nanoadsorbents 375 12.3 Importance of Nanomaterials in the Preconcentration Process 376 12.4 Properties and Mechanisms of Nanomaterials as Adsorbents 377 12.4.1 Innate Surface Properties 377 12.4.2 External Functionalization 378 12.5 Nanoparticles for Water and Wastewater Remediation 379 12.5.1 Nanoparticles of Metal Oxide 379 12.5.2 Metallic Nanoparticles 380 12.5.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles 381 12.5.4 Carbonaceous Nanomaterials 382 12.5.5 Silicon Nanomaterials 383 12.5.6 Nanofibers (NFs) 384 12.6 Applications in Aqueous Media 384 12.6.1 Nanoparticles 385 12.6.2 Nanostructured Mixed Oxides 387 12.6.3 Carbonaceous Nanomaterials 388 12.6.4 Silicon Nanomaterials 389 12.6.5 Nanofibers (NFs) 391 12.7 Conclusions 391 12.8 Future Scenario 392 Acknowledgment 393 References 393 Part 3 Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Resources 13 Hybrid Clay Mineral for Anionic Dye Removal and Textile Effluent Treatment 409Fadhila Ayari 13.1 Introduction 410 13.2 Experimental 411 13.2.1 Clay Adsorbent 411 13.3 Result and Discussion 413 13.3.1 Characterizations of Collected Clay 413 13.3.2 Characterizations of Hybrid Material 420 13.3.3 Adsorption Studies 436 13.3.4 Application to Natural Effluent 451 13.4 Conclusions 452 References 456 14 Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Resources 461Pashupati Pokharel and Mahesh Joshi 14.1 Current Progress in Nanotechnologies for Water Resources and Wastewater Treatment Processes 462 14.2 Nanomaterials in Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Treatment Process 464 14.3 Biochar-Based Nanocomposites for the Purification of Water Resources and Wastewater 467 14.3.1 Surface Chemistry and Functionalization of Biochar Material 468 14.3.2 Pretreatment of Biomass Using Iron/Ion Oxide, Nanometal Oxide/Hydroxide, and Functional Nanoparticles 468 14.3.3 Post-Treatment of Biochar Using Iron Ion/Oxide, Functional Nanoparticles, Nanometal Oxide/Hydroxide 470 14.3.4 Adsorption of Heavy Metals 470 14.3.5 Interaction of Biochar-Based Nanocomposites with Organic Contaminants 471 14.3.6 Adsorption of Inorganic Contaminants Other than Heavy Metals 472 14.3.7 Adsorption and Instantaneous Degradation of Organic Contaminants 472 14.4 Conclusions 473 References 473 15 Recent Advances in Nanofiltration Membrane Techniques for Separation of Toxic Metals from Wastewater 477Akil Ahmad, David Lokhat, Yang Wang, Mohd Rafatullah 15.1 Introduction 478 15.2 Membrane Technology 480 15.3 Nanofiltration Membrane for Metal Removal/Rejection 483 15.4 Summary and Outlook 492 Acknowledgment 493 References 493 16 Bacterial Cellulose Nanofibers for Efficient Removal of Hg2+ from Aqueous Solutions 501Emel Tamahkar, Deniz Turkmen, Semra Akgonullu, Tahira Qureshi and Adil Denizli 16.1 Introduction 502 16.2 Experimental Method 508 16.2.1 Materials 508 16.2.2 Production of BC Nanofibers 508 16.2.3 Preparation of Cibacron Blue F3GA Attached-Bacterial Cellulose (BC–CB) Nanofibers 508 16.2.4 Characterization Studies 509 16.2.5 Batch Adsorption Studies 509 16.2.6 Competitive Adsorption Studies 510 16.2.7 Desorption and Reusability Studies 510 16.3 Results and Discussion 511 16.3.1 Characterization of Bacterial Cellulose Nanofibers 511 16.3.2 Effect of pH 512 16.3.3 Effect of Initial Concentration of Hg2+ 512 16.3.4 Competitive Adsorption 515 16.3.5 Regeneration of BC–CB Nanofibers 515 16.4 Conclusions 516 References 518 Part 4 Sustainable Future with Nanotechnology 17 Nanotechnology Based Separation Systems for Sustainable Water Resources 525Susmita Dey Sadhu, Meenakshi Garg and Prem Lata Meena 17.1 Introduction and Background 526 17.2 Nanotechnology in Water Treatment 530 17.3 Nanofiltration—A Membranous Technique 533 17.3.1 What is Filtration? 533 17.3.2 Membrane Filtration Technology 533 17.3.3 Nanofiltration 534 17.3.4 Role of Nanofiltration 535 17.3.5 Different Polymers and Their Membranes in Nanofiltration 536 17.4 Nanoadsorbents 539 17.4.1 Types of Adsorbents 539 17.4.2 Heavy Metal Removal from Wastewater 540 17.4.3 Organic Waste Removal 541 17.5 Nanoparticles 547 17.5.1 Dendrimer 548 17.5.2 Metals and Their Oxides 549 17.5.3 Zeolites 550 17.5.4 Carbaneous and Carbon Nanotubes 551 17.6 Recent Researches in Nanoseparation Techniques of Wastewater 552 17.6.1 Graphene from Sugar and its Application in Water Purification 552 17.6.2 Understanding the Degradation Pathway of the Pesticide, Chlorpyrifos by Noble Metal Nanoparticles 552 17.6.3 Measuring and Modelling Adsorption of PAHs to Carbon Nanotubes Over a Six Order of Magnitude Wide Concentration Range 553 17.6.4 “SOS Water” Mobile Water Purifier 553 17.6.5 An Electrochemical Carbon Nanotube Filter for Water Treatment Applications 554 17.6.6 High Speed Water Sterilization System for Developing Countries 554 17.6.7 Metal Nanoparticles on Hierarchical Carbon Structures: New Architecture for Robust Water Purifiers 554 17.7 Conclusions 555 References 555 Index 559

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings volume contains a collection of 20 papers from the following symposia held during the 2015 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T ''15) meeting: 7th International Symposium on Green and Sustainable Technologies for Materials Manufacturing Processing Materials for Nuclear Applications and Extreme Environments Materials Issues in Nuclear Waste Management in the 21st Century Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare and Industry Materials for Processes for CO2 Capture, Conversion and Sequestration Hybrid Organic Inorganic Materials for Alternative Energy Table of ContentsPreface ix GREEN AND SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING "Commonization" of Materials: Guilty by Association 3Marsha S. Bischel, Amy A. Costello, and Tawnya R. Hultgren Experimental Research and Application of Copper Oxide Flotation using the Combined Collectors of Benzohydroxamic Acid and Butyl Xanthate 13Daixiong Chen, Jun Xiao, Chunming He, and Xiaodong Li Investigation of the Microstructural Evolution between Pellet and Sinter under the Conditions of an Oxygen Blast Furnace 27Wentao Guo, Qingguo Xue, Long Chen, Yingli Liu, Xuefeng She, and Jingsong Wang Novel Engineered Cementitious Materials by using Class C Fly Ash as a Cementitious Phase 35M. F. Riyad, M. Fuka, R. Lofthus, Q. Li, N. M. Patel, and S. Gupta Effects of Composition Changes on the Sintering Properties of Novel Steel Slag Ceramics 45Lihua Zhao, Yu Li, Feng Jiang, and Daqiang Cang Efficiency Gains in Powertrain Components by Molybdenum-Alloyed Special Steels 53Hardy Mohrbacher Niobium Carbide—An Innovative and Sustainable High-Performance Material for Tooling, Friction and Wear Applications 67Hardy Mohrbacher, Mathias Woydt, Jef Vleugels, and Shuigen Huang MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR APPLICATIONS AND EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS Microstructure of Yttria Doped Ceria as a Function of Oxalate Co-Precipitation Synthesis Conditions 83Laurent Brissonneau, Aurore Mathieu, Brigitte Tormos, and Anna Martin-Garin High Temperature Corrosion of Structural Alloys in Molten Li2BeF4 (FLiBe) Salt 93Guiqiu Zheng, David Carpenter, Lin-Wen Hu, and Kumar Sridharan Crack Initiation due to Liquid Metal Embrittlement for the Steel T91 and Two ODS Steels in Liquid Lead 103L. Rozumová, F. Di Gabriele, A. Hojná, and H. Hadraba NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, ENVIRONMENT, ELECTRONICS, AND INDUSTRY Stabilization of Nano-Scale Nickel Electro-Catalysts at High Temperature 115David R. Driscoll and Stephen W. Sofie Nanotechnology Advancements and Applications 125Stephen Miranda The Sensing Properties of Fuzzy Carbon Nanotube Based Silica Fibers 139M. Radeti , P. Cortes, G. Kubas, Jim Cook, Ravi Chandra Reddy Gade, and T. Oder Nanomodified Low-Cost Biological Material for the Removal of Heavy Metal Ions 147L. Rozumová, J. Seidlerova, and I. Safarik MATERIALS ISSUES IN NUCLEAR WASTE MANAGEMENT IN THE 21ST CENTURY Effects of Al2O3, B2O3, Li2O, Na2O, and SiO2 on Nepheline Crystallization in Hanford High Level Waste Glasses 161Jared O. Kroll, John D. Vienna, and Michael J. Schweiger Evolution of Repository, Container, Waste Form Characterization and Design at the Proposed US Disposal System in Volcanic Tuff 171Rob P. Rechard Effect of Hydration Heat on Iodine Distriution in Gypsum-Additive Calcium Aluminate Cement 185Tomofumi Sakuragi, Yu Yamashita, and Shigeto Kikuchi MATERIALS AND PROCESSES FOR CO2 CAPTURE, CONVERSION, AND SEQUESTRATION Porphyrin-Based Chemistry for Carbon Capture and Sequestration 201Lawrence P. Cook, Winnie Wong-Ng, and Greg Brewer Thermal Stability of Novel Multilayer Lanthanum Zirconate Based Thermal Barrier Coatings 223Xingye Guo, Zhe Lu, Yeon-Gil Jung, Li Li, James Knapp, and Jing Zhang HYBRID ORGANIC-INORGANIC MATERIALS FOR ALTERNATIVE ENERGY Electrochemical Properties of Melting Gel Coatings 235L. C. Klein, A. Degnah, K. Al-Marzoki, G. Rodriguez, A. Jitianu, J. Mosa, and M. Aparicio Author Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings volume contains a collection of 34 papers from the following symposia held during the 2015 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T ''15) meeting: Innovative Processing and Synthesis of Ceramics, Glasses and Composites Advances in Ceramic Matrix Composites Advanced Materials for Harsh Environments Advances in Dielectric Materials and Electronic Devices Controlled Synthesis, Processing, and Applications of Structure and Functional Nanomaterials Processing and Performance of Materials Using Microwaves, Electric and Magnetic Fields, Ultrasound, Lasers, and Mechanical Work, Rustum Roy Memorial Symposium Sintering and Related Powder Processing Science and Technologies Surface Protection for Enhanced Materials Performance: Science, Technology, and Application Thermal Protection Materials and Systems Ceramic Optical Materials Alumina at the Forefront of Technology Table of ContentsPreface ix CONTROLLED SYNTHESIS, PROCESSING, AND APPLICATIONS OF STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL NANOMATERIALS Assessing the Limits of Accuracy for the Tauc Method for Optical Band Gap Determination 3Dunbar P. Birnie, III Investigation of Pyroaurite-Type Anionic Clay-Derived Mixed Oxides with Various Compositions 17Jonathan Gabriel, Aarti Patel, Ewul Ebenezer, Andrei Jitianu, and Mihaela Jitianu Formation and Characterization of Nano-Scale Titanium Carbides in a Titanium Trialuminide Intermetallic 31Edward A. Laitila and Donald E. Mikkola Growth Kinetics of Lanthanum Phosphate Core/Shell Nanoparticles Doped with Ce-Tb and Eu 45M. C. Molina Higgins and J. V. Rojas Influence of Synthesis Parameters on Morphology, Crystalline Structure and Colloidal Stability of Core and Core-Shell LaPO4 Nanoparticles 57Miguel Toro and Jessika Rojas Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles for Space Satellite Solar Panel Protection Layer 71Phillip Clift, Jordan Wladyka, Tyler Payton, and Dale Henneke DIELECTRONIC MATERIALS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES Synthesis and Characterization of BaTiO3-Based Ceramics Doped in B Site by BaTi1-xNbxO3 81F. R. Barrientos-Hernández, M. Ortiz-Domínguez, M. Pérez-Labra, E. O. Ávila-Dávila, J. P. Hernández-Lara, and L. A. Cruz-Gutiérrez Influences of the Ceramic Matrix in the Properties of Ferroelectric Composites Based on PYDF Polymers 91Danilo Umbelino Figueiredo, Evaristo Alexandre Falcão, Eriton Rodrigo Botero, José Antonio Eiras, Fabio Luis Zabotto, and Ducinei Garcia Piezoelectric Response of Sn and Mn Modified Lead Titanate Piezoelectric Ceramics 99Deepam Maurya, Hyun-Cheol Song, Min-Gyu Kang, Yongke Yan, Robert Bodnar, Ilan Levine, Edward Behnke, Haley Borsodi, Juan I. Collar, and Shashank Priya Comparison of Grain Size Effects on Microstructure and Dielectric Properties of Y2/3Cu3Ti4-X FexO12 (X = 0.00, 0.05 and 0.15) Ceramics Synthesized by Glycine Assisted Semi Wet Route 117S. Sharma, M.M. Singh, Narsingh B. Singh, and K.D. Mandal Calcium Copper Titanate Based High Dielectric Constant Materials for Energy Storage Applications 131Disna P. Samarakoon, Nirmal Govindaraju, and Raj N. Singh SINTERING AND RELATED POWDER PROCESSING Synthesis, Characterization and Gibbs Energy of Thermoelectric Mg2Si 143Mallikharjuna R. Bogala and Ramana G. Reddy Modeling Densification during Fast Firing of Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia 153Sergio Y. Gómez, Farshad Farzan, Ricardo H. C. Castro, and Dachamir Hotza Mechanistic Studies of Compacted and Sintered Rock Salt 159Claudia H. Swanson, Susanne Böhme, and Jens Günster Sintering of Nanostructured Zirconia: A Molecular Dynamics Study 173Yi Zhang and Jing Zhang PROCESSING AND PERFORMANCE OF MATERIALS USING MICROWAVES, ELECTRIC, AND MAGNETIC FIELDS Rapid Synthesis of Nanostructured Titanium Boride (TiB) by Electric Field Activated Reaction Sintering 187K. S. Ravi Chandran, A P. Sandersand, and J. Du Verification of Effects of Alternative Electromagnetic Treatment on Control of Biofilm and Scale Formation by a New Laboratory Biofilm Reactor 199Hideyuki Kanematsu, Senshin Umeki, Nobumitsu Hirai, Yoko Miura, Noriyuki Wada, Takeshi Kougo, Kazuyuki Tohji, Hirokazu Otani, Kazuhiko Okita, and Toshifumi Ono Microwave Assisted Sintering of Cold Iso-Statically Pressed Titanium 6-4 Powder Compacts 213B. Y. Rock, M. A. Imam, and T. F. Zarah Microwave Heating of Ensembles of Spherical Metal Particles Surrounded by Insulating Layers 223K. I. Rybakov and V. E. Semenov Sintering of Oxide Ceramics under Rapid Microwave Heating 233Yu. V. Bykov, S. V. Egorov, A. G. Eremeev, V. V. Kholoptsev, I. V. Plotnikov, K. I. Rybakov, and A. A. Sorokin Roles of Electromagnetically-Enhanced Free Energy on Non-Thermal Microwave Effects in Materials Processing—A Review and Discussion 243Boon Wong Thermal Stability of Electromagnetic Compressed FL-5305 PM Parts 261Daudi R. Waryoba ADVANCES IN COMPOSITES A New Production Process for Thermal Barrier Coating Material 273Yunsheng Wang, Wenzhong Tao, Decheng Pan, and Zuxiong Chen Simultaneous Synthesis and Sintering of Dense B4C/CNF Composites using a Pulsed Electric-Current Pressure Sintering and Evaluation of Their Thermal Properties 279Naoki Goto, Mitsuhiro Shima, Xiaolei Chen, Masaki Kato, Ken Hirota, and Toshiyuki Nishimura INNOVATIVE PROCESSING Advanced Microstructural Study of Nickel-Titanium Rotary Endodontic Instrument Tips 295Rahnuma Chowdhury, Matthew R. Wheeler, William A. T. Clark, William A. Brantley, and John M. Nusstein Synthesis of TiC-TiB2 Composite Powders from Carbon Coated TiO2 Precursors 301Zhezhen Fu and Rasit Koc Nickel Nitrate and Molybdenum Oxide as a Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia Synergistic Sintering Aid 313Clay Hunt, David Driscoll, Adam Weisenstein, and Stephen Sofie SURFACE PROTECTION FOR ENHANCED PERFORMANCE Modeling and Prediction of the Effective Thermal Conductivity of Thermal Barrier Coatings using FFT and FE Approaches 327N. Ferguen, Y. Lahmar, Y. Fizi, and R. Lakhdari Material Design of Ceramic Coating for Jet Engine by Electron Beam PVD 337Hideaki Matsubara CERAMIC OPTICAL MATERIALS Novel Glass and Glass Scintillators for Gamma-Ray and Neutron Detection 343Tapan K. Gupta, William Rhodes, Matthew M. Hall, Sean Breed, Urmila Shirwadkar, Michael R. Squillante, and Kanai S. Shah Praseodymium-Doped SiAlON Red Phosphors Prepared by Polymer-Derived Method 351Hui Yu, Quan Li, Ying Zhang, Xuan Cheng, and Chaoyang Gong ALUMINA MATERIALS Alumina Insulators for High Voltage Automotive Ignition Systems 361William J. Walker, Jr. THERMAL PROTECTION MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS Photogrammetric Surface Recession Measurements on Ablative Samples of Various Shape 373Thomas Reimer, Stefan Löhle, and Rainer Öfele Author Index 387

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsSecond Edition of Introduction to Materials ChemistryHarry R. Allcock Part I Introduction to Materials Chemistry Chapter 1 What is Materials Chemistry? Chapter 2 Fundamental Principles that Underlie Materials Chemistry Chapter 3 General Background to Materials Synthesis and Isolation Chapter 4 Chemistry of Representative Elements Chapter 5 Characterization Part II Different Types of Materials Chapter 6 Small Molecules in Solids Chapter 7 Porous Solids Chapter 8 Ceramics and Inorganic Glasses Chapter 9 Polymers: Fundamental Aspects Chapter 10 Polymer Morphology and Fabrication Chapter 11 Carbon-Based Materials Chapter 12 Metals and Alloys Chapter 13 Superconductors Part III Materials in Advanced Technology Chapter 14 Semiconductor Basics Chapter 15 Photolithography Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices Chapter 17 Optical and Photonic Devices Chapter 18 Materials for Energy Generation and Storage Chapter 19 Membranes Chapter 20 Surface Science Chapter 21 Biomedical Materials Chapter 22 Miniaturization in Materials Science Glossary Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisNONTHERMAL PLASMAS FOR MATERIALS PROCESSING This unique book covers the physical and chemical aspects of plasma chemistry with polymers and gives new insights into the interaction of physics and chemistry of nonthermal plasmas and their applications in materials science for physicists and chemists. The properties and characteristics of plasmas, elementary (collision) processes in the gas phase, plasma surface interactions, gas discharge plasmas and technical plasma sources, atmospheric plasmas, plasma diagnostics, polymers and plasmas, plasma polymerization, post-plasma processes, plasma, and wet-chemical processing, plasma-induced generation of functional groups, and the chemical reactions on these groups along with a few exemplary applications are discussed in this comprehensive but condensed state-of-the-art book on plasma chemistry and its dependence on plasma physics. While plasma physics, plasma chemistry, and polymer science are often handled separately, the aim of the authors iTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 References 15 2 Basic Principles of the Plasma State of Matter 17 2.1 Characteristics and Physical Properties of Plasmas 17 2.1.1 Ionization Degree, Energy Content and Classification 17 2.1.2 Quasi-Neutrality, Debye Shielding Length, Plasma Frequency 19 2.1.3 Ambipolar Diffusion 24 2.1.4 High-Frequency Conductivity and Permittivity of Non-Thermal Plasmas 26 2.1.5 Charged Particles in External Magnetic Field 30 2.1.6 Thermal and Non-Thermal Plasmas 34 2.1.7 Plasma Kinetics and Transport Equations 40 References 56 2.2 Elementary Processes and Collision Cross Section 57 2.2.1 Classification of Collision Processes in Non-Thermal Plasmas 57 2.2.2 The Collision Cross Section 64 References 77 2.3 Interaction of Non-Thermal Plasmas with Condensed Matter 79 2.3.1 Stationary Plasma Boundary Sheath and Bohm Criterion 80 2.3.2 Plasma Boundary Sheath in Front of the Floating Surface 83 2.3.3 Generalized Bohm Sheath Criterion 84 2.3.4 High-Voltage Plasma Sheath 84 2.3.5 Non-Stationary Plasma Sheaths 88 References 93 2.4 Non-Thermal Plasmas of Electric Gas Discharges 94 2.4.1 Overview 94 2.4.2 The Electric Breakdown in Gases 95 2.4.3 The Glow Discharge 101 2.4.4 Glow Discharges at Harmonic Electric Fields, RF and MW Plasmas 109 2.4.5 High-Voltage Breakdown at Atmospheric Pressure, Corona and Barrier Discharge 115 References 118 3 Plasma Diagnostics 119 3.1 Introduction 119 3.2 Overview of Diagnostic Methods Used for the Characterization of Non-Thermal Plasmas 119 3.3 Analysis of Charged and Neutral Plasma Particles in Non-Thermal Plasmas 119 3.3.1 Electric Probe Measurements 119 3.3.2 Special Case for Single Electric Probe Measurements in Radio-Frequency (RF) Plasmas 133 3.4 Microwave Interferometry 136 3.4.1 Microwave Propagation in Non-Magnetic Plasmas 136 3.4.2 Heterodyne Microwave Interferometry at 160 GHz 138 3.4.3 Electron Density Analysis in CCP and ICP with Argon and Oxygen as Processing Gas 140 3.5 Mass Spectrometry 143 3.5.1 Principle of Mass Spectrometry 143 3.5.2 Quadrupole Mass Spectrometry 143 3.5.3 Analysis of Low-Pressure Plasmas by Quadrupole Mass Spectrometry 145 References 155 3.6 Plasma and Laser-Induced Optical Emission Spectroscopy 157 3.6.1 Spectral Analysis of Plasma Emission (VUV, UV-vis-NIR) 157 3.6.1.1 Optical Emission Spectroscopy (OES) of Low-Pressure Plasmas – Examples 159 3.6.1.2 Determination of the Rotation Temperature from Atmospheric O2 A Band, PP and PQ Branch 161 3.6.1.3 Determination of Ground State Particle Density from Plasma Emission Spectrum 164 3.6.1.4 Abel Inversion 165 3.6.1.5 Phase Resolved Optical Emission Spectroscopy (PROES) of RF Plasmas 166 3.6.2 Laser-Induced Fluorescence (LIF) Spectroscopy 169 3.7 IR Broadband and IR Laser Absorption Spectroscopy 172 3.7.1 Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopy for Gas Phase Analysis 172 3.7.1.1 Principle of FTIR Spectroscopy 172 3.7.1.2 FTIR Gas Phase Spectroscopy of RF Plasma with Precursor Ethylenediamine and Argon 178 3.7.2 Infrared Tunable Diode Laser Absorption Spectroscopy (IR-TDLAS) 180 3.7.2.1 Configuration of the IR-TDLAS Experiment 180 3.7.2.2 Principle Procedure for Measuring Single Absorption Lines 181 3.7.2.3 IR-TDLAS of Fluorocarbon Radicals and Reaction Products in CF4 or CF4+H2 RF Plasmas 183 References 185 4 Methods of Polymer and Polymer Surface Analysis 187 4.1 Introductory Remarks 187 4.2 Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) or Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis (ESCA) 188 4.3 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry 193 4.4 NEXAFS – Use of Synchrotron Radiation 194 4.5 Infrared Reflection Absorption Spectroscopy (IRRAS) 195 4.6 Size-Exclusion Chromatography (SEC)/Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC) and Field-Flow-Fractionation (FFF) 196 4.7 Matrix-Assisted Laser/Desorption Ionization Time-of-Flight Mass Spectrometry (MALDI-ToF-MS) 197 4.8 Electrospray Ionization Time-of-Flight Mass Spectrometry (ESI-ToF-MS) 199 4.9 Overview of Methods 200 References 202 5 Chemical Interactions Between Polymer and Plasma 203 5.1 Introduction 203 5.2 General Conflict Between High Plasma Energies and Low Dissociation Energies of Bonds in Polymers 203 5.3 Chemical Bonds and Functional Groups in Polymers 206 5.4 Response of Different Types of Polymers to Plasma Exposure 208 References 214 6 Polymer Surface Functionalization 217 6.1 Important Properties of Polymers 217 6.2 Why Pretreatment? 217 6.3 Chemical and Structural Problems of Polymers Provoked by Plasma Pretreatment 220 6.4 Inevitability of Simultaneous Functionalization and Polymer Degradation 221 6.5 Physical and Chemical Attacks of the Plasma to Polyolefin Surfaces 223 6.6 Chemical Grafting onto Plasma-Exposed Polymer Surfaces 224 6.7 Oxidation of Polymers by Exposure to the Oxygen Low-Pressure Plasma 225 6.7.1 Introduction of O-Functional Groups Onto Polymer Surfaces 225 6.7.2 Nature of Oxygen-Plasma Introduced Functional Groups 226 6.7.3 Identification of O-Functional Groups Bonded Onto the Topmost Polymer Surface Layer 226 6.7.4 Fit Strategy of O-Functional Groups as Introduced by D. T. Clark 232 6.7.5 Other Surface-Sensitive Analytical Methods 233 6.7.6 Derivatization of O-Functional Groups 234 6.7.7 Identification of Radicals by Chemical Labeling or ESR Spectroscopy 236 6.7.8 Physical Characterization of Oxygen Plasma 237 6.7.9 Use of Plasma Afterglow for Polymer Modification 238 6.7.10 Surface Oxidation and Etching (see also the special section on etching) 239 6.7.11 Changes in Supermolecular Structure in Subsurface Layers Upon Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 240 6.7.12 Changes in Polymer Structure Generated by Exposure to the Vacuum UV Radiation of the Oxygen Plasma 245 6.7.13 Depth of Modification 248 6.7.14 Accelerated Artificial Aging of Polymers by Exposure to Low-Pressure Oxygen Plasma 251 6.7.15 Kinetics of Crosslinking 253 6.7.16 Time-Dependence of Oxygen Introduction 257 6.7.17 Reaction Details of Poly(ethylene terephthalate) Upon Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 264 6.7.18 Optimum Time of Exposure to Oxygen Plasma for Formation of O-Functional Groups and Preventive Avoidance of Structural Degradation and Decomposition 269 6.7.19 Dependence of Oxygen Introduction on Plasma Parameters 272 6.7.20 Behavior of Molecular Orientation and Chain Structure Upon Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 272 References 279 7 Sensitivity of Polymer Units and Functional Groups Towards Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 291 7.1 Introductory Remarks 291 7.2 Behavior of Polymer Structure Upon Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 291 7.3 Etching Behavior of Polymers Upon Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 294 7.4 Classification of Polymers with Similar Degradation Behavior on Exposure to Oxygen Plasma 299 7.5 Stability of Surface Functionalization and Superposition with Post-Plasma Effects upon Exposure to Air 302 7.6 Surface Oxidation of Polyolefins Using Atmospheric-Pressure Plasmas (DBD, APGD or Corona Discharge, Spark Jet, etc.) 308 7.6.1 Dielectric Barrier Discharge 308 7.6.2 Plasma-Assisted and Plasma-Less Spraying of Intact High-Molecular-Weight Polymers at Atmospheric Pressure 314 7.7 Oxidation of Carbon Nanomaterials 320 7.7.1 Graphene 320 7.7.2 Oxidation of Carbon Fibers 321 7.8 Generation of Monosort O-Functional Groups at Polyolefin Surfaces as Anchor Points for Grafting of Molecules 323 7.8.1 OH Groups 323 7.8.2 COOH Groups 332 7.8.3 CHO Groups 333 7.8.4 Super-Acidic Groups via Oxyfluorination 334 7.8.5 Functionalization of Fluorine-Containing Polymers with O-Functional Groups 337 7.9 Post-Plasma Chemical Grafting of Molecules, Oligomers or Polymers Onto OH-Groups 339 7.10 Course of Oxidation from Virgin Polymer to Oxidized Polymer and Finally to CO2 342 7.10.1 Problems of Depth Profiling of Oxidation at Polymer Surface 342 7.10.2 Binding Energies of Covalent Bonds in Polyolefins 343 7.10.3 Analogy Between Thermal Oxidation and Auto-Oxidation of Paraffins 344 7.10.4 Decarboxylation and Emission of CO2 345 7.10.5 Formation of Gaseous Low-Molecular-Weight Etch Products by Oxygen Plasma Treatment 345 7.10.6 Introduction of Oxygen-Containing Groups at Surface of Polyolefins as a Forerunner of Gasification/Etching 347 7.10.7 Formation and Characterization of Low-Molecular-Weight Oxidized Material (LMWOM) 350 7.10.8 LMWOM Formation by Re-Deposition of Etched Fragments 351 7.10.9 Depth Profiling of O/C from Surface to Bulk 352 7.10.9.1 Angle-Resolved XPS 353 7.10.9.2 Dynamic SIMS 354 7.10.9.3 Sputtering 354 7.10.9.4 Post-Plasma Oxidation 354 7.10.10 Tentative Mechanism 355 References 359 8 Ammonia and Bromine Plasmas 371 8.1 Generation of Monosort NH2 Groups 371 8.1.1 Brief History of Plasma-Induced Introduction of Primary Amino Groups Into the Surface of Polyolefins 371 8.1.2 Ways to Produce Amino Groups at Polymer Surfaces 372 8.1.3 Ammonia, Nitrogen-Hydrogen and Hydrazine Plasmas 373 8.1.4 Carbon Fibers Exposed to Ammonia Plasma 376 8.1.5 Oxygen Post-Plasma Introduction After Ammonia Plasma Exposure 380 8.1.6 Invalidity of Le Chatelier’s Principle in Low-Pressure Plasma 381 8.1.7 Time Dependence of N and NH2 Introduction on Exposure of the Ammonia Plasma into Polyolefin Surfaces 383 8.1.8 Hydrogenation Effect of NH3 Plasma 385 8.1.9 Modification of Polyolefin Within a 2μm-Deep Surface Layer 386 8.1.10 Bulk Analysis by NMR 389 8.1.11 Summary of All Attempts to Increase the Yield in NH2 Groups 391 8.1.12 Ammonia Plasma – Undesired Side and Post-Plasma Reactions 392 8.1.13 Deposition of Plasma Polymers Carrying Amino Groups as an Alternative to Ammonia Plasma Treatment 393 8.1.14 Chemical Labeling and Protection of NH2 Groups 394 8.1.15 Post-Plasma Chemical Grafting Onto NH2-Groups 396 8.1.16 Amino Groups at Polymer Surfaces – A Summary 399 8.2 Bromine Plasma 399 8.2.1 Chemical Aspects 399 8.2.2 Theoretical Considerations of the Plasma Process Using Bromine 404 8.2.3 Comparison of Halogen Chemistry 406 8.2.4 Behavior of Plasma-Brominated Surface Layers in Solvents 408 8.2.5 Plasma Polymerization of Vinyl and Allyl Bromide 410 8.2.6 Attempts to Increase Br Concentration in the Plasma Polymer Layers by Admixture of Br2 to Allyl Bromide or Bromoform 412 8.2.7 Dependence of Bromine Introduction Onto Polyolefin Surfaces on Plasma Parameters 412 8.2.8 Electron Temperature in the Bromoform Plasma 415 8.2.9 Yields in Introduction of Other Halogens 415 8.2.10 Plasma Bromination of Other Polymers 417 8.2.11 Chemical Post-Plasma Synthesis of New Monosort Functional Groups by Conversion of Plasma-Introduced Bromine Groups 418 8.2.12 Grafting of Molecules onto Br Groups by Nucleophilic Substitution 419 8.2.13 Grafting Density at Polyolefin Surfaces 422 8.2.14 Comparison of Surface Bromination of Polyolefins with Other Processes 426 8.2.15 Plasma Bromination of Graphitic and Carbon Surfaces 427 8.2.16 Efficiency in Bromination and Grafting of Carbon in Comparison to Polyolefins 441 8.2.17 Conclusions to Plasma Bromination 445 References 446 9 Noble Gas Plasmas 457 9.1 Characterization of Noble Gas Plasmas 457 9.2 Polymer Crosslinking Caused by Noble Gas Plasmas 458 9.3 Vacuum-Ultra Violet Radiation Emitted by Noble Gas Plasmas 460 References 464 10 Plasma Polymerization 467 10.1 Introduction 467 10.2 Milestones in History 470 10.3 General Features of Plasma Polymers 473 10.4 Mechanisms of Plasma Polymerization 475 10.4.1 Absence of Often Proposed Plasma-Induced Radical Chain-Growth Polymerization to Linear Macromolecules? 477 10.4.2 Radical Polymerization of Allyl Monomers 480 10.4.3 Ion-Molecule Reactions 482 10.4.4 Role of Polymerizing Intermediates 483 10.4.5 Crosslinking 483 10.4.6 Polymerization in Continuous-Wave Plasma 486 10.4.7 Pulsed Plasma Polymerization 491 10.4.8 Pressure- and Plasma-Pulsed Discharge 500 10.5 Special Aspects of Plasma Polymerization 506 10.5.1 Fragmentation-(poly)Recombination 506 10.5.2 Atomic Polymerization 506 10.5.3 Rearrangement and Crosslinking of the Already Deposited Plasma Polymer Layer by Plasma Particle Bombardment and Vacuum-UV Irradiation 507 10.5.4 Formation of Unsaturations 508 10.5.5 Formation of CH3 Groups 510 10.5.6 H/C Ratio in Plasma Polymers and “Quasi-Hydrogen-Plasma” 511 10.5.7 Hydrogen Exchange Between Plasma and Polymer Deposit 516 10.5.8 Existence of Crystalline and Supermolecular Structures in Plasma Polymers 517 10.5.9 Influence of Monomer or Precursor Type 518 10.5.10 Role of Pressure and Flow Rate 518 10.5.11 Role of Energy Dose 520 10.5.12 Plasma Polymerization of n-Hexane and Other Hydrocarbons 520 10.5.13 Dependence of Deposition Rate on Position of Sample in the Plasma Zone 524 10.5.14 Retention of Monomer Structure in Plasma Polymer –Changes in Aromaticity and Substitution 525 10.5.15 Molecular Weight Distribution 527 10.5.16 Energetic Balancing 529 10.6 Locus of Plasma Polymerization 530 10.6.1 Adsorption or Gas Phase? 530 10.6.2 Powder Formation 531 10.6.3 Redeposition of Etched Products as Layer 532 10.6.4 Special Effects of Irradiation of Growing Polymer Layer by Vacuum-UV Radiation from Plasma 533 10.6.5 Formation of a “Polymer Skin” 535 10.6.6 Graft Polymerization 535 10.7 Plasma Polymers with Monosort Functional Groups 537 10.7.1 OH Groups 540 10.7.2 COOH Groups 544 10.7.3 NH2 Groups 548 10.8 Attempts to Increase the Yield of Functional Group 556 10.8.1 Optimization of Plasma Conditions for Generation of NH2 Groups 556 10.8.2 Attempts to Increase the Concentration of NH2 Groups by Addition of Ammonia to Allylamine Plasma Polymerization 556 10.8.3 Alternative Methods 564 10.8.4 Plasma-Produced Amino Groups for Promotion of Adhesion 564 10.9 Plasma Copolymerization 566 10.9.1 General Remarks on the Background of Copolymerization and Its Definition 566 10.9.2 Copolymers with Allyl Alcohol 569 10.9.3 Copolymers with Acrylic Acid 575 10.9.4 Allylamine Copolymers 576 10.10 Grafting Onto Plasma Polymers as Special Case of ‘Graft-Copolymerization’ 580 10.10.1 General Aspects 580 10.10.2 Direct Grafting Onto Radical Sites 582 10.10.3 Grafting Onto Peroxy Radicals/Hydroperoxides 582 10.10.4 Reactions with OH Groups 583 10.10.5 Reactions with COOH Groups 584 10.10.6 Reactions with NH2 Groups 584 10.10.7 Reactions with Br Groups 585 10.10.8 Other Methods 585 10.11 Significant Side Reactions 585 10.11.1 Details of the IR Bands at 2200 cm-1 588 10.11.2 DSC Results 590 10.11.3 Post-Plasma Oxidation 591 10.11.4 Attempts to Eliminate Post-Plasma Oxidations 596 10.12 Plasma Polymers Deposited by Atmospheric-Pressure Plasmas 597 References 598 11 Technical Applications 621 11.1 Introduction 621 11.2 Adhesion Promotion 622 11.2.1 Polymer Surface Modification 624 11.2.2 Combination of Plasma Pretreatment and Wet-Chemical Post-Plasma Treatment 628 11.2.3 Deposition of Adhesion-Promoting Polymer Films 629 11.2.3.1 Direct Grafting 629 11.2.3.2 Grafting via Peroxy Route 630 11.2.3.3 Co-Evaporation or Sputtering of Metals During Plasma Polymerization 630 11.2.3.4 Plasma Polymer Coating 631 11.3 Cleaning 633 11.4 Wettability 635 11.5 Etching of Polymers 637 11.5.1 Preparation and Excavation of Supermolecular Structures of Polymers for Their Characterization by Electron Microscopy 637 11.5.2 Ashing 638 11.6 Barrier Layers or Barrier Formation 638 11.6.1 Organic and Inorganic Barrier Layer for Limiting Diffusion 638 11.6.2 Fluorination of Polymers 639 11.7 Anti-Fouling Layers 641 11.8 Sterilization 642 11.9 Water Purification and Desalination 643 11.10 Flame Protection 643 11.11 Textile Modification 644 11.12 Modification of Carbon Fibers and Nanotubes 644 11.13 Silent Discharge and Excimer Radiation 645 11.14 Conducting Films 646 11.15 Scratch-Resistant Coatings 646 11.16 Underwater Plasma 647 References 650 Index 671

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the chemistry of additives for high performance applications and a large number of chemical formulas are displayed in the text. The additives applications include: Analysis and separation techniques, such as high performance liquid chromatography, for example ionic liquids. Additives for electrical applications, such as capacitors, electrokinetic micropumps, lithium-ion batteries, and other battery types. Additives for solar cells for control of the active layer nanomorphology are documented as are additives for electrolyte membranes, fuel cells, such as membrane exchange humidifiers and coolant additives. Medical applications include high performance additives for the manufacture of scaffolds, controlled drug release, and nanofibers. Additives for lubricants including the deposit control, anti-wear additives, fluid loss control additives in drilling applications. Additives for concrete uses such as set rTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Analysis and Separation Techniques 1 1.1 High Performance Liquid Chromatography 1 1.1.1 Ionic Liquids as Mobile Phase Additives 1 1.1.2 Food Additives 12 1.1.3 Chaotropicity 14 1.1.4 Cigarette Additives 16 1.1.5 Chiral Separation 20 1.1.6 Peptides and Proteins 31 1.1.7 1,4-Dihydroxy-2-Naphthoic Acid 32 1.1.8 Diesel Lubricating Additives 32 1.1.9 Acidic Drugs 34 1.2 Chelation Ion Chromatography 39 1.3 Membranes 40 1.3.1 Carbon Dioxide Separation 40 1.3.2 Hollow Fiber Membranes 41 References 42 2 Electrical Applications 47 2.1 Capacitors 47 2.1.1 Triethanolamine 47 2.1.2 Supercapacitors 47 2.2 Electrokinetic Micropumps 50 2.3 Lead-Acid Batteries 50 2.3.1 Activated Carbon Additives 51 2.3.2 High Performance Positive Electrode 51 2.4 Lithium-Ion Batteries 53 2.4.1 Ionic Diffusion 56 2.4.2 Functional Electrolytes 56 2.4.3 Synergetic Effect of Conductive Additives 58 2.4.4 In-Situ Coating of Cathode by Electrolyte Additive 58 2.4.5 Bipolar Architectures 59 2.4.6 Janus Separator 63 2.4.7 Synthesis of Vanadium Cathodes 64 2.4.8 Graphite 64 2.4.9 Silicon 67 2.4.10 Carbon Nanotubes 69 2.4.11 Carbonate Additives 70 2.4.12 Borate Additives 73 2.4.13 Tris(pentafluorophenyl) Borane 78 2.4.14 Phosphoric Additives 79 2.4.15 Sulfur Additives 83 2.4.16 Isothiocyanates 90 2.4.17 Other Additive Types 92 2.5 Nickel Batteries 101 2.5.1 High-Rate Discharge Performance 106 2.5.2 Multiphase Nano-Nickel Hydroxide 108 2.5.3 Nickel-Metal Hydride Batteries 108 2.6 Sodium-Ion Batteries 112 2.6.1 Antimony-Based Intermetallic Alloy Anodes 112 2.7 Solar Cells 113 2.7.1 Star-Shaped Molecules 113 2.7.2 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 115 2.7.3 Perovskite 119 2.7.4 Control of Active Layer Nanomorphology 120 2.7.5 Phosphonium Halides as Processing Additives and Interfacial Modifiers 121 2.7.6 Polymeric Solar Cells 121 2.8 Fuel Cells 123 2.8.1 Porosity Additive 125 2.8.2 Electrolyte Membranes 126 2.8.3 Molybdenum Oxide 130 2.8.4 Nano-Metal Oxides 131 2.8.5 Coolant Additive 131 2.8.6 Membrane Exchange Humidifier 133 2.8.7 Poly(vinyl alcohol)/Titanium Dioxide Nanocomposites 134 3 Medical Uses 145 3.1 High Performance Additive Manufactured Scaffolds 145 3.1.1 Nanotechnology 145 3.1.2 Poly(caprolactone)Tricalcium Phosphate Scaffolds 146 3.1.3 Silk Fibroin Nanofibers 147 3.1.4 Calcium Phosphate, Hydroxyapatite, and Poly(d,l-lactic acid) 152 3.1.5 Propylene Fumarate Lactic Acid Copolymer 152 3.1.6 Thermosensitive Composite Gel 153 3.1.7 Biomimetic Wet-Stable Fibers 153 3.1.8 Poly(ester urea) from l-Leucine 154 3.1.9 Static Cell Seeding Versus Vacuum Cell Seeding 154 3.1.10 Controlled Drug Release 155 References 156 4 Lubricants 159 4.1 Fuels 159 4.1.1 Graphene Oxide 159 4.1.2 Deposit Control 160 4.2 Lubricant Additives 161 4.2.1 GL Ratings 161 4.2.2 Organophosphates 162 4.2.3 Crankcase Oils 162 4.2.4 Low Sulfur and Low Metal Additive Formulations 163 4.2.5 Lithium Soaps 166 4.2.6 Titanium Complex Grease Composition 171 4.2.7 Improving theWetting Properties of Ionic Liquids 176 4.3 Anti-Wear Additives 179 4.3.1 Ionic Liquids 179 4.3.2 Castor Oil Tris(diphenyl phosphate) 179 4.3.3 Bifunctional Hairy Silica Nanoparticles 180 4.3.4 Boron Thiophosphite 180 4.3.5 Hydroxyaromatic Compounds 181 4.4 Fluid Loss Control Additives 183 4.4.1 Graphene Oxide 183 4.4.2 Montmorillonite 183 4.5 Warm Mix Asphalt Additives 184 5 Concrete Additives 189 5.1 Properties of Concrete 189 5.1.1 Pozzolans 191 5.1.2 Calcium Aluminate Cement 191 5.1.3 Rutting of Bituminous Concrete 193 5.2 Set Retarders 193 5.2.1 Superplasticizers 194 5.3 Accelerators 194 5.3.1 Aqueous Dispersions of Silica 195 5.3.2 Non-Chloride Cement Accelerators 195 5.4 Dispersants and Thinners 196 5.4.1 Xylonic Acid 196 5.4.2 Thixotropy 197 5.4.3 Flowability 198 5.5 Defoamers 199 5.5.1 Ethoxylated Fatty Alcohol Acrylates 200 5.5.2 Hydroxyl Alkyl Acrylate 200 5.5.3 Tributyl Phosphate 202 5.5.4 Silicone Oils 202 5.5.5 Other Additives 202 5.6 Shrinkage Compensation 202 5.7 Permeability 203 5.7.1 Expanded Perlite 204 5.7.2 Pozzolanic Materials 204 5.7.3 Cracking Catalyst 205 5.8 Air Entraining Agents 206 5.8.1 Fluorochemical Surfactants 207 5.8.2 Superabsorbent Polymers 207 5.8.3 Rubber Crumb 208 5.8.4 Autoclaved Aerated Concrete 209 5.9 Corrosion Protection 210 5.9.1 Modified Hydrotalcites 210 5.9.2 Chloride Ion Scavenging 210 5.9.3 Dopamelanin 211 5.10 Superabsorbent Polymers 212 5.11 Fibers 212 5.11.1 Poly(oxymethylene) Fibers 212 5.12 Additives fromWastes 214 5.12.1 Waste Rubber 214 5.12.2 anomodified Concrete Additive 216 References 220 6 Other Uses 225 6.1 High Performance Additive for Powder Coatings 225 6.1.1 Antimicrobial Powder Coatings 225 6.2 Radiation Shielding 226 6.3 Superabsorbent Polymers 229 6.4 Laser Additive Manufacturing of High Performance Materials 232 6.4.1 Laser Metal Deposition Additive Manufacturing 232 6.4.2 Hybrid Processes 233 6.5 High Temperature Cooling Application 234 References 236 Index 239 Tradenames 239 Acronyms 242 Chemicals 244 General Index 255

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive compilation of contemporary research initiatives in polymer science & technology details the advancement in the fields of coatings, sensors, energy harvesting and gas transport. Polymers are the most versatile material and used in all industrial sectors because of their light weight, ease of processing and manufacturing, the ability to mold into intricate shapes, and its cost-effectiveness. They can easily be filled with a range of reinforcing agents like fibers, particulates, flakes and spheres in micro/nano sizes and compete with conventional materials in terms of performance, properties and durability. Polymers continue to be discovered and the demand for them is increasing. The book comprises a series of chapters outlining recent developments in various high performance applications of Advanced Polymeric Materials. The topics covered encompass specialized applications of polymeric matrices, their blends, composites and nanocomposites pertaining to smart & hTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Polymer Nanocomposites and Coatings: The Game Changers 1Gaurav Verma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Polymer Nanocomposites 4 1.2.1 Types of Polymer Nanocomposites: Processing 4 1.2.1.1 Equipment and Processing 7 1.2.2 Polymer Property Enhancements 9 1.2.3 Polymer Nanocomposite Structure and Morphology 10 1.2.4 Characterization of Polymer Nanocomposites 11 1.2.4.1 Morphological Testing 12 1.2.4.2 Spectral Testing 14 1.2.4.3 Testing 15 1.2.5 Applications 16 1.2.5.1 Nanocomposite Coatings: Focus PU-Clay Coatings 17 1.3 Conclusions 18 Acknowledgments 19 References 19 2 DGEBA Epoxy/CaCO3 Nanocomposites for Improved Chemical Resistance and Mechanical Properties for Coating Applications 23Manoj Kumar Shukla, Archana Mishra, Kavita Srivastava, A K Rathore and Deepak Srivastava 2.1 Introductıon 24 2.2 Experimental 26 2.2.1 Preparation of Epoxy/CaCO3 Nanocomposites 26 2.2.2 Preparation of Panels 27 2.2.3 Preparation of Reagents for Chemical Resistance 27 2.2.3.1 Artificial Seawater (ASW) 27 2.2.4 Preparation of Films 28 2.3 Characterization of Epoxy/CaCO3 Nanocomposite 28 2.3.1 Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectra 28 2.3.2 Mechanical Properties 28 2.3.2.1 Impact Resistance 28 2.3.2.2 Scratch Hardness 29 2.3.2.3 Adhesion and Flexibility Test 29 2.3.2.4 Chemical Resistance Test 29 2.3.2.5 Morphological Properties 29 2.4 Results and Discussion 30 2.4.1 FTIR Spectroscopic Analysis 30 2.4.2 Studies on Mechenical Properties 32 2.4.2.1 Impact Resistance 32 2.4.2.2 Studies of Scratch Hardness 35 2.4.2.3 Adhesion and Flexibility Test (Mandrel Bend Test) 36 2.4.3 Studies on Chemical Resistance 37 2.4.4 Morphological Studies 38 2.5 Conclusıon 41 References 42 3 An Industrial Approach to FRLS (Fire Retardant Low Smoke) Compliance in Epoxy Resin-Based Polymeric Products 45Hari R and Sukumar Roy 3.1 Introduction 46 3.1.1 Incorporation of Additives 47 3.2 Experimental 49 3.3 Characterizatıon, Results and Discussion 53 3.4 Conclusion 57 Acknowledgments 58 References 58 4 Polymer-Based Organic Solar Cell: An Overview 59Neha Patni, Pranjal Sharma, Mythilypriya Suresh, Birendrakumar Tiwari and Shibu G. Pillai 4.1 Introduction 60 4.2 Polymer Solar Cells: An Insight 61 4.2.1 Why Polymer Solar Cells are Preferable 62 4.3 Layer Stack Constructıon of Polymer Solar Cells 62 4.4 Simple Working of a Polymer Solar Cell 63 4.5 Life-Cycle Analysis (LCA) 63 4.6 Current Condition of Polymer Solar Cells 64 4.7 Materials Used for Developing PSC 65 4.7.1 Synthesis of Polymer Materials 65 4.7.1.1 Stille Cross-Coupling 66 4.7.1.2 Suzuki Cross-Coupling 66 4.7.1.3 Direct Arylation Polymerization 66 4.7.1.4 Polymerization Rates 67 4.7.2 Conjugated Polymers 67 4.7.3 Side-Chain Influence in Polymers 68 4.7.4 Purification 69 4.8 Degradation and Stability of a PSC 69 4.8.1 Physical Degradation 69 4.8.1.1 Morphological Stability 69 4.8.1.2 Flexibility and Delamination 70 4.8.2 Chemical Degradation 70 4.8.2.1 Polymer Instability 70 4.8.2.2 Photochemical Degradation 71 4.9 Dyes 72 4.9.1 Natural Dyes Used for Polymer Solar Cells 73 4.10 Performed Experiments 75 4.10.1 Experimental Setup 1 75 4.10.2 Experimental Setup 2 77 4.11 Summary 78 References 79 5 A Simple Route to Synthesize Nanostructures of Bismuth Oxyiodide and Bismuth Oxychloride (BiOI/BiOCl) Composite for Solar Energy Harvesting 83I. D. Sharma, Chander Kant, A. K. Sharma, Ravi Ranjan Pandey and K. K. Saini 5.1 Introduction 83 5.1.1 Bismuth Oxyhalide [BiOX (X = Cl, Br, I )]:General Remarks 87 5.1.2 Synthesis of Bismuth Oxyhalide 89 5.2 Photocatalytic Activity Measurements 91 5.3 Results and Discussion 91 5.4 Conclusion 96 Acknowledgments 97 References 98 6 Investigation of DC Conductivity, Conduction Mechanism and CH4 Gas Sensor of Chemically Synthesized Polyaniline Nanofiber Deposited on DL-PLA Substrate 101Muktikanta Panigrahi, Debabrat Pradhan, Subhasis Basu Majumdar and Basudam Adhikari 6.1 Introduction 102 6.2 Experimental Details 104 6.2.1 Preparation of Desired Materials 104 6.2.2 Characterization of DL-PLA Films and DL-PLA/PANI-ES Composites 105 6.3 Results and Discussion 106 6.3.1 Scanning Electron Microscopic (SEM) Analysis 106 6.3.2 Attenuated Total Reflectance Fourier Transformation Infrared (ATR-FTIR) Spectroscopic Analysis 107 6.3.3 Ultraviolet Visible (UV-Vis) Absorption Spectroscopic Analysis 109 6.3.4 DC Electrical Analysis 111 6.4 Conclusion 120 Acknowledgments 121 References 121 7 Electrical Properties of Conducting Polymer-MWCNT Binary and Hybrid Nanocomposites 127B.T.S. Ramanujam and S. Radhakrishnan 7.1 Introduction 128 7.1.1 Theoretical Background of Electrical Conductivity in CPCs 129 7.1.2 Factors Affecting Electrical Percolation Threshold 129 7.1.3 Processing Methods of CPCs 130 7.1.4 Conduction Mechanism in CPCs 130 7.1.5 Multiwalled Carbon Nanotube (MWCNT) – Potential Conducting Filler 131 7.1.5.1 Synthesis Methods of Carbon Nanotubes 132 7.1.6 Electrical Properties of Polymer-MWCNT Composites 134 7.2 AC/DC Properties of Polyethersulfone (PES)-MWCNT, PES-Graphite-MWCNT Nanocomposites 135 7.2.1 Material Properties 135 7.2.2 Composite Preparation 135 7.3 Discussion of Results 136 7.3.1 Electrical Behavior of Polyethersulfone (PES)-MWCNT Binary and PES-Graphite-MWCNT Hybrid Composites 136 7.3.2 Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Analysis 138 7.4 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 139 Acknowledgment 141 References 141 8 Polyaniline-Based Sensors for Monitoring and Detection of Ammonia and Carbon Monoxide Gases 145Neha Patni, Neha Jain and Shibu G. Pillai 8.1 Introduction 145 8.2 Conducting Polymers 146 8.2.1 Polyaniline 147 8.2.1.1 Structure of Polyaniline 148 8.2.1.2 Properties of Polyaniline 148 8.3 Ammonia Detection 149 8.3.1 Sources of Ammonia 149 8.3.2 Experiment: Ammonia Sensor 153 8.4 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection 154 8.4.1 Common Sources of CO 154 8.4.2 Sensors Used for Detection of CO 155 8.5 Conclusion 158 References 159 9 Synthesis and Characterization of Luminescent La2Zr2O7/Sm3+ Polymer Nanocomposites 163Pramod Halappa and C. Shivakumara 9.1 Introduction 164 9.1.1 Luminescence 165 9.1.2 Photoluminescence 165 9.1.2.1 Fluorescence 165 9.1.2.2 Delayed Fluorescence or Phosphorescence 167 9.1.2.3 Jablonski Diagram 167 9.1.2.4 Phosphors 169 9.1.2.5 Photoluminescence of Samarium Ion (Sm3+) 173 9.1.3 Scope and Objectives of the Present Study 173 9.2 Experimental 175 9.2.1 Synthesis of Sm3+-Doped La2Zr2O7 175 9.2.2 Preparation of PVA Polymer Thin Films 176 9.2.3 Preparation of Sm3+-Doped La2Zr2O7 with PVA-Polymer Composite Films 177 9.2.4 Characterization 177 9.3 Results and Discussıon 178 9.3.1 Structural Analysis by X-Ray Diffraction 178 9.3.2 SEM Analysis 181 9.3.3 UV-Vis Spectroscopy 181 9.3.4 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 181 9.3.5 Photoluminescence Properties 182 9.3.6 Chromaticity Color Coordinates 184 9.4 Conclusion 186 Aknowledgment 186 References 186 10 Study of Gas Transport Phenomenon in Layered Polymer Nanocomposite Membranes 191A.K. Patel and N.K. Acharya 10.1 Introduction 192 10.1.1 Transport Phenomenon 193 10.1.2 Metal Coating 196 10.2 Experimental 196 10.2.1 Fabrication of Nanocomposite Membrane 196 10.2.2 Gas Permeability Test 197 10.3 Results and Discussion 199 10.4 Conclusion 203 Acknowledgment 203 References 204 11 Synthesis and Ion Transport Studies of K+ Ion Conducting Nanocomposite Polymer Electrolytes 207Angesh Chandra, Alok Bhatt and Archana Chandra 11.1 Introduction 208 11.2 Experimental 209 11.3 Results and Discussion 210 11.4 Conclusion 216 Acknowledgment 217 References 217 12 Recent Studies in Polyurethane-Based Drug Delivery Systems 219Archana Solanki and Sonal Thakore 12.1 Introduction 219 12.1.1 Polyurethane Chemistry: A Brief Overview 219 12.1.2 Carbohydrate Cross-Linked Polyurethanes 227 12.1.3 Biomedical Applications of PUs 229 12.2 Experimental 232 12.2.1 Impact of PU Chemistry on Drug Delivery Profiles 232 12.2.2 Drug Loading and Release Kinetics 235 12.2.3 Waterborne pH-Responsive Polyurethanes 236 12.3 Conclusion 240 References 240 13 Synthesis and Characterization of Polymeric Hydrogels for Drug Release Formulation and Its Comparative Study 245Nisarg K. Prajapati, Nirmal K. Patel and Vijay Kumar Sinha 13.1 Introduction 246 13.2 Materials and Method 246 13.2.1 Preparation of Sodium Salt of Partly Carboxylic Propyl Starch (Na-PCPS) 246 13.2.2 Preparation of 2-Hydroxy-3-((2-hydroxypropanoyl)oxy)propyl acrylate 247 13.2.3 Graft Copolymerization with PCPS-g-2-hydroxy-3-((2-hydroxypropanoyl)oxy) propyl acrylate (HPA) 247 13.2.4 Drug Loading in Polymeric Binder 248 13.2.5 Preparation of Matrix Tablets 249 13.2.6 In-Vitro Dissolution Studies of Tablet 250 13.3 Result and Discussion 250 13.3.1 13C-NMR Spectra Analysis of 2-Hydroxy-3-((2-hydroxypropanoyl)oxy) propyl acrylate 250 13.3.2 XRD Analysis of Starch, CPS, PCPS-g-2-hydroxy-3-((2-hydroxypropanoyl)oxy) propyl acrylate (HPA) 250 13.3.3 In-Vitro Study 251 13.4 Conclusion 253 Acknowledgment 253 References 253 14 Enhancement in Gas Diffusion Barrier Property of Polyethylene by Plasma Deposited SiOx Films for Food Packaging Applications 255Purvi Dave, Nisha Chandwani, S. K. Nema and S. Mukherji 255 14.1 Introduction 256 14.2 Transport of Gas Molecules Through Packaging Polymers 258 14.2.1 Packaging Polymer Struture 258 14.2.2 Transport of Gas Molecules Through Semicrystalline Polymer Films 258 14.2.3 Measurement of Gas Transmission Rate Through a Packaging Film 260 14.3 Experimental 261 14.3.1 Contact Angle Measurements to Determine Film Wetting Properties 262 14.3.2 FTIR-ATR Study to Determine Film Chemistry 262 14.3.3 Film Thickness Measurement 262 14.3.4 High Resolution Scanning Electron Microscopy to Determine Film Morphology 262 14.3.5 OTR Measurement to Determine Oxygen Diffusion Barrier Property 263 14.4 Results 263 14.4.1 Observations 263 14.4.1.1 Wetting Behavior of SiOx Films 263 14.4.1.2 Chemistry of SiOx Film 264 14.4.1.3 Deposition Rate 264 14.4.1.4 High Resolution Scanning Electron Microscopy 265 14.4.1.5 Oxygen Transmission Rate 267 14.4.2 Discussion 267 14.5 Conclusion 271 References 272 15 Synthesis and Characterization of Nanostructured Olivine LiFePO4 Electrode Material for Lithium-Polymer Rechargeable Battery 275K. Rani, M. Abdul Kader and S. Palaniappan 15.1 Introduction 276 15.1.1 Energy Storage: Rechargeable Batteries 276 15.1.1.1 Lithium Battery 278 15.1.1.2 Comparison between Li-Polymer Battery and Liquid Battery 279 15.1.1.3 Commercial Production 280 15.1.1.4 Advantages of Lithium Polymer Batteries 281 15.1.1.5 Limitations of Lithium-Polymer Batteries 282 15.1.2 Cell Manufacturers Using Lithium Iron Phosphate 282 15.1.3 Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4) 284 15.1.3.1 Synthesis of LiFePO4 286 15.1.3.2 Structure of LiFePO4 287 15.1.3.3 Work on LiFePO4 Cell Systems 290 15.2 Experimental 292 15.2.1 Synthesis 292 15.3 Characterization 292 15.4 Results and Discussion 293 15.4.1 Morphology 293 15.4.2 E-DAX 294 15.4.3 Charge-Discharge Characteristics 294 15.4.4 XRD Studies on LiFePO4 295 15.5 Conclusion 296 Acknowledgments 297 References 298 Index 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisPROJECT BENEFIT REALISATION AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Dispels the confusion between project management success and project success, showing how project sponsors can govern their projects to succeed in delivering the strategic benefits originally envisaged Project management success does not automatically lead to project success. Many large projects fail to live up to expectations, with between half and two-thirds of large projects either failing to deliver or delivering few strategic benefits. Traditional project management resources focus on delivering a project on time and on budget, yet they fail to supply top managers, many of whom find themselves in the role of accidental project sponsors, with guidance on how to govern their projects to succeed. Project Benefit Realisation and Project Management: The 6Q Governance Approach bridges the strategy to performance gap by providing boards, senior managers and project sponsors with the six critical questions nTable of ContentsList of Illustrations Preface 5 I. Introduction 6 The Board, Governance and Projects 6 Key Concepts 9 II. How to Govern Projects: 6 Questions Q1. What is the desired outcome? War Story – Lying to the Board How to know whether Q1 has been addressed adequately Q2. How much change? Q3. Sponsor Case Study – SkyHigh Q4. Success Measures Case Study – TechMedia Commentary Q5. The right project culture Case Study – The Agency Q6. Monitoring Case Study – TechMedia (contd. from p26) III. Tools and Techniques Q1 Strategy – Diagnostic Toolkit Case: A ‘routine’ project failure at TechServ Q2 Change – Tools and techniques Stakeholder Analysis Business Process Mapping Results Chain or Logic Model Influencer Analysis Case Study – The Agency Q4 Measurement – Tools and techniques Q6 Monitoring – tools and techniques IV. Further insight When do you ask each 6Q Governance™ question? The best guidance available V. The Future of Project Management and Governance Where do we go from here? The history and the future of project management Conclusion Appendix 1 – TechMedia Appendix 2 –SKYHIGH INVESTMENTS Appendix 3 –THE AGENCY Bibliography About the Authors Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisUpdated and expanded coverage of the latest trends and developments in fiber composite materials, processes, and applications Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites, Fourth Editionfeatures updated and expanded coverage of all technical aspects of fiber composites, including the latest trends and developments in materials, manufacturing processes, and materials applications, as well as the latest experimental characterization methods. Fiber reinforced composite materials have become a fundamental part of modern product manufacturing. Routinely used in such high-tech fields as electronics, automobiles, aircraft, and space vehicles, they are also essential to everyday staples of modern life, such as containers, piping, and appliances. Little wonder, when one considers their ease of fabrication, outstanding mechanical properties, design versatility, light weight, corrosion and impact resistance, and excellent fatigue strength. ThisFourth Editionof the classic reference?the standard text for composite materials courses, worldwide?offers an unrivalled review of such an important class of engineering materials. Still the most comprehensive, up-to-date treatment of the mechanics, materials, performance, analysis, fabrication, and characterization of fiber composite materials available,Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites, Fourth Editionfeatures: Expanded coverage of materials and manufacturing, with additional information on materials, processes, and material applicationsUpdated and expanded information on experimental characterization methods?including many industry specific testsDiscussions of damage identification techniques using nondestructive evaluation (NDE)Coverage of the influence of moisture on performance of polymer matrix composites, stress corrosion of glass fibers and glass reinforced plastics, and damage due to low-velocity impactNew end-of-chapter problems and exercises with solutions found on an accompanying websiteComputer analysis of laminates No other reference provides such exhaustive coverage of fiber composites with such clarity and depth.Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites, Fourth Editionis, without a doubt, an indispensable resource for practicing engineers, as well as students of mechanics, mechanical engineering, and aerospace engineering. Visit the Companion Website at: https://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-830336.htmlTable of ContentsPreface xv About the Companion Website xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Definition 1 1.2 Classification 2 1.3 Particulate Composites 2 1.4 Fiber-Reinforced Composites 5 1.5 Applications of Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composites 7 Exercise Problems 15 References 16 2 Fibers, Matrices, and Fabrication of Composites 17 2.1 Reinforcing Fibers 17 2.1.1 Glass Fibers 19 2.1.2 Carbon and Graphite Fibers 25 2.1.3 Aramid Fibers 29 2.1.4 Boron Fibers 30 2.1.5 Other Fibers 31 2.2 Matrix Materials 33 2.2.1 Polymers 33 2.2.2 Metals 44 2.3 Fabrication of Fiber Composite Products 45 2.3.1 Fabrication with Thermosetting Resin Matrices 45 2.3.2 Fabrication with Thermoplastic Resin Matrices 59 2.3.3 Sandwich Composites 61 2.3.4 Fabrication with Metal Matrices 63 2.3.5 Fabrication with Ceramic Matrices 64 Suggested Reading 65 3 Micromechanics of Unidirectional Composites 67 3.1 Introduction 67 3.1.1 Nomenclature 68 3.1.2 Volume and Weight Fractions 68 3.2 Longitudinal Loading: Deformation, Modulus, and Strength 70 3.2.1 Model 70 3.2.2 Deformation under Small Loads 71 3.2.3 Load Sharing 74 3.2.4 Behavior beyond Initial Deformation 76 3.2.5 Failure Mechanism and Longitudinal Strength 78 3.2.6 Factors Influencing Longitudinal Strength and Stiffness 80 3.3 Transverse Loading: Modulus and Strength 83 3.3.1 Model 83 3.3.2 Elasticity Methods of Stiffness Prediction 85 3.3.3 Halpin–Tsai Equations for Transverse Modulus 86 3.3.4 Transverse Strength 89 3.4 Shear Modulus 92 3.5 Poisson’s Ratios 96 3.6 Expansion Coefficients and Transport Properties 97 3.6.1 Thermal Expansion Coefficients 97 3.6.2 Moisture Absorption and Expansion Coefficients 99 3.6.3 Transport Properties 100 3.7 Failure of Unidirectional Composites 105 3.7.1 Microscopic Failure Events 105 3.7.2 Failure under Longitudinal Tensile Loads 108 3.7.3 Failure under Longitudinal Compressive Loads 111 3.7.4 Failure under Transverse Tensile Loads 115 3.7.5 Failure under Transverse Compressive Loads 116 3.7.6 Failure under In-Plane Shear Loads 120 3.8 Typical Properties of Unidirectional Fiber Composites 120 Exercise Problems 121 References 126 4 Short-Fiber Composites 129 4.1 Introduction 129 4.2 Load Transfer to Fibers 130 4.2.1 Simplified Analysis of Stress Transfer 130 4.2.2 Stress Distributions from Finite-Element Analysis 134 4.3 Predicting Modulus and Strength of Short-Fiber Composites 136 4.3.1 Average Fiber Stress 136 4.3.2 Longitudinal and Transverse Modulus of Aligned Short-Fiber Composites 137 4.3.3 Modulus of Randomly Oriented Short-Fiber Composites 138 4.3.4 Longitudinal Strength of Aligned Short-FiberComposites 142 4.3.5 Strength of Randomly Oriented Short-Fiber Composites 143 4.4 Influence of Matrix Ductility on Properties 144 Exercise Problems 148 References 149 5 Macromechanics Analysis of an Orthotropic Lamina 151 5.1 Introduction 151 5.1.1 Orthotropic Materials 151 5.2 Stress–Strain Relations for Unidirectional Composites 153 5.2.1 Engineering Constants in Longitudinal and Transverse Directions 153 5.2.2 Off-Axis Engineering Constants 156 5.2.3 Transformation of Engineering Constants 158 5.3 Hooke’s Law and Stiffness and Compliance Matrices 167 5.3.1 General Anisotropic Material 167 5.3.2 Transformation of Stress, Strain, and Elasticity Constants 169 5.3.3 Stress–Strain Relations for Orthotropic Materials 169 5.3.4 Transversely Isotropic Material 170 5.3.5 Isotropic Material 171 5.3.6 Orthotropic Material under Plane Stress 172 5.3.7 Compliance Tensor and Compliance Matrix 173 5.3.8 Relations between Engineering Constants and Elements of Stiffness and Compliance Matrices 174 5.3.9 Restrictions on Elastic Constants 177 5.3.10 Transformation of Stiffness and Compliance Matrices 178 5.3.11 Invariant Forms of Stiffness and Compliance Matrices 182 5.4 Strengths of an Orthotropic Lamina 185 5.4.1 Maximum-Stress Theory 186 5.4.2 Maximum-Strain Theory 188 5.4.3 Maximum-Work Theory 190 5.4.4 Importance of Sign on Off-Axis Strength of Composites 193 Exercise Problems 196 References 200 6 Analysis of Laminated Composites 202 6.1 Classical Lamination Theory 202 6.1.1 Introduction 202 6.1.2 Laminate Displacements and Strains 202 6.1.3 Laminate Stresses 205 6.1.4 Resultant Forces and Moments 206 6.1.5 Laminate Constitutive Relations 207 6.2 Laminate Description System 213 6.3 Design, Construction, and Properties of Laminates 215 6.3.1 Symmetric Laminates 215 6.3.2 Unidirectional, Cross-Ply, and Angle-Ply Laminates 215 6.3.3 Quasi-isotropic Laminates 216 6.4 Failure of Laminates 224 6.4.1 Initial Failure 224 6.4.2 Laminate Analysis after Initial Failure 228 6.5 Hygrothermal Stresses in Laminates 238 6.5.1 Concepts of Thermal Stresses 238 6.5.2 Hygrothermal Stress Calculations 240 6.6 Laminate Analysis through Computers 251 Exercise Problems 255 References 259 7 Analysis of Laminated Plates and Beams 260 7.1 Introduction 260 7.2 Governing Equations for Plates 261 7.2.1 Equilibrium Equations 261 7.2.2 Equilibrium Equations in Terms of Displacements 264 7.3 Application of Plate Theory 266 7.3.1 Bending of Specially Orthotropic Laminates 266 7.3.2 Buckling 276 7.3.3 Free Vibrations 281 7.4 Deformations Due to Transverse Shear 286 7.4.1 First-Order Shear Deformation Theory 287 7.4.2 Higher-Order Shear Deformation Theory 290 7.5 Analysis of Laminated Beams 293 7.5.1 Governing Equations for Laminated Beams 293 7.5.2 Application of Beam Theory 295 Exercise Problems 299 References 301 8 Advanced Topics in Fiber Composites 302 8.1 Interlaminar Stresses and Free-Edge Effects 302 8.1.1 Concepts of Interlaminar Stresses 302 8.1.2 Determination of Interlaminar Stresses 304 8.1.3 Effect of Stacking Sequence on Interlaminar Stresses 306 8.1.4 Approximate Solutions for Interlaminar Stresses 308 8.1.5 Summary 312 8.2 Fracture Mechanics of Fiber Composites 313 8.2.1 Introduction 313 8.2.2 Fracture Mechanics Concepts and Measures of Fracture Toughness 315 8.2.3 Fracture Toughness of Composite Laminates 323 8.2.4 Whitney–Nuismer Failure Criteria for Notched Composites 327 8.3 Joints for Composite Structures 332 8.3.1 Adhesively Bonded Joints 333 8.3.2 Mechanically Fastened Joints 337 8.3.3 Bonded-Fastened Joints 339 Exercise Problems 339 References 340 9 Performance of Fiber Composites: Fatigue, Impact, and Environmental Effects 345 9.1 Fatigue 345 9.1.1 Introduction 345 9.1.2 Fatigue Damage 346 9.1.3 Factors Influencing Fatigue Behavior 354 9.1.4 Empirical Relations for Fatigue Damage and Fatigue Life 361 9.1.5 Fatigue of High-Modulus Fiber-Reinforced Composites 362 9.1.6 Fatigue of Short-Fiber Composites 366 9.2 Impact 371 9.2.1 Introduction and Fracture Process 371 9.2.2 Energy-Absorbing Mechanisms and Failure Models 373 9.2.3 Effect of Materials and Testing Variables on Impact Properties 377 9.2.4 Hybrid Composites and Their Impact Strength 383 9.2.5 Damage Due to Low-Velocity Impact 387 9.3 Environmental-Interaction Effects 391 9.3.1 Fiber Strength 391 9.3.2 Matrix Effects 397 Exercise Problems 405 References 406 10 Experimental Characterization of Composites 414 10.1 Introduction 414 10.2 Measurement of Physical Properties 415 10.2.1 Density 415 10.2.2 Constituent Weight and Volume Fractions 415 10.2.3 Void Volume Fraction 416 10.2.4 Thermal Expansion Coefficients 417 10.2.5 Moisture Absorption and Diffusivity 417 10.2.6 Moisture Expansion Coefficients 418 10.3 Measurement of Mechanical Properties 419 10.3.1 Properties in Tension 419 10.3.2 Properties in Compression 423 10.3.3 In-Plane Shear Properties 425 10.3.4 Flexural Properties 433 10.3.5 Interlaminar Shear Strength and Fracture Toughness 438 10.3.6 In-Plane Fracture Toughness Tests 442 10.3.7 Impact Tests 450 10.3.8 Tests for Aerospace Applications 455 10.4 Damage Identification Using Nondestructive Evaluation Techniques 457 10.4.1 Ultrasonics 457 10.4.2 Acoustic Emission 460 10.4.3 X-Radiography 461 10.4.4 Thermography 463 10.4.5 Laser Shearography 464 10.5 General Remarks on Characterization 464 Exercise Problems 468 References 470 11 Emerging Composite Materials 475 11.1 Nanocomposites 475 11.2 Carbon–Carbon Composites 477 11.3 Biocomposites 478 11.3.1 Biofibers 478 11.3.2 Wood–Plastic Composites (WPCs) 480 11.3.3 Biopolymers 481 11.4 Composites in “Smart” Structures 482 11.5 Further Emerging Trends 483 Suggested Reading 484 Appendix 1 Matrices and Tensors 488 A1.1 Matrix Definitions 488 A1.2 Matrix Operations 493 A1.3 Tensors 498 References 509 Appendix 2 Equations of Theory of Elasticity 510 A2.1 Analysis of Strain 510 A2.2 Analysis of Stress 514 A2.3 Stress–Strain Relations for Isotropic Materials 518 References 520 Appendix 3 Laminate Orientation Code 521 A3.1 Standard Code Elements 521 A3.2 Positive and Negative Angles 522 A3.3 Symmetric Laminates 524 A3.4 Sets 524 A3.5 Hybrid Laminates 525 Appendix 4 Properties of Fiber Composites 527 Appendix 5 Computer Programs for Laminate Analysis 532 Appendix 6 Introduction to MATLAB 534 A6.1 Introduction: Getting Started 534 A6.2 Vectors and Matrices 537 A6.2.1 Defining Matrices 537 A6.2.2 Basic Matrix Functions 537 A6.2.3 Extracting Parts of Matrices 539 A6.2.4 Basic Matrix Operations 539 A6.3 Programming in MATLAB 540 A6.3.1 Logical and Relational Operators 540 A6.3.2 Loop and Logical Statements 540 A6.3.3 MATLAB Functions: Saving Programs 540 A6.3.4 Input/Output Functions 541 A6.3.5 Controlling the Appearance of Floating Point Number 541 A6.4 Plotting Tools 542 A6.4.1 Basic Plot Commands 542 A6.4.2 Line Styles and Colors 543 Index 545

Read more less

Book SynopsisAthoroughguide to the fundamental development of linear piezoelectricity for vibrations Vibrations of Linear Piezostructuresis an introductory text that offers a concise examination of the general theory of vibrations of linear piezostructures. This important book brings together in one comprehensive volume the most current information on the theory for modeling and analysis of piezostructures. The authorsexplore the fundamentalprinciplesof piezostructures,review the relevant mathematics, continuum mechanics and elasticity, and continuum electrodynamics as they are applied to electromechanical piezostructures,and include the work that pertains to linear constitutive laws of piezoelectricity. The book addresses modeling of linear piezostructures via Newton's approach and Variational Methods. In addition, the authors explore the weak and strong forms of the equations of motion, Galerkin approximation methods for the weak form, Fourier or modal methods, and finite element methods. This imTable of Contents1.1 The Piezoelectric Effect 13 1.1.1 Ferroelectric Piezoelectrics 14 1.1.2 One Dimensional Direct and Converse Piezoelectric Effect 17 1.2 Applications 19 1.2.1 Energy Applications 19 1.2.2 Sensors 20 1.2.3 Actuators or Motors 20 1.3 Outline of the Book 22 2 Mathematical Background 27 2.1 Vectors, Bases, and Frames 27 2.2 Tensors 29 2.3 Symmetry, Crystals, and Tensor Invariance 33 2.3.1 Geometry of Crystals 33 2.3.2 Symmetry of Tensors 41 2.4 Problems 43 3 Review of Continuum Mechanics 45 3.1 Stress 45 3.1.1 The Stress Tensor 46 3.1.2 Cauchy’s Formula 47 3.1.3 The Equations of Equilibrium 48 3.2 Displacement and Strain 49 3.3 Strain Energy 55 3.4 Constitutive Laws for Linear Elastic Materials 56 3.4.1 Triclinic Materials 59 3.4.2 Monoclinic Materials 60 3.4.3 Orthotropic Materials 60 3.4.4 Transversely Isotropic Materials 60 3.5 The Initial–Boundary Value Problem of Linear Elasticity 61 3.6 Problems 63 4 Review of Continuum Electrodynamics 65 4.1 Charge and Current 65 4.2 The Electric and Magnetic Fields 66 4.2.1 The Definition of the Static Electric Field 66 4.2.2 The Definition of the Static Magnetic Field 67 4.3 Maxwell’s Equations 69 4.3.1 Polarization and Electric Displacement 69 4.3.2 Magnetization and Magnetic Field Intensity 73 4.3.3 Maxwell’s Equations in Gaussian Units 75 4.3.4 Scalar and Vector Potentials 76 4.4 Problems 77 5 Linear Piezoelectricity 81 5.1 Constitutive Laws of Linear Piezoelectricity 81 5.2 The Initial–Value Boundary Problem of Linear Piezoelectricity 84 5.2.1 Piezoelectricity and Maxwell’s Equations 84 5.2.2 The Initial–Boundary Value Problem 85 5.3 Thermodynamics of Constitutive Laws 87 5.4 Symmetry of Constitutive Laws for Linear Piezoelectricity 91 5.4.1 Monoclinic C2 Crystals 92 5.4.2 Monoclinic Cs Crystals 93 5.4.3 Trigonal D3 Crystals 94 5.4.4 Hexagonal C6v Crystals 94 5.5 Problems 95 6 Newton’s Method for Piezoelectric Systems 97 6.1 An Axial Actuator Model 97 6.2 An Axial, Linear Potential, Actuator Model 102 6.3 A Linear Potential, Beam Actuator 104 6.4 Composite Plate Bending 108 6.5 Problems 116 7 Variational Methods 119 7.1 A Review of Variational Calculus 119 7.2 Hamilton’s Principle 122 7.2.1 Uniaxial Rod 123 7.2.2 Bernoulli-Euler Beam 125 7.3 Hamilton’s Principle for Piezoelectricity 126 7.3.1 Uniaxial Rod 130 7.3.2 Bernoulli-Euler Beam 132 7.4 Bernoulli-Euler Beam with a Shunt Circuit 133 7.5 Relationship to other Variational Principles 140 7.6 Lagrangian Densities 143 7.7 Problems 151 8 Approximations 153 8.1 Classical, Strong, and Weak Formulations 153 8.2 Modeling Damping and Dissipation 161 8.3 Galerkin Approximations 163 8.3.1 Modal or Eigenfunction Approximations 167 8.3.2 Finite Element Approximations 179 8.4 Problems 200 Supplementary Material 201 S.1 A Review of Vibrations 201 S.1.1 SDOF Systems 201 S.1.2 Distributed Parameter Systems 205 S.1.3 MDOF Equations of Motion 219 S.2 Tensor Analysis 222 S.3 Distributional and Weak Derivatives 224

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith the ever-increasing amount of research being published it is a Herculean task to be fully conversant with the latest research developments in any field, and the arena of adhesion and adhesives is no exception. Thus, topical review articles provide an alternate and very efficient way to stay abreast of the state-of-the-art in may subjects representing the field of adhesion science and adheisves. Based on the success and the warm reception accorded to the premier volume in this series Progress in Adhesion and Adhesives (containing the review articles published in Volume 2 (2014) of the journal Reviews of Adhesion and Adhesives (RAA)), volume 2 comprises 14 review articles published in Volume 4 (2016) of RAA. The subjects of these 14 reviews fall into the following general areas: 1. Surface modification of polymers for a variety of purposes. 2. Adhesion aspects in reinforced composites 3. Thin films/coatings and their adhesion measurement Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Surface Modification of Natural Fibers for Reinforced Polymer Composites 1M. Masudul Hassan and Manfred H. Wagner 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Natural Fibers (NFs): Sources and Classification 2 1.1.2 Composition of NFs 2 1.1.3 New Trends in the Chemistry of Cellulose 3 1.1.4 Action of Reducing and Oxidizing Agents 6 1.1.5 Drawbacks of Natural Fibers 7 1.2 Modifications of Natural Fibers 9 1.2.1 Physical Modifications of Natural Fibers 9 1.2.2 Chemical Modifications of Natural Fibers 11 1.3 Composites 16 1.3.1 Hybrid Composites 17 1.3.2 Compatibilization 17 1.3.3 Effect of Radiation on Fiber Composites 19 1.3.4 Initiative in Product Development of NF Composites 20 1.4 Properties Evaluation 20 1.4.1 Lantana-Camara Fiber 20 1.4.2 Tea Dust-Polypropylene (TDPP) Composite 23 1.4.3 Water Absorption Test 27 1.4.4 Jute Fiber Reinforced Vinylester Composites 27 1.4.5 Coir Fiber Reinforced Polyester Composites 29 1.4.6 Effect of Alkali Treatment on Hemp, Sisal and Kapok for Composite Reinforcement 31 1.4.7 DSC Analysis of Mercerized Fibers 34 1.4.8 XRD Analysis of Mercerized Fibers 34 1.4.9 SEM Analysis of Alkalized Fibers 34 1.5 Conclusions 36 Acknowledgements 37 References 37 2 Factors Influencing Adhesion of Submicrometer Thin Metal Films 45A. Lahmar, A. Assaf, M.J. Durand, S. Jouanneau, G. Thouand and B. Garnier 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Experimental Details 47 2.2.1 Film Deposition 47 2.2.2 Measurement of the Critical Load 48 2.3 Results and Discussion 50 2.3.1 Scanning Electron Microscopy Observations 50 2.3.2 Effects of Film Thickness and Substrate Bias on the Mean Critical Load 51 2.3.3 Effects of Ion Bombardment Etching of Substrate Surface 54 2.3.4 Effect of Ageing Treatment after Deposition 55 2.3.5 Effect of Roughness of the Substrate Surface 56 2.3.6 Dependence of Critical Load and Thermal Resistance on Deposition Conditions 58 2.3.7 Correlation Between Adhesion and Thermal Contact Resistance 60 2.4 Summary 63 References 63 3 Surface Treatments to Modulate Bioadhesion 67D.G. Waugh, C. Toccaceli, A.R. Gillett, C.H. Ng, S.D. Hodgson and J. Lawrence 3.1 Introduction 67 3.1.1 The Role of Wettability in Biological and Microbiological Adhesion 69 3.2 Various Surface Treatments 70 3.2.1 Laser Surface Treatment 70 3.2.2 Lithography 75 3.2.3 Micro/Nano Contact Printing 77 3.2.4 Plasma Surface Treatment 79 3.2.5 Radiation Grafting 81 3.2.6 Ion Beam and Electron Beam Processing 82 3.3 Prospects 85 3.4 Summary 89 References 89 4 Hot-Melt Adhesives from Renewable Resources 101P. Utekar, H. Gabale, A. Khandelwal and S.T. Mhaske 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Potential Renewable Base Polymers 103 4.3 Lactic Acid Based Polymers as Hot-Melt Adhesives 104 4.4 Soy Protein Based Polymers as Hot-Melt Adhesives 106 4.5 Bio-Based Polyamides as Hot-Melt Adhesives 107 4.6 Starch Based Polymers as Hot-Melt Adhesives 109 4.7 Summary 111 References 111 5 Relevance of Adhesion in Particulate/Fibre-Polymer Composites and Particle Coated Fibre Yarns 115V.B. Mohan, K. Jayaraman and D. Bhattacharyya 5.1 Introduction 115 5.1.1 Mechanisms of Adhesion 118 5.1.2 Tests for Interfacial Adhesion in Composites 120 5.2 Theory of Interaction 124 5.2.1 Adhesion Mechanism in Fibre Yarns and Polymer Systems 125 5.2.2 Surface Modification Techniques 126 5.2.3 Adhesion Properties of Fibres 130 5.2.4 Morphological Evaluation of Fibre Yarns Coated with Nanoparticles 131 5.2.5 Interfacial Adhesion in Particle and Polymer Blends 138 5.3 Summary 140 References 142 6 Study and Analysis of Damages in Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Joints of Laminated FRP Composites 147S.K. Panigrahi and Rashmi Ranjan Das 6.1 Introduction 148 6.2 Damage Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Laminated Composite Joints 149 6.2.1 Damage Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Flat FRP Composite Joints 149 6.2.2 Damage Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Tubular FRP Composite Joints 151 6.3 Effect of Adhesive Property on Damages in Adhesively Bonded Joints 152 6.4 Effect of Functionally Graded Adhesives on Damages in Adhesively Bonded Joints 153 6.5 Conclusion 156 References 156 7 Surface Modification Strategies for Fabrication of Nano-Biodevices 161Ankur Gupta, Vinay Kumar Patel, Rishi Kant and Shantanu Bhattacharya 7.1 Introduction 161 7.2 Interfacial Interactions for Proper Functioning of Nano-biodevices 164 7.3 Strategies for Surface Modification of Polymers in Nano-biodevices 167 7.3.1 Surface Modification of Polymers Through Plasma Treatment 168 7.3.2 Surface Modification of Surfaces Through Chemical Route 168 7.3.3 Surface Modification Through Silanization of Surfaces 169 7.3.4 Surface Modification of Polymers with SAMs by Micro-contact Printing Technique 170 7.3.5 Other Surface Modification Strategies 171 7.4 Benefits of Surface Modifications to Nano-Biodevices 176 7.5 Summary 177 References 177 8 Effects of Particulates on Contact Angles and Adhesion of a Droplet 187Youhua Jiang, Wei Xu and Chang-Hwan Choi 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Theoretical Background of Contact Angles and Adhesion of a Droplet 189 8.3 Effects of Particulates on Static Contact Angles 191 8.3.1 Deposition of Particulates on Solid-liquid Interface 192 8.3.2 Adsorption of Particulates on Liquid-Gas Interface 194 8.3.3 Adsorption of Surfactants on Solid-Gas Interface 195 8.4 Effects of Particulates on Droplet Pinning 197 8.4.1 Flows Within a Droplet 199 8.4.2 Interactions amongst Particulates, Solid Substrates, and Liquid-Gas Interfaces 201 8.4.3 Structural Disjoining Pressure 204 8.5 Effects of Particulates on Droplet Motion 205 8.5.1 Contact Line Velocity 205 8.5.2 Stick-Slip Behavior 206 8.6 Summary 210 8.7 Prospects 210 Acknowledgements 211 References 211 9 Thermal Stresses in Adhesively Bonded Joints/Patches and Their Modeling 217M. Kemal Apalak 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 Thermal Stresses 219 9.2.1 Bi-material Strips 219 9.2.2 Linear Analyses 220 9.2.3 Nonlinear Analyses 225 9.3 Thermal Residual Stresses 230 9.3.1 Residual Stresses - Adhesive Curing 233 9.3.2 Residual Stresses - Hygrothermal Ageing 246 9.4 Viscoelastic Analyses 250 9.5 Fracture and Fatigue 255 9.6 Summary 263 References 264 10 Ways to Mitigate Thermal Stresses in Adhesively Bonded Joints/Patches 271M. Kemal Apalak 10.1 Introduction 271 10.2 CFRP Strengthened Beams and Plates 273 10.3 Weld-Bonded Joints, Cutting Tools 276 10.4 Adhesive Joints Under Cryogenic Temperatures 279 10.5 Low and High-Temperature Adhesives 285 10.6 Fillers and Electrically-conductive Adhesives 289 10.6.1 Adhesive Layer with Fillers or Voids 289 10.6.2 Electrically-conductive Adhesives 292 10.7 Microelectronics, Optics and Nuclear Applications 296x Contents 10.8 Dental Applications 307 10.9 Summary 312 References 314 11 Laser-Assisted Electroless Metallization of Polymer Materials 321Piotr Rytlewski, Bartomiej Jagodzi?ski and Krzysztof Moraczewski 11.1 Introduction 321 11.2 Application of Lasers in the Metallization of Polymer Materials 323 11.2.1 Modification in a Gaseous Medium 324 11.2.2 Modification in Solutions 326 11.2.3 Modification of Thin Films 327 11.2.4 Modification of Composite Materials 328 11.3 Modification of Polymer Composite Materials 328 11.3.1 Polyamide Composites 328 11.4 Summary 346 Acknowledgement 347 References 347 12 Adhesion Measurement of Coatings on Biodevices/Implants 351Wei-Sheng Lei, Kash Mittal and Zhishui Yu 12.1 Introduction 352 12.2 Mechanical Test Methods of Adhesion Measurement 354 12.2.1 Cross-Cut Test 354 12.2.2 Peel Test 355 12.2.3 Scribe (Scratch) Test 356 12.2.4 Pull-Off (Tensile) Test 360 12.2.5 Single-Lap Shear Test 363 12.2.6 Blister Test 364 12.2.7 Micro- and Nano- Indentation Tests 365 12.2.8 Small-Punch Test 369 12.2.9 Micro- and Nano- Scale Tensile Testing 369 12.2.10 Four-Point Bending Test 371 12.2.11 Other Test Methods 372 12.3 Summary and Remarks 373 References 374Contents xi 13 Cyanoacrylate Adhesives 381P. Rajesh Raja 13.1 Introduction 381 13.2 Synthesis and Processing 382 13.3 Applications 386 13.3.1 Industrial and Consumer 386 13.3.2 Medical 390 13.3.3 Forensics 393 13.3.4 Recent Advances in Cyanoacrylate Adhesives 393 13.4 Summary 394 References 394 14 Promotion of Adhesion of Green Flame Retardant Coatings onto Polyolefins by Depositing Ultra-Thin Plasma Polymer Films 399Moustapha E. Moustapha, J”rg F. Friedrich, Zeinab R. Farag, Simone Krger, Gundula Hidde and Maged M. Azzam 14.1 Introduction 400 14.2 Role of Adhesion in the Use of Thick Fire-Retardant Coatings 400 14.3 Strategies for Adhesion Promotion of Flame-Retardant Coatings 406 14.4 Plasma Polymerization 409 14.5 Adhesion Improvement by Plasma Polymer Layers 412 14.5.1 Inorganic Flame Retardant Layers (Water Glass Layers) 412 14.5.2 Coating with Prepolymer of Melamine Resin 414 14.5.3 Curing of the Melamine Prepolymer 414 14.6 Results of Adhesion Improvement Using Adhesion-Promoting Plasma Polymers 415 14.6.1 Results of Adhesion Promotion 415 14.6.2 Locus of Adhesion Failure 418 14.7 Flame Retardancy Tests 420 14.8 Thermal Behavior 421 14.9 Summary 423 Acknowledgement 424 References 424

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a strategic framework for cost efficient engineering of market moving patent portfolios by organizing patent engineering efforts around the problems that innovators solve for their customers and not the technologies developed to solve these problems. Patents are a vital asset in the modern business world. They allow patent holders to introduce new products in to a market while deterring other market players from simply copying innovative features without making comparable investments in research and development. In years past, a few patents may have provided adequate protection. That is no longer the case. In today''s world, it is critical that innovative companies protect the features of their products that give them a competitive advantage with a family or portfolio of patents that are strategically generated to protect the market position of the patent holder. A patent portfolio that deters competitors from introducing competitive products in a tiTable of Contents1 Background for Developing and Implementing a Patent Strategy 1 2 The Structure of a Patent 17 3 The Path to Obtaining Patents 37 4 Identifying Patentable Inventions 47 5 Identifying What Has Yet to Be Invented 63 6 Prioritizing the Inventions 77 7 Prioritizing Your Patent Applications 91 8 Proposing and Writing Claims 107 9 Conducting Prior Art Searches 131 10 The Mindsets of Innovators and Attorneys and other Cautionary Notes 145 11 Reviewing Your Proposed Patent Applications 157 12 Writing Your Patent Applications 169 13 The Next Step: Prosecution of Your Patent Application 199 14 What Next? 221 15 Final Thoughts 245 Appendix 1 Electrophotography: Building a Patent Portfolio in a Mature but Evolving Field 255

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the recent advances in photovoltaics materials and their innovative applications. Many materials science problems are encountered in understanding existing solar cells and the development of more efficient, less costly, and more stable cells. This important and timely book provides a historical overview, but concentrates primarily on the exciting developments in the last decade. It includes organic and perovskite solar cells, photovoltaics in ferroelectric materials, organic-inorganic hybrid perovskite, materials with improved photovoltaic efficiencies as well as the full range of semiconductor materials for solar-to-electricity conversion, from crystalline silicon and amorphous silicon to cadmium telluride, copper indium gallium sulfide selenides, dye sensitized solar cells, organic solar cells, and environmentally-friendly copper zinc tin sulfide selenides.Table of ContentsPreface xxi Part 1 Silicon Photovoltaics 1 1 Emergence of Continuous Czochralski (CCZ) Growth for Monocrystalline Silicon Photovoltaics 3Santosh K. Kurinec, Charles Bopp and Han Xu 1.1 Introduction 4 1.1.1 The Czochralski (CZ) Process 5 1.1.2 Continuous Czochralski Process (CCZ) 11 1.2 Continuous Czochralski Process Implementations 13 1.3 Solar Cells Fabricated Using CCZ Ingots 15 1.3.1 n-Type Mono-Si High-Efficiency Cells 15 1.3.2 Gallium-Doped p-Type Silicon Solar Cells 17 1.4 Conclusions 19 References 19 2 Materials Chemistry and Physics for Low-Cost Silicon Photovoltaics 23Tingting Jiang and George Z. Chen 2.1 Introduction 24 2.2 Crystalline Silicon in Traditional/Classic Solar Cells 26 2.2.1 Manufacturing of Silicon Solar Cell 26 2.2.2 Efficiency Loss in Silicon Solar Cell 29 2.2.3 New Strategies for the Silicon Solar Cell 32 2.3 Low-Cost Crystalline Silicon 33 2.3.1 Metallurgical Silicon 33 2.3.2 Upgraded Metallurgical-Grade Silicon 33 2.3.2.1 Properties of Upgraded Metallurgical-Grade Silicon 34 2.3.2.2 Production of Upgraded Metallurgical-Grade Silicon 35 2.3.2.3 Development of Upgraded Metallurgical-Grade Silicon Solar Cells 36 2.3.3 High-Performance Multicrystalline Silicon 37 2.3.3.1 Crystal Growth 37 2.3.3.2 Material Properties of High-Performance Multicrystalline Silicon 39 2.3.3.3 Solar Cell Based on High-Performance Multicrystalline Silicon 40 2.4 Advanced p-Type Silicon—in Passivated Emitter and Rear Cell (PERC) 41 2.4.1 Passivated Emitter Solar Cells 41 2.4.1.1 Passivated Emitter Solar Cell (PESC) 41 2.4.1.2 Passivated Emitter and Rear Cell 42 2.4.1.3 Passivated Emitter, Rear Locally Diffused Solar Cells 43 2.4.1.4 Passivated Emitter, Rear Totally Diffused Solar Cells 44 2.4.2 Surface Passivation 45 2.5 Advanced n-Type Silicon 46 2.5.1 Interdigitated Back Contact (IBC) Solar Cell 47 2.5.2 Silicon Heterojunction (SHJ) Solar Cells 50 2.5.2.1 The Device Structure and the Advantages of HIT Solar Cells 51 2.5.2.2 Strategies of Achieving High-Efficiency HIT Solar Cell 52 2.6 Conclusion 53 References 54 3 Recycling Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic Modules 61Pablo Dias and Hugo Veit 3.1 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 62 3.2 Photovoltaic Modules 65 3.2.1 First-Generation Photovoltaic Modules 66 3.3 Recyclability of Waste Photovoltaic Modules 69 3.3.1 Frame 70 3.3.2 Superstrate (Front Glass) 71 3.3.3 Metallic Filaments (Busbars) 72 3.3.4 Photovoltaic Cell 73 3.3.5 Polymers 74 3.3.6 Recyclability Summary 75 3.4 Separation and Recovery of Materials The Recycling Process 76 3.4.1 Mechanical and Physical Processes 76 3.4.1.1 Shredding 77 3.4.1.2 Sieving 77 3.4.1.3 Density Separation 79 3.4.1.4 Manual Separation 82 3.4.1.5 Electrostatic Separation 82 3.4.2 Thermal Processes—Polymers 84 3.4.3 Separation Using Organic Solvents 86 3.4.4 Pyrometallurgy 90 3.4.5 Hydrometallurgy 90 3.4.6 Electrometallurgy 93 3.5 New Trends in the Recycling Processes 94 References 98 Part 2 Emerging Photovoltaic Materials 1034 Photovoltaics in Ferroelectric Materials Origin, Challenges and Opportunities 105Charles Paillard, Grégory Geneste, Laurent Bellaiche, Jens Kreisel, Marvin Alexe and Brahim Dkhil 4.1 Physics of the Photovoltaic Effect in Ferroelectrics 106 4.1.1 Conventional Photovoltaic Technologies 106 4.1.1.1 The p–n Junction 106 4.1.1.2 The Shockley–Queisser Limit 109 4.1.2 Mechanisms of the Photovoltaic Effect in Ferroelectric Materials 110 4.1.2.1 The Bulk Photovoltaic Effect 110 4.1.2.2 Barrier Effects 118 4.2 Opportunities and Challenges of Photoferroelectrics 123 4.2.1 To Switch or not to Switch 124 4.2.1.1 Switchability 124 4.2.1.2 Influence of Defects 125 4.2.2 The Bandgap Problem 127 4.2.3 Application of Light-Induced Effects in Ferroelectrics Beyond Solar Cells 129 4.2.3.1 Photovoltaics and ICTs 130 4.2.3.2 Photo-Induced Strain Toward Optically Controlled Actuators 130 4.2.3.3 Photochemistry for Clean Energy and Environment 131 4.3 Conclusions 133 Acknowledgements 134 References 134 5 Tin-Based Novel Cubic Chalcogenides A New Paradigm for Photovoltaic Research 141Sajid Ur Rehman, Faheem K. Butt, Zeeshan Tariq and Chuanbo Li 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Cubic Tin Sulfide (π-SnS) 145 5.2.1 Application π-SnS in Solar Cells 145 5.2.2 Application of π-SnS in Optical Devices 147 5.3 Cubic Tin Selenide (π-SnSe) 153 5.3.1 Application of π-SnSe in Solar Cells 153 5.3.2 Application of π-SnSe in Optical Devices 154 5.4 Cubic Tin Telluride (π-SnTe) 157 5.4.1 Application of π-SnTe in Optical Devices 158 5.5 Conclusion 160 Acknowledgement 160 References 161 6 Insights into the Photovoltaic and Photocatalytic Activity of Cu-, Al-, and Tm-Doped TiO2 165Antonio Sánchez-Coronilla, Javier Navas, Elisa I. Martín, Teresa Aguilar, Juan Jesús Gallardo, Desireé de los Santos, Rodrigo Alcántara and Concha Fernández-Lorenzo 6.1 Introduction 166 6.2 Materials and Methods 167 6.2.1 Experimental 167 6.2.2 Computational Framework 169 6.3 Cu-TiO2 Doping 170 6.3.1 Photovoltaics of the DSSCs 175 6.4 Al-TiO2 Doping 177 6.5 Tm-TiO2 Doping 181 6.5.1 Photovoltaic Characterization 184 6.5.2 Photocatalytic Activity 186 6.6 Conclusions 187 References 189 7 Theory of the Photovoltaic and Light-Induced Effects in Multiferroics 195Bruno Mettout and Pierre Tolédano 7.1 Insufficiency of the Traditional Approach to the Bulk Photovoltaic Effect 196 7.2 Theoretical Approach to the Photovoltaic and Light-Induced Effects 197 7.3 Response Functions under Linearly Polarized Light 199 7.3.1 Mean Symmetry of the Light Beam 199 7.3.2 Response Functions 202 7.3.2.1 Achiral and Nonmagnetic Materials 202 7.3.2.2 Chiral and Magnetic Materials 205 7.4 Selection Procedures 206 7.4.1 External Selection 206 7.4.2 Internal Selection 208 7.5 Application of the Theory to the Photovoltaic and Photo-Induced Effects in LiNbO3 210 7.5.1 Second-Order Photovoltaic Effect 210 7.5.2 Photovoltaic Effects in LiNbO3 212 7.5.3 Optical Rectification, Photomagnetic, and Photo-Toroidal First-Order Effects 215 7.5.4 First-Order Photoelastic and Photo-Magnetoelectric Effects 216 7.6 Magnetoelectric, Photovoltaic, and Magneto-Photovoltaic Effects in KBiFe2O5 218 7.6.1 Magnetoelectric Effects in KBiFe2O5 in Absence of Illumination 218 7.6.2 Photovoltaic and Magneto-Photovoltaic Effects in KBiFe2O5 220 7.7 Photo-Magnetoelectric and Magneto-Photovoltaic Effects in BiFeO3 224 7.7.1 Photo-Magnetoelectric Effects 224 7.7.2 Photovoltaic Effects in BiFeO3 226 7.7.3 Magneto-Photovoltaic Effects in BiFeO3 227 7.8 Photorefractive and Photo-Hall Effects in Tungsten Bronzes 229 7.8.1 The Photorefractive Effect 230 7.8.2 The Photo-Hall Effect 231 7.9 Summary and Conclusion 234 Acknowledgement 235 References 235 8 Multication Transparent Conducting Oxides: Tunable Materials for Photovoltaic Applications 239Peediyekkal Jayaram 8.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Multication Film Growth and Analysis 243 8.3 Structural Analysis 244 8.4 Raman Spectra 247 8.5 Surface Morphology (AFM) 248 8.6 Optical Properties UV-Vis Transmittance Spectra 248 8.7 Electrical Properties 253 8.8 Conclusion 257 References 258 Part 3 Perovskite Solar Cells 261 9 Perovskite Solar Cells Promises and Challenges 263Qiong Wang and Antonio Abate 9.1 The Scientific and Technological Background 264 9.1.1 The Share of Silicon Solar Cells and Thin Film Solar Cells in Photovoltaic Market 264 9.1.2 The Bottleneck of Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells and Organic Solar Cells 266 9.1.3 From a Cost-Effective Alternative to the Highly Efficient Solution 269 9.2 The Fast Development of PSCs 270 9.2.1 The Fundamental Optoelectronic Properties of Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Lead Halide Perovskite Materials 271 9.2.1.1 Optical Properties 272 9.2.1.2 Electronic Properties 276 9.2.2 Composition Adjustment of Perovskite 288 9.2.2.1 Mixed Halides 288 9.2.2.2 Multi-Cations 292 9.2.2.3 Phase Segregation 297 9.2.3 Versatile Deposition Methods of Perovskite Film 297 9.2.3.1 Solution-Processed Methods 298 9.2.3.2 Vapor Deposition Methods 306 9.2.4 Charge Selective Contacts in PSCs 308 9.2.4.1 Electron Selective Contacts 309 9.2.4.2 Hole Selective Contacts 311 9.2.5 Evaluation of PSCs 315 9.2.5.1 J–V curve 315 9.2.5.2 Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) 316 9.2.6 The Systematic Understanding of PSCs 318 9.2.6.1 Moisture Vulnerability of Perovskite Materials 318 9.2.6.2 The Role of Grain Boundaries 318 9.2.6.3 Ion Migration and Hysteresis 322 9.2.6.4 Interface/Bulk Defects and Passivation 324 9.2.7 PSCs in a Tandem 328 9.2.7.1 Structures of Perovskite Tandem Cells 328 9.2.7.2 Transparent Contacts and Recombination Contacts 330 9.3 Remaining Challenges and Prospects of PSCs 331 9.3.1 Lead-Free PSCs 331 9.3.2 Stable and Cheap Contact Materials 336 9.3.3 Strategies toward Stable PSCs 338 9.3.3.1 Against Moisture 338 9.3.3.2 Against UV Light 339 9.3.3.3 Against Heat 341 9.3.4 Large-Area Production of Highly Efficient PSCs 342 References 345 10 Organic–Inorganic Hybrid Perovskite, CH3NH3PbI3 Modifications in Pb Sites from Experimental and Theoretical Perspectives 357Javier Navas, Antonio Sánchez-Coronilla, Juan Jesús Gallardo, Jose Carlos Piñero, Teresa Aguilar, Elisa I. Martín, Rodrigo Alcántara, Concha Fernández-Lorenzo and Joaquin Martín-Calleja 10.1 Introduction 358 10.2 Low Doping on Pb Sites 359 10.2.1 Materials and Methods 359 10.2.1.1 Experimental 359 10.2.1.2 Computational Details 361 10.2.2 Properties of the Perovskite Prepared 362 10.2.2.1 XRD 362 10.2.2.2 Diffuse Reflectance UV-Vis Spectroscopy 365 10.2.2.3 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 366 10.2.2.4 SEM and Cathodoluminescence 369 10.2.3 Theoretical Analysis 371 10.2.3.1 Structure and Local Geometry 371 10.2.3.2 DOS and PDOS Analysis 372 10.2.3.3 ELF Analysis 376 10.3 High Doping on Pb Sites 378 10.3.1 Properties of the Perovskite Prepared 379 10.3.1.1 XRD 379 10.3.1.2 Diffuse Reflectance UV-Vis Spectroscopy 384 10.3.1.3 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 386 10.3.2 Theoretical Analysis 388 10.3.2.1 Structure and Local Geometry 388 10.3.2.2 Electron Localization Function 391 10.3.2.3 DOS and PDOS Analysis 393 10.4 Conclusions 397 References 397 Part 4 Organic Solar Cells 401 11 Increasing the Dielectric Constant of Organic Materials for Photovoltaics 403Viktor Ivasyshyn, Gang Ye, Sylvia Rousseva, Jan C. Hummelen and Ryan C. Chiechi 11.1 Introduction 404 11.2 Increasing the Dielectric Constant 415 11.2.1 Methodology of Dielectric Constant Measurement 415 11.2.2 High Dielectric Constant Materials 421 11.2.2.1 High Dielectric Constant Donor Materials 422 11.2.2.2 High Dielectric Constant Acceptor Materials 429 11.3 Conclusions and Outlook 435 References 436 12 Recent Developments in Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells and Potential Applications 443Devender Singh, Raman Kumar Saini and Shri Bhagwan 12.1 Solar Energy and Solar Cells 444 12.2 Types of Solar Cells 445 12.2.1 First-Generation Photovoltaic Cells 445 12.2.1.1 Silicon Single-Crystal-Based Solar Cells 445 12.2.1.2 Polycrystalline Silicon Based Solar Cells 445 12.2.1.3 Gallium Arsenide (GaAs)-Based Solar Cells 447 12.2.2 Second-Generation Photovoltaic Cells 447 12.2.2.1 Amorphous Silicon (a-Si)-Based Solar Cells 447 12.2.2.2 Cadmium Telluride (CdTe)-Based Solar Cells 448 12.2.2.3 Copper Indium Diselenide (CuInSe2, or CIS)- Based Solar Cells 448 12.2.3 Third-Generation Photovoltaic Cells 449 12.2.3.1 Copper Zinc Tin Sulfide (CZTS) and (Its Derivatives) CZTSSe and CZTSe Solar Cells 449 12.2.3.2 Organic Solar Cells 449 12.2.3.3 Perovskite Solar Cells 450 12.2.3.4 Quantum Dot Solar Cell 450 12.3 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (DSSCs) 450 12.4 Operation of DSSCs 452 12.4.1 Working System of DSSCs 454 12.5 Fabrication of DSSCs 455 12.5.1 Substrate Selection and Preparation 456 12.5.1.1 Cutting of the Substrate 456 12.5.1.2 Cleaning of the Substrate 456 12.5.1.3 Masking of the Substrate 456 12.5.2 Film Deposition on Substrate 456 12.5.2.1 Preparation of TiO2 Paste 459 12.5.2.2 Depositing the TiO2 Layer on the Glass Plate 460 12.5.3 Dye Impregnation on the Electrode 460 12.5.4 Preparation of Counter Electrode 460 12.6 Various Materials Used as Essential Components of DSSCs 461 12.6.1 Transparent Conducting Substrate 461 12.6.2 Photoelectrodes 462 12.6.2.1 Titanium Oxide (TiO2) 462 12.6.2.2 Zinc Oxide (ZnO) 463 12.6.2.3 Niobium Pentoxide (Nb2O5) 464 12.6.2.4 Ternary Photoelectrode Materials 465 12.6.2.5 Other Metal Oxides 465 12.6.3 Photosensitizers 466 12.6.3.1 Metal Complexes as Sensitizers 467 12.6.4 Electrolytes 471 12.6.4.1 Liquid Electrolytes 472 12.6.4.2 Solid-State Electrolytes 473 12.6.4.3 Quasi-Solid Electrolyte 474 12.6.5 Counter Electrodes 474 12.6.5.1 Platinized Conducting Glass 474 12.6.5.2 Carbon Materials 474 12.6.5.3 Conducting Polymers 475 12.7 Advantages and Applications of DSSC 475 12.8 Future Prospect of DSSC 476 12.9 Conclusions 476 References 477 13 Heterojunction Energetics and Open-Circuit Voltages of Organic Photovoltaic Cells 487Peicheng Li and Zheng-Hong Lu 13.1 Introduction 487 13.2 Ultraviolet Photoemission Spectroscopy 490 13.3 Energy Level Alignment at Heterojunction Interfaces 493 13.3.1 Schottky Barrier, Interfacial Dipole, and Slope Parameter 493 13.3.2 Interfacial Dipole Theory 495 13.3.3 Mapping Energy Level Alignment at Heterojunction Interface 497 13.4 Open-Circuit Voltage of Organic Photovoltaic Cell 499 13.4.1 Two-Diode Model 499 13.4.2 Quasi Fermi Level Model 501 13.4.3 Chemical Equilibrium Model 503 13.4.4 Kinetic Hopping Model 504 References 508 14 Plasma-Enhanced Chemical Vapor Deposited Materials and Organic Semiconductors in Photovoltaic Devices 511Andrey Kosarev, Ismael Cosme, Svetlana Mansurova, Dmitriy Andronikov, Alexey Abramov and Eugeny Terukov 14.1 Introduction 512 14.2 Experimental 513 14.2.1 Fabrication of PECVD Materials 513 14.2.2 Fabrication of Organic Materials 514 14.2.3 Configurations and Fabrication of Device Structures 516 14.2.4 Characterization of Materials 516 14.2.5 Characterization of Device Structures 521 14.3 Material Results 522 14.3.1 Structure and Composition 522 14.3.2 Optical Properties 526 14.3.3 Electrical Properties 529 14.4 Results for Devices 537 14.4.1 Devices Based on PECVD Materials 537 14.4.2 Devices Based on Organic Materials 538 14.4.3 Hybrid Devices Based on PECVD-Polymer Materials 540 14.4.4 Hybrid Devices Using Crystalline Semicinductors, Non-Crystalline PECVD, and Organic Materials (HJT-OS Structures) 543 14.5 Outlook 546 Acknowledgment 546 References 546 Part 5 Nano-Photovoltaics 55115 Use of Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) in Third-Generation Solar Cells 553LePing Yu, Munkhbayar Batmunkh, Cameron Shearer and Joseph G. Shapter 15.1 Introduction 554 15.1.1 Energy Issues and Potential Solutions 554 15.1.2 Categories of Photovoltaic Devices and Their Development 554 15.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 556 15.3 Transparent Conducting Electrodes (TCEs) 556 15.3.1 ITO and FTO 556 15.3.2 CNTs for TCEs 557 15.4 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (DSSCs) 563 15.4.1 CNTs-TCFs for DSSCs 563 15.4.2 Semiconducting Layers 565 15.4.2.1 Nanostructured TiO2 Materials 565 15.4.2.2 Semiconducting Layers with CNTs 566 15.4.3 Catalyst Layers 570 15.4.3.1 Platinum (Pt) and Other Catalysts 570 15.5 CNTs in Perovskite Solar Cells 572 15.6 Carbon Nanotube–Silicon (CNT–Si) or Nanotube–Silicon Heterojunction (NSH) Solar Cells 575 15.6.1 Working Mechanism 575 15.6.2 Development of Si-CNT Devices 576 15.6.3 Origin of Photocurrent 577 15.6.4 Effect of the Number of CNT Walls 578 15.6.5 Effect of the Electronic Type of CNTs 579 15.6.6 Effect of CNT Alignment in the Electrode 579 15.6.7 Effect of the Transmittance/Thickness of CNT Films 580 15.6.8 Effect of Doping 580 15.6.9 Intentional Addition of Silicon Oxide Layer 581 15.6.10 Enhancement of Light Absorption 582 15.6.11 Application of Conductive Polymers 584 15.6.12 Discussion 584 15.7 Outlook and Conclusion 585 References 586 16 Quantum Dot Solar Cells 611Xiaoli Zhao, Chengjie Xiang, Ming Huang, Mei Ding, Chuankun Jia and Lidong Sun 16.1 Introduction 612 16.2 Quantum Dots and Their Properties 612 16.2.1 Fundamental Concepts 612 16.2.2 Size-Dependent Quantum Confinement Effect 613 16.2.3 Multiple Exciton Generation Effect 614 16.2.4 The Kondo Effect 616 16.2.5 Applications 617 16.3 Synthetic Methods for Quantum Dots 618 16.3.1 Hot Injection 618 16.3.1.1 Theoretical Evaluation of Nucleation and Growth 619 16.3.1.2 Influence Factors 621 16.3.1.3 Features 623 16.3.2 Chemical Bath Deposition 624 16.3.2.1 Theoretical Evaluation of the CBD Method 625 16.3.2.2 Influence Factors 625 16.3.2.3 Features 627 16.3.3 Successive Ionic Layer Adsorption and Reaction 628 16.3.3.1 Theoretical Evaluation of SILAR Method 629 16.3.3.2 Influence Factors 630 16.3.3.3 Features 632 16.4 Quantum Dot Solar Cells 633 16.4.1 Schottky Junction Solar Cells 633 16.4.1.1 Device Structure 633 16.4.1.2 Preparation Route 635 16.4.1.3 Materials Selection 635 16.4.1.4 Photovoltaic Performance 636 16.4.2 Depleted Heterojunction Solar Cells 637 16.4.2.1 Device Structure 637 16.4.2.2 Preparation Route 638 16.4.2.3 Materials Selection 639 16.4.2.4 Photovoltaic Performance 640 16.4.3 Quantum-Dot-Sensitized Solar Cells 641 16.4.3.1 Device Structure 641 16.4.3.2 Preparation Route 642 16.4.3.3 Materials Selection 643 16.4.3.4 Photovoltaic Performance 644 16.4 Challenges and Perspectives 645 References 646 17 Near-Infrared Responsive Quantum Dot Photovoltaics Progress, Challenges, and Perspectives 659Ru Zhou, Jun Xu and Jinzhang Xu 17.1 Introduction 660 17.2 Physical and Chemical Properties 662 17.2.1 Multiple Exciton Generation 662 17.2.2 Quantum Size Effect 663 17.2.3 Other Features 664 17.3 Materials and Film Processing 665 17.3.1 In Situ Strategy 665 17.3.2 Ex Situ Strategy 666 17.3.3 A Comparison between In Situ and Ex Situ 667 17.4 NIR Responsive QDs and Photovoltaic Performance 669 17.4.1 Binary Lead Chalcogenides 669 17.4.2 Binary Silver Chalcogenides 674 17.4.3 Ternary Indium-Based Chalcogenides 676 17.4.4 Ternary and Quaternary Alloyed Compounds 678 17.5 Strategies for Performance Enhancement 682 17.5.1 Light Management 682 17.5.1.1 Nanophotonic Structuring 682 17.5.1.2 Plasmonic Enhancement 683 17.5.2 Carrier Management 684 17.5.2.1 Band Structure Tailoring 684 17.5.2.2 Surface Engineering 687 17.5.2.3 Charge Collection Optimizing 692 17.6 New Concept Solar Cells 692 17.6.1 Multiple-Junction CQD Solar Cells 693 17.6.2 Flexible Solar Cells 694 17.6.3 Semitransparent Solar Cells 694 17.6.4 QD/Perovskite Hybrid Solar Cells 696 17.7 Conclusions and Perspectives 699 Acknowledgments 701 References 701 Part 6 Concentrator Photovoltaics and Analysis Models 719 18 Dense-Array Concentrator Photovoltaic System 721Kok-Keong Chong, Chee-Woon Wong, Tiong-Keat Yew, Ming-Hui Tan and Woei-Chong Tan 18.1 Introduction 722 18.2 Primary Concentrator Non-Imaging Dish Concentrator 722 18.2.1 Geometry of Non-Imaging Dish Concentrator (NIDC) 723 18.2.2 Methodology of Designing NIDC Geometry 726 18.2.3 Coordinate Transformation of Facet Mirror 728 18.2.4 Computational Algorithm 730 18.3 Secondary Concentrator An Array of Crossed Compound Parabolic Concentrator (CCPC) Lenses 733 18.4 Concentrator Photovoltaic Module 740 18.5 Prototype of Dense-Array Concentrator Photovoltaic System (DACPV) 742 18.6 Optical Efficiency of the CCPC Lens 744 18.7 Experimental Study of Electrical Performance 750 18.7.1 Current Measurement Circuit 754 18.8 Cost Estimation of the Dense-Array Concentrator Photovoltaic System Using Two-Stage Non-Imaging Concentrators 757 18.9 Conclusion 758 Acknowledgments 759 References 760 19 Solar Radiation Analysis Model and PVsyst Simulation for Photovoltaic System Design 763Figen Balo and Lutfu S. Sua 19.1 Introduction 764 19.1.1 Solar Energy in Turkey 764 19.1.2 Climate, Solar Energy Potential, and Electric Production in Erzincan 766 19.2 Data Analysis Model for Solar Radiation Intensity Calculation 768 19.2.1 Horizontal Surface 768 19.2.1.1 Daily Total Solar Radiation 768 19.2.1.2 Daily Diffuse Solar Radiation 768 19.2.1.3 Momentary Total Solar Radiation 769 19.2.1.4 Momentary Diffuse and Direct Solar Radiation 769 19.2.2 Calculating Solar Radiation Intensity on Inclined Surface 770 19.2.2.1 Momentary Direct Solar Radiation 770 19.2.2.2 Momentary Diffuse Solar Radiation 770 19.2.2.3 Reflecting Momentary Solar Radiation 771 19.2.2.4 Total Momentary Solar Radiation 771 19.2.3 Data Analysis and Discussion 771 19.3 PVsyst Simulation for the Solar Farm System Design 777 19.3.1 Methodology 777 19.3.2 Findings Obtained with PVsyst Simulation 781 19.4 Conclusions 783 References 784 Index 787

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive, yet practical source of reference, and excellent foundation for comparing the properties and performance of coatings and selecting the most suitable materials based on specific service needs and environmental factors. Coating technology has developed significant techniques for protecting existing infrastructure from corrosion and erosion, maintaining and enhancing the performance of equipment, and provided novel functions such as smart coatings greatly benefiting the medical device, energy, automotive and construction industries. The mechanisms, usage, and manipulation of cutting-edge coating methods are the focus of this book. Not only are the working mechanisms of coating materials explored in great detail, but also craft designs for further optimization of more uniform, safe, stable, and scalable coatings. A group of leading experts in different coating technologies demonstrate their main applications, identify the key bottlenecks, and outline futuTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part I: Materials and Methods: Design and Fabrication 1 1 The Science of Molecular Precursor Method 3Hiroki Nagai and Mitsunobu Sato 1.1 Metal Complex 4 1.2 Molecular Precursor Method 6 1.3 Counter Ion (Stability) 6 1.4 Conversion Process from Precursor Film to Oxide Thin Film 8 1.5 Anatase–Rutile Transformation Controlled by Ligand 8 1.6 Homogeneity 11 1.7 Miscibility 13 1.8 Coatability (Thin Hydroxyapatite Coating of Ti Fiber Web Scaffolds) 13 1.9 Oxygen-Deficient Rutile Thin Films 15 1.10 Cu Thin Film 16 1.11 Applications Using the Molecular Precursor Method 20 1.12 Conclusion 22 References 23 2 Cold Spray—Advanced Coating Process and 3D Modeling 29Muhammad Faizan-Ur-Rab, Saden H. Zahiri and Syed H. Masood 2.1 Introduction 30 2.1.1 Cold Spray Equipment 31 2.1.1.1 CGT KINETIKS 3000 CS System 31 2.1.1.2 Plasma Giken PCS 1000 System 32 2.1.1.3 Impact Innovations ISS 5/8 and 5/11 CS Systems 33 2.1.2 Applications of Cold Spray Coatings 35 2.2 3D Numerical Modeling of Cold Spray Coating 36 2.2.1 Computational Domain and Boundary Conditions in Numerical Model 37 2.2.2 Three-Dimensional Grid 40 2.2.3 Particle-Fluid Interaction 41 2.3 Experimental Methods of Cold Spray Coatings for Validation of 3D Model 44 2.3.1 Measurement of Substrate’s Temperature 44 2.3.2 Particle Image Velocimetry (PIV) 45 2.4 Results and Discussions 48 2.4.1 3D Model Calibration 48 2.4.2 Effect of Propellant Gas 51 2.4.3 Effect of Nozzle Length 53 2.4.4 Particle’s Temperature 56 2.5 Conclusion 59 References 60 3 Effects of Laser Process Parameters on Overlapped Multipass/Multitrack Hardened Bead Parameters of Ti-6Al-4V Titanium Alloy Using Continuous-Wave Rectangular Beam 65D.S. Badkar 3.1 Introduction 66 3.2 Experimental Methodology 70 3.2.1 Principle of Rectangular Beam 70 3.2.2 Materials Used and Experimental Set-Up 70 3.2.3 Fixture Fabrication 73 3.2.3.1 Bottom Plate 74 3.2.3.2 The Top Plate 75 3.2.4 Specimen Preparation 76 3.2.5 Phase Transformations of Ti-6Al-4V During Laser Transformation Hardening 78 3.2.5.1 Laser Heating 78 3.2.5.2 Cooling or Self Quenching 78 3.3 Results and Discussion 78 3.3.1 Effect of Laser Process Parameters on Overlapped Multipass/Multitrack Hardened Bead Parameters 78 3.4 Conclusions 82 Acknowledgment 82 References 82 4 Dimensionally Stable Lead Dioxide Anodes Electrodeposited from Methanesulfonate Electrolytes: Physicochemical Properties and Electrocatalytic Reactivity in Oxygen Transfer Reactions 85Olesia Shmychkova, T. Luk’yanenko and A. Velichenko 4.1 Introduction 86 4.2 Chemical Composition of Coatings 89 4.3 Electrocatalytical Properties of Materials 95 4.3.1 p-Nitroaniline Oxidation 98 4.3.2 p-Nitrophenol Oxidation 100 4.3.3 Oxidation of Salicylic Acid and its Derivatives 101 4.4 Electrode Endurance Tests 108 4.5 Conclusions 116 References 118 5 Polycrystalline Diamond Coating Protects Zr Cladding Surface Against Corrosion in Water-Cooled Nuclear Reactors: Nuclear Fuel Durability Enhancement 123Irena Kratochvílová, Radek Škoda, Andrew Taylor, Jan Škarohlíd, Petr Ashcheulov and František Fendrych 5.1 Introduction 124 5.2 Zr Alloy Surface Corrosion—General Description 128 5.3 Growth of Polycrystalline Diamond as Anticorrosion Coating on Zr Alloy Surface 131 5.4 Properties of PCD-Coated Zr Alloy Samples Processed in Autoclave 135 5.4.1 Oxidation of Autoclave-Processed PCD-Coated Zr Samples 135 5.4.2 Composition Changes of PCD-Coated Zr Alloy Compared to Autoclaved Zr Alloy and PCD-Coated Zr Alloy 137 5.4.2.1 Capacitance Measurements, NanoESCA, X-Ray-Photoelectron Spectroscopy, Neutron Transmission, and Mass Spectrometry 137 5.4.2.2 Raman, SEM, and SIMS Analysis of the Autoclave-Processed Samples 143 5.4.3 Mechanical and Tribological Properties of Autoclaved PCD Layer-Covered Zr Alloy 145 5.4.4 Radiation Damage Test of Autoclaved PCD-Covered Zr Alloy Sample: Ion Beam Irradiation 147 5.5 PCD Coating Increases Operation Safety and Prolongs the Zr Nuclear Fuel Cladding Lifetime—Overall Summaries 148 5.6 Conclusion 153 Acknowledgments 154 References 154 6 High-Performance WC-Based Coatings for Narrow and Complex Geometries 157Satish Tailor, Ankur Modi and S. C.Modi 6.1 Introduction 157 6.2 Experimental 159 6.2.1 Feedstock Powder 159 6.2.2 Substrate Preparation and Coating Deposition 159 6.2.3 Why Choosing 45° and 70° Angles to Design the Connectors 163 6.2.4 Characterizations 163 6.3 Results and Discussion 164 6.3.1 Coating Mechanism Behind the Uniform Coating Properties at Both Spray Angles 45° and 70° 164 6.3.2 Coating Microstructures 164 6.3.3 Microhardness of the “As-Sprayed” Coatings 166 6.3.4 X-Ray Diffraction 167 6.3.5 Residual Stress Analysis 169 6.3.6 Adhesion Strength of the Coatings 171 6.4 Conclusions 172 References 172 Part II: Coating Materials Nanotechnology 175 7 Nanotechnology in Paints and Coatings 177Emmanuel Rotimi Sadiku, Oluranti Agboola, Ibrahim David Ibrahim, Peter Apata Olubambi, BabulReddy Avabaram, Manjula Bandla, Williams Kehinde Kupolati, Jayaramudu Tippabattini, Kokkarachedu Varaprasad, Stephen Chinenyeze Agwuncha, Jonas Mochane, Oluyemi Ojo Daramola, Bilainu Oboirien, Taoreed Adesola Adegbola, Clara Nkuna, Sheshan John Owonubi, Victoria Oluwaseun Fasiku, Blessing Aderibigbe, Vincent Ojijo, Regan Dunne, Koena Selatile, Gertude Makgatho, Caroline Khoathane, Wshington Mhike, Olusesan Frank Biotidara, Mbuso Kingdom Dludlu, AO Adeboje, Oladimeji Adetona Adeyeye, Abongile Ndamase, Samuel Sanni, Gomotsegang Fred Molelekwa, Periyar Selvam, Reshma Nambiar, Anand Babu Perumal, Jarugula Jayaramudu, Nnamdi Iheaturu, Ihuoma Diwe and Betty Chima 7.1 Introduction 178 7.1.1 Paint and Coating 178 7.1.2 Nanopaints and Nanocoatings 180 7.1.2.1 Some Uses of Nanopaints in Different Materials 181 7.1.2.2 Nanomaterials in Paints 183 7.1.3 Types of Nanocoating 189 7.1.3.1 Superhydrophobic Coating 190 7.1.3.2 Oleophobic/Hydrophobic Coating 191 7.1.3.3 Hydrophilic Coatings 191 7.1.3.4 Ceramic, Metal and Glass Coatings 192 7.2 Application of Nanopaints and Nanocoating in the Automotive Industry 195 7.3 Application of Nanopaints and Nanocoating in the Energy Sector 196 7.4 Application of Nanocoating in Catalysis 198 7.5 Application of Nanopaints and Nanocoating in the Marine Industry 200 7.6 Applications of Nanopaints and Nanocoating in the Aerospace Industry 200 7.7 Domestic and Civil Engineering Applications of Nanopaints and Coating 202 7.8 Medical and Biomedical Applications of Nanocoating 205 7.8.1 Antibacterial Applications of Nanocoating 205 7.9 Defense and Military Applications of Nanopaints and Coatings 227 7.10 Conclusion 228 7.11 Future Trend 228 References 229 8 Anodic Oxide Nanostructures: Theories of Anodic Nanostructure Self-Organization 235Naveen Verma, Jitender Jindal, Krishan Chander Singh and Anuj Mittal 8.1 Introduction 235 8.2 Anodization 237 8.3 Barrier-Type Anodic Metal Oxide Films 237 8.4 Porous-Type Anodic Metal Oxide Films 238 8.5 Theories or Models of Growth Kinetics of Anodic Oxide Films and Fundamental Equations for High-Field Ionic Conductivity 239 8.5.1 Guntherschulze and Betz Model 239 8.5.2 Cabrera and Mott Model 240 8.5.3 Verwey’s High Field Model 242 8.5.4 Young Model 243 8.5.5 Dignam Model 244 8.5.6 Dewald Model: (Dual Barrier Control with Space Charge) 244 8.6 Corrosion Characteristics and Related Phenomenon 246 8.7 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 249 8.8 Characterization Techniques 250 References 251 9 Nanodiamond Reinforced Epoxy Composite: Prospective Material for Coatings 255Ayesha Kausar 9.1 Introduction 256 9.2 Nanodiamond: A Leading Carbon Nanomaterial 256 9.3 Epoxy: A Multipurpose Thermoset Polymer 258 9.4 Nanodiamond Dispersion in Epoxy: Impediments and Challenges 259 9.5 Epoxy/Nanodiamond Coatings 261 9.6 Coating Formulation 262 9.7 Industrial Relevance of Epoxy/ND Coatings 264 9.7.1 Strength and High Temperature Demanding Engineering Application 264 9.7.2 Thermal Conductivity Relevance 266 9.7.3 Microwave Absorbers 268 9.7.4 In Biomedical 268 9.8 Summary, Challenges, and Outlook 269 References 270 10 Nanostructured Metal–Metal Oxides and Their Electrocatalytic Applications 275Kemal Volkan Özdokur, Süleyman Koçak and Fatma Nil Ertaş 10.1 Brief History of Electrocatalysis 276 10.2 Electrocatalytic Activity 278 10.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 280 10.4 Transition Metal Chalcogenides and Their Catalytic Applications 281 10.5 Preparation of Nanostructured Transition Metal Oxide Surfaces 296 10.6 Polyoxometallates (POM) 303 10.7 Future Trends in Electrocatalysis Applications of Metal/metal oxides 305 References 305 Part III: Advanced Coating Technology and Applications 315 11 Solid-Phase Microextraction Coatings Based on Tailored Materials: Metal–Organic Frameworks and Molecularly Imprinted Polymers 317Priscilla Rocío-Bautista, Adrián Gutiérrez-Serpa and Verónica Pino 11.1 Solid-Phase Microextraction 317 11.2 HS-SPME-GC Applications Using MOF-Based Coatings 320 11.2.1 Metal–Organic Frameworks (MOFs) 320 11.2.2 SPME Coating Fibers Based on MOFs 322 11.3 DI-SPME-LC Applications Using MIP-Based Coatings 331 11.3.1 Molecularly Imprinted Polymers (MIPs) 332 11.3.2 SPME Coating Fibers Based on MIPs 333 11.3.3 MIPs and MOFs Features as SPME Coatings 340 11.4 Conclusions and Trends 341 Acknowledgements 341 References 342 12 Investigations on Laser Surface Modification of Commercially Pure Titanium Using Continuous-Wave Nd:YAG Laser 349Duradundi Sawant Badkar 12.1 Introduction 350 12.2 Experimental Design 354 12.3 Experimental Methodology 355 12.4 Results and Discussions 358 12.4.1 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) for Response Surface Full Model 358 12.4.2 Validation of the Models 366 12.4.3 Effect of Process Factors on Hardened Bead Profile Parameters 370 12.4.3.1 Heat Input (HI) 370 12.4.3.2 Hardened Bead Width (HBW) 370 12.4.3.3 Hardened Depth (HD) 374 12.4.3.4 Angle of Entry of Hardened Bead Profile (AEHB) 377 12.4.3.5 Power Density (PD) 381 12.4.4 Microstructural Analysis 384 12.5 Conclusions 387 Acknowledgements 390 References 390 13 Multiscale Engineering and Scalable Fabrication of Super(de)wetting Coatings 393William S. Y. Wong and Antonio Tricoli 13.1 Introduction 394 13.2 Fundamentals of Wettability and Superwettability 395 13.2.1 Defining Hydrophilicity and Hydrophobicity 397 13.2.2 Defining Superhydrophilicity and Superhydrophobicity 398 13.2.2.1 Wenzel’s Model 398 13.2.2.2 Cassie–Baxter’s Model 399 13.2.2.3 Contact Angle Hysteresis 400 13.2.2.4 Variants of Superhydrophilicity 402 13.2.2.5 Ideal Superhydrophilicity 402 13.2.2.6 Hemiwicking Superhydrophilicity 402 13.2.2.7 Variants of Superhydrophobicity 403 13.2.2.8 Ideal Lotus Superhydrophobicity 403 13.2.2.9 Petal-Like Adhesive Superhydrophobicity 404 13.2.3 Defining Superoleophobicity, Superamphiphobicity and Superomniphobicity 405 13.2.3.1 Superoleophobicity and Superamphiphobicity 405 13.2.3.2 Superomniphobicity 407 13.2.3.3 Re-Entrant Profiles 407 13.2.3.4 Shades of Grey: Superoleo(amphi) phobicity to Superomniphobicity 408 13.2.4 Characterization Techniques 409 13.2.4.1 Static Contact Angle Analysis 409 13.2.4.2 Dynamic Contact Angle Analysis—Contact Angle Hysteresis 411 13.2.4.3 Dynamic Contact Angle Analysis—Sliding Angle 412 13.2.4.4 Other Modes of Dynamic Analysis—Droplet Bouncing and Fluid Immersion 412 13.3 Nature to Artificial: Bioinspired Engineering 413 13.3.1 Superhydrophilicity 414 13.3.2 “Lotus-Like” Low-Adhesion Superhydrophobicity 416 13.3.3 “Rose Petal-Like” High-Adhesion Superhydrophobicity 416 13.3.4 Anisotropic Low-Adhesion/High-Adhesion Superhydrophobicity 417 13.3.5 Superhydrophobic–Hydrophilic Patterning 418 13.3.6 Superoleo(amphi)phobicity 418 13.4 Top-Down and Bottom-Up Nanotexturing Approaches 419 13.4.1 Templating 419 13.4.2 (Photo)-Lithography 420 13.4.3 Scalable Bottom-Up Texturing Approaches 421 13.5 Superhydrophilicity 421 13.5.1 The State of Superhydrophilicity 421 13.5.1.1 Plasma and Ozone Surface Hydroxylation 421 13.5.1.2 Aerosol Deposition 422 13.5.1.3 Electrospinning 423 13.5.1.4 Chemical Etching Hydroxylation 424 13.5.1.5 Wet-Deposition 424 13.5.1.6 Sol–Gel and Photoactivation 424 13.5.1.7 Thiol-Functionalization 425 13.6 Superhydrophobicity 426 13.6.1 Ideal Lotus Slippery Superhydrophobicity 426 13.6.1.1 Plasma 426 13.6.1.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition 427 13.6.1.3 Spraying (Wet-Spray, Liquid-Fed Flame Spray, Sputtering) 428 13.6.1.4 Wet-Deposition 433 13.6.1.5 Sol-Gel 434 13.6.1.6 Electrodeposition 435 13.6.1.7 Chemical Etching 436 13.6.2 Petal-Like Adhesive Superhydrophobicity 437 13.6.2.1 Templating 437 13.6.2.2 Liquid-Fed Flame Spray Pyrolysis 438 13.6.2.3 Sol–Gel and Hydrothermal Synthesis 438 13.6.2.4 Electrospinning 440 13.6.2.5 Electrodeposition 441 13.6.2.6 Micro- and Nanostructural Self-Assembly 441 13.6.2.7 Mechanical Methods 442 13.7 Superoleophobicity and Superamphiphobicity 443 13.7.1 Nanofilaments, Fabric Fibers, Meshes, and Tubes 443 13.7.2 Aerosol-Coating (Wet-Spray, Candle Soot / Liquid-Fed Flame Spray) 445 13.7.2.1 Wet-Spray Deposition 445 13.7.2.2 Flame Soot Deposition 445 13.7.2.3 Flame Spray Pyrolysis 447 13.7.3 Sol–Gel 448 13.7.4 Wet-Coating (Dip- and Spin-Coating) 448 13.7.4.1 Dip-Coating 448 13.7.4.2 Spin-Coating 449 13.7.5 Micro- and Nanostructural Self-Assembly 449 13.7.6 Electrospinning 450 13.7.7 Electrodeposition and Electrochemical Etching 450 13.7.7.1 Electrochemical Etching 450 13.7.7.2 Electrodeposition 451 13.7.8 Perfluoro-Acid Etching 452 13.7.9 Physical Etching 452 13.8 Superomniphobicity 452 13.8.1 Electrospun Beads on Mesh-Like Profiles 453 13.8.2 Controlled Sol–Gel Growth 455 13.8.3 Etched Aluminum Meshes 455 13.8.4 Hybridized Lithography 455 13.9 Conclusions 456 References 457 14 Polymeric Materials in Coatings for Biomedical Applications 481Victoria Oluwaseun Fasiku, Shesan John Owonubi, Emmanuel Mukwevho, Blessing Aderibigbe, Emmanuel Rotimi Sadiku, Yolandy Lemmer, Idowu David Ibrahim, Jonas Mochane, Oluyemi Ojo Daramola, Koena Selatile, Abongile Ndamase and Oluranti Agboola 14.1 Introduction 482 14.1.1 Coating Materials 483 14.2 Polymeric Coating Materials 484 14.2.1 Structure, Synthesis, and Properties 485 14.2.1.1 Polyvinyl Alcohol (PVA) 485 14.2.1.2 Parylene 486 14.2.1.3 Polyurethane (PU) 487 14.2.2 Coating Methods 489 14.2.3 Biomedical Coating Applications 492 14.2.3.1 Antifouling Coating 492 14.2.3.2 Nanoparticle Coating for Drug Delivery 493 14.2.3.3 Implants Coating 495 14.2.3.4 Cardiovascular Stents 497 14.2.3.5 Antimicrobial Surface Coating 498 14.2.3.6 Drug Delivery Coating 499 14.2.3.7 Tissue Engineering Coating 500 14.2.3.8 Sensor Coating 501 14.3 Conclusion 502 References 503 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of the science and engineering behind future propulsion systems and energy sources in sustainable aviation Future Propulsion Systems and Energy Sources in Sustainable Aviation is a comprehensive reference that offers a review of the science and engineering principles that underpin the concepts of propulsion systems and energy sources in sustainable air transportation. The author, a noted expert in the field, examines the impact of air transportation on the environment and reviews alternative jet fuels, hybrid-electric and nuclear propulsion and power. He also explores modern propulsion for transonic and supersonic-hypersonic aircraft and the impact of propulsion on aircraft design. Climate change is the main driver for the new technology development in sustainable air transportation. The book contains critical review of gas turbine propulsion and aircraft aerodynamics; followed by an insightful presentation of the aviation impact on environment. Future fuels aTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations and Acronyms xix About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Aircraft Engines – A Review 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Aerothermodynamics of Working Fluid 1 1.2.1 Isentropic Process and Isentropic Flow 6 1.2.2 Conservation of Mass 6 1.2.3 Conservation of Linear Momentum 7 1.2.4 Conservation of Angular Momentum 7 1.2.5 Conservation of Energy 8 1.2.6 Speed of Sound and Mach Number 10 1.2.7 Stagnation State 11 1.3 Thrust and Specific Fuel Consumption 12 1.3.1 Takeoff Thrust 16 1.3.2 Installed Thrust – Some Bookkeeping Issues on Thrust and Drag 16 1.3.3 Air‐Breathing Engine Performance Parameters 18 1.3.3.1 Specific Thrust 18 1.3.3.2 Specific Fuel Consumption and Specific Impulse 19 1.4 Thermal and Propulsive Efficiency 20 1.4.1 Thermal Efficiency 20 1.4.2 Propulsive Efficiency 22 1.4.3 Engine Overall Efficiency and Its Impact on Aircraft Range and Endurance 24 1.5 Gas Generator 27 1.6 Engine Components 28 1.6.1 The Inlet 28 1.6.2 The Nozzle 30 1.6.3 The Compressor 36 1.6.4 The Combustor 40 1.6.5 The Turbine 44 1.7 Performance Evaluation of a Turbojet Engine 52 1.8 Turbojet Engine with an Afterburner 54 1.8.1 Introduction 54 1.8.2 Analysis 56 1.9 Turbofan Engine 59 1.9.1 Introduction 59 1.9.2 Analysis of a Separate‐Exhaust Turbofan Engine 60 1.9.3 Thermal Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 64 1.9.4 Propulsive Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 65 1.9.5 Ultra‐High Bypass (UHB) Geared Turbofan Engines 69 1.9.6 Analysis of Mixed‐Exhaust Turbofan Engines with Afterburners 73 1.9.6.1 Mixer 74 1.9.6.2 Mixed‐Turbofan Cycle Analysis 76 1.9.6.3 Solution Procedure 77 1.10 Turboprop Engine 84 1.10.1 Introduction 84 1.10.2 Turboprop Cycle Analysis 85 1.10.2.1 The New Parameters 85 1.10.2.2 Design‐Point Analysis 86 1.10.2.3 Optimum Power Split between the Propeller and the Jet 90 1.10.2.4 Advanced Propeller: Prop‐Fan 94 1.11 High‐Speed Air‐Breathing Engines 95 1.11.1 Supersonic Combustion Ramjet 99 1.11.1.1 Inlet Analysis 99 1.11.1.2 Scramjet Combustor 101 1.11.1.3 Scramjet Nozzle 103 1.12 Rocket‐Based Airbreathing Propulsion 103 1.13 Summary 104 References 105 2 Aircraft Aerodynamics – A Review 109 2.1 Introduction 109 2.2 Similarity Parameters in Compressible Flow: Flight vs. Wind Tunnel 111 2.3 Physical Boundary Conditions on a Solid Wall (in Continuum Mechanics) 113 2.4 Profile and Parasite Drag 115 2.4.1 Boundary Layers 115 2.4.1.1 Case 1: Incompressible Laminar Flow 116 2.4.1.2 Case 2: Laminar Compressible Boundary Layers 125 2.4.1.3 Case 3: Turbulent Boundary Layers 129 2.4.1.4 Case 4: Transition 132 2.4.2 Profile Drag of an Airfoil 135 2.5 Drag Due to Lift 141 2.5.1 Classical Theory 141 2.5.2 Optimal Spanloading: The Case of Bell Spanload 147 2.6 Waves in Supersonic Flow 150 2.6.1 Speed of Sound 150 2.6.2 Normal Shock Wave 152 2.6.3 Oblique Shock Waves 152 2.6.4 Expansion Waves 155 2.7 Compressibility Effects and Critical Mach Number 157 2.8 Drag Divergence Phenomenon and Supercritical Airfoil 161 2.9 Wing Sweep 163 2.10 Delta Wing Aerodynamics 166 2.10.1 Vortex Breakdown 167 2.11 Area‐Rule in Transonic Aircraft 169 2.12 Optimum Shape for Slender Body of Revolution of Length ℓ in Supersonic Flow 171 2.12.1 Sears‐Haack Body 174 2.12.2 Von Karman Ogive of Length ℓ and Base Area, S(ℓ), for Minimum Axisymmetric Nose Wave Drag 175 2.13 High‐Lift Devices: Multi‐Element Airfoils 175 2.14 Powered Lift and STOL Aircraft 179 2.15 Laminar Flow Control, LFC 180 2.16 Aerodynamic Figures of Merit 182 2.17 Advanced Aircraft Designs and Technologies for Leaner, Greener Aviation 188 2.18 Summary 194 References 195 3 Understanding Aviation’s Impact on the Environment 201 3.1 Introduction 201 3.2 Combustion Emissions 202 3.2.1 Greenhouse Gases 202 3.2.2 Carbon Monoxide, CO, and Unburned Hydrocarbons, UHC 205 3.2.3 Oxides of Nitrogen, NOx 208 3.2.4 Impact of NO on Ozone in Lower and Upper Atmosphere 209 3.2.4.1 Lower Atmosphere 209 3.2.4.2 Upper Atmosphere 211 3.2.5 Impact of NOx Emissions on Surface Air Quality 213 3.2.6 Soot/Smoke and Particulate Matter (PM) 214 3.2.7 Contrails, Cirrus Clouds, and Impact on Climate 215 3.3 Engine Emission Standards 215 3.4 Low‐Emission Combustors 216 3.5 Aviation Fuels 219 3.6 Interim Summary on Combustion Emission Impact on the Environment 225 3.7 Aviation Impact on Carbon Dioxide Emission: Quantified 227 3.8 Noise 232 3.8.1 Introduction 232 3.8.1.1 General Discussion 232 3.8.1.2 Sound Intensity 236 3.8.1.3 Acoustic Power 236 3.8.1.4 Levels and Decibels 237 3.8.1.5 Sound Power Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.6 Sound Intensity Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.7 Sound Pressure Level in Decibels, dB 237 3.8.1.8 Multiple Sources 237 3.8.1.9 Overall Sound Pressure Level in Decibels, dB 238 3.8.1.10 Octave Band, One‐Third Octave Band, and Tunable Filters 238 3.8.1.11 Adding and Subtracting Noise Sources 239 3.8.1.12 Weighting 239 3.8.1.13 Effective Perceived Noise Level (EPNL), dB, and Other Metrics 240 3.8.1.14 Pulsating Sphere: Model of a Monopole 241 3.8.1.15 Two Monopoles: Model of a Dipole 242 3.8.1.16 Two Dipoles: Model of Quadrupole 243 3.8.2 Sources of Noise Near Airports 244 3.8.3 Engine Noise 245 3.8.4 Subsonic Jet Noise 249 3.8.5 Supersonic Jet Noise 251 3.9 Engine Noise Directivity Pattern 253 3.10 Noise Reduction at the Source 256 3.10.1 Wing Shielding 256 3.10.2 Fan Noise Reduction 256 3.10.3 Subsonic Jet Noise Mitigation 260 3.10.3.1 Chevron Nozzle 260 3.10.3.2 Acoustic Liner in Exhaust Core 261 3.10.4 Supersonic Jet Noise Reduction 262 3.11 Sonic Boom 263 3.12 Aircraft Noise Certification 268 3.13 NASA’s Vision: Quiet Green Transport Technology 272 3.14 FAA’s Vision: NextGen Technology 273 3.15 The European Vision for Sustainable Aviation 274 3.16 Summary 275 References 276 4 Future Fuels and Energy Sources in Sustainable Aviation 283 4.1 Introduction 283 4.2 Alternative Jet Fuels (AJFs) 288 4.2.1 Choice of Feedstock 291 4.2.2 Conversion Pathways to Jet Fuel 292 4.2.3 AJF Evaluation and Certification/Qualification 293 4.2.4 Impact of Biofuel on Emissions 294 4.2.5 Advanced Biofuel Production 296 4.2.6 Lifecycle Assessment of Bio‐Based Aviation Fuel 303 4.2.7 Conversion of Bio‐Crops to Electricity 305 4.3 Liquefied Natural Gas, LNG 305 4.3.1 Composition of Natural Gas and LNG 307 4.4 Hydrogen 308 4.4.1 Hydrogen Production 310 4.4.2 Hydrogen Delivery and Storage 312 4.4.3 Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density and Liquid Fuel Cost 312 4.5 Battery Systems 312 4.5.1 Battery Energy Density 314 4.5.2 Open‐Cycle Battery Systems 315 4.5.3 Charging Batteries in Flight: Two Examples 316 4.5.4 All‐Electric Aircraft: Voltair Concept Platform 316 4.6 Fuel Cell 318 4.7 Fuels for the Compact Fusion Reactor (CFR) 320 4.8 Summary 321 References 322 5 Promising Technologies in Propulsion and Power 325 5.1 Introduction 325 5.2 Gas Turbine Engine 326 5.2.1 Brayton Cycle: Simple Gas Turbine Engine 326 5.2.2 Turbofan Engine 327 5.3 Distributed Combustion Concepts in Advanced Gas Turbine Engine Core 330 5.4 Multifuel (Cryogenic‐Kerosene), Hybrid Propulsion Concept 335 5.5 Intercooled and Recuperated Turbofan Engines 335 5.6 Active Core Concepts 340 5.7 Topping Cycle: Wave Rotor Combustion 340 5.8 Pulse Detonation Engine (PDE) 351 5.9 Humphrey Cycle vs. Brayton: Thermodynamics 351 5.9.1 Idealized Laboratory PDE: Thrust Tube 353 5.9.2 Pulse Detonation Ramjets 355 5.9.3 Turbofan Engine with PDE 356 5.9.4 Pulse Detonation Rocket Engine (PDRE) 357 5.9.5 Vehicle‐Level Performance Evaluation of PDE 358 5.10 Boundary‐Layer Ingestion (BLI) and Distributed Propulsion (DP) Concept 358 5.10.1 Aircraft Drag Reduction Through BLI 360 5.10.2 Aircraft Noise Reduction: Advanced Concepts 362 5.10.3 Multidisciplinary Design Optimization (MDO) of a BWB Aircraft with BLI 365 5.11 Distributed Propulsion Concept in Early Aviation 367 5.12 Distributed Propulsion in Modern Aviation 368 5.12.1 Optimal Number of Propulsors in Distributed Propulsion 371 5.12.2 Optimal Propulsor Types in Distributed Propulsion 372 5.13 Interim Summary on Electric Propulsion (EP) 384 5.14 Synergetic Air‐Breathing Rocket Engine; SABRE 386 5.15 Compact Fusion Reactor: The Path to Clean, Unlimited Energy 388 5.16 Aircraft Configurations Using Advanced Propulsion Systems 389 5.17 Summary 395 References 396 6 Pathways to Sustainable Aviation 403 6.1 Introduction 403 6.2 Pathways to Certification 403 6.3 Energy Pathways in Sustainable Aviation 405 6.4 Future of GT Engines 407 6.5 Summary 409 References 410 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xv Preface to the First Edition xvii Introduction xix I Fundamentals 1 1 Fluid Properties 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Fluid Mass Density 3 1.2.1 Equation of State 3 1.2.2 Density-Volume Relationship 4 1.3 Fluid Bulk Modulus 5 1.3.1 Definitions 5 1.3.2 Effective Bulk Modulus 7 1.3.3 Measuring the Fluid Bulk Modulus 16 1.4 Thermal Fluid Properties 19 1.4.1 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 19 1.4.2 Thermal Conductivity 23 1.4.3 Specific Heat 24 1.5 Fluid Viscosity 25 1.5.1 Definitions 25 1.5.2 Viscous Drag Coefficient 27 1.5.3 Viscosity Charts and Models 27 1.6 Vapor Pressure 29 1.7 Chemical Properties 29 1.8 Fluid Types and Selection 30 1.8.1 Petroleum-Based Fluids 30 1.8.2 Synthetic Fluids 30 1.8.3 Biodegradable Fluids 30 1.8.4 Water 31 1.8.5 Fluid Selection 31 1.9 Conclusion 32 1.10 References 32 1.11 Homework Problems 32 1.11.1 Fluid Mass Density 32 1.11.2 Fluid Bulk Modulus 33 1.11.3 Thermal Fluid Properties 33 1.11.4 Fluid Viscosity 34 2 Fluid Mechanics 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Governing Equations 35 2.2.1 Navier-Stokes Equations 35 2.2.2 High Reynolds Number Flow 36 2.2.3 Low Reynolds Number Flow 38 2.2.4 Turbulent versus Laminar Flow 41 2.2.5 Control Volume Analysis 42 2.3 Fluid Flow 47 2.3.1 The Reynolds Number 47 2.3.2 Bernoulli Flow and the Orifice Equation 48 2.3.3 Poiseuille Flow and the Annular Leakage Equation 50 2.3.4 Pipe Flow 56 2.4 Pressure Losses 60 2.4.1 Major Losses 60 2.4.2 Minor Losses 60 2.5 Pressure Transients 66 2.5.1 Hydraulic Conduits 66 2.5.2 Water Hammer 68 2.5.3 Pressure Rise Rates within a Varying Control Volume 70 2.6 Hydraulic Energy and Power 72 2.6.1 Fluid Power 72 2.6.2 Heat Generation in Hydraulic Systems 73 2.7 Lubrication Theory 74 2.8 Conclusion 77 2.9 References 78 2.10 Homework Problems 78 2.10.1 Governing Equations 78 2.10.2 Fluid Flow 78 2.10.3 Fluid Pressure 79 2.10.4 Fluid Power 79 3 Dynamic Systems and Control 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Modeling 81 3.2.1 General 81 3.2.2 Mechanical Systems 82 3.2.3 Hydromechanical Systems 83 3.2.4 Electromechanical Systems 84 3.2.5 Summary 85 3.3 Linearization 85 3.3.1 General 85 3.3.2 The Taylor Series Expansion 86 3.3.3 Examples of Linearization 87 3.4 Dynamic Behavior 88 3.4.1 First-Order Response 88 3.4.2 Second-Order Response 92 3.4.3 Higher-Order Response 102 3.5 State Space Analysis 103 3.5.1 General 103 3.5.2 State Space Equations 103 3.5.3 Characteristic Equation 104 3.6 Block Diagrams and the Laplace Transform 104 3.6.1 General 104 3.6.2 Laplace Transform 104 3.6.3 Partial Fraction Expansion 107 3.6.4 Block Diagrams 110 3.7 Stability 119 3.7.1 General 119 3.7.2 Stability Criterion 119 3.7.3 Summary 123 3.8 Feedback Control 123 3.8.1 General 123 3.8.2 PID Controller Design in the Time Domain 125 3.8.3 Control Design in the Frequency Domain 130 3.8.4 Digital Control 138 3.8.5 Controllability and State Feedback Controller Design 148 3.8.6 Observability and State Estimation 150 3.8.7 Summary 152 3.9 Conclusion 152 3.10 References 152 3.11 Homework Problems 153 3.11.1 Modeling 153 3.11.2 Linearization 153 3.11.3 Dynamic Behavior 153 3.11.4 Block Diagrams and the Laplace Transform 154 3.11.5 Feedback Control 154 II Hydraulic Components 155 4 Hydraulic Valves 157 4.1 Introduction 157 4.2 Valve Flow Coefficients 158 4.2.1 Overview 158 4.2.2 Linearized Flow Equation 159 4.2.3 Valve Porting Geometry 160 4.2.4 Summary 163 4.3 Two-Way Spool Valves 163 4.3.1 Overview 163 4.3.2 Efficiency 164 4.3.3 Flow Forces 165 4.3.4 Pressure Relief Valves 172 4.3.5 Summary 176 4.4 Three-Way Spool Valves 176 4.4.1 Overview 176 4.4.2 Efficiency 180 4.4.3 Flow Forces 181 4.4.4 Hydromechanical Valves 182 4.4.5 Summary 185 4.5 Four-Way Spool Valves 185 4.5.1 Overview 185 4.5.2 Efficiency 188 4.5.3 Flow Forces 190 4.5.4 Two-Stage Electrohydraulic Valves 191 4.5.5 Summary 199 4.6 Poppet Valves 200 4.6.1 Overview 200 4.6.2 Efficiency 202 4.6.3 Flow Forces 202 4.6.4 Pressure Relief Valves 203 4.6.5 Summary 207 4.7 Flapper Nozzle Valves 208 4.7.1 Overview 208 4.7.2 Efficiency 209 4.7.3 Flow Forces 210 4.7.4 Two-Stage Electrohydraulic Valves 213 4.7.5 Summary 222 4.8 Conclusion 222 4.9 References 222 4.10 Homework Problems 222 4.10.1 Valve Flow Coefficients 222 4.10.2 Spool Valves 223 4.10.3 Poppet Valves 223 4.10.4 Flapper Nozzle Valves 224 5 Hydraulic Pumps 225 5.1 Introduction 225 5.1.1 Overview 225 5.1.2 Hydrostatic Pump Types 226 5.1.3 Summary 232 5.2 Pump Efficiency 233 5.2.1 Overview 233 5.2.2 Efficiency Definitions 233 5.2.3 Modeling Pump Efficiency 234 5.2.4 Measuring Pump Efficiency 235 5.2.5 Summary 239 5.3 Gear Pumps 239 5.3.1 Overview 239 5.3.2 Pump Flow Characteristics 240 5.3.3 Pump Control 243 5.3.4 Summary 243 5.4 Axial-Piston Swash-Plate Pumps 243 5.4.1 Overview 243 5.4.2 Pump Flow Characteristics 244 5.4.3 Pressure-Controlled Pumps 246 5.4.4 Displacement-Controlled Pumps 254 5.4.5 Summary 258 5.5 Conclusion 259 5.6 References 259 5.7 Homework Problems 260 5.7.1 Pump Efficiency 260 5.7.2 Gear Pumps 260 5.7.3 Axial-Piston Swash-Plate Pumps 261 6 Hydraulic Actuators 263 6.1 Introduction 263 6.2 Actuator Types 263 6.2.1 Linear Actuators 263 6.2.2 Rotary Actuators 265 6.3 Linear Actuators 266 6.3.1 Overview 266 6.3.2 Efficiency 266 6.3.3 Actuator Function 267 6.3.4 Summary 270 6.4 Rotary Actuators 270 6.4.1 Overview 270 6.4.2 Efficiency 270 6.4.3 Actuator Function 272 6.4.4 Summary 273 6.5 Conclusion 273 6.6 References 274 6.7 Homework Problems 274 6.7.1 Linear Actuators 274 6.7.2 Rotary Actuators 274 7 Auxiliary Components 275 7.1 Introduction 275 7.2 Accumulators 275 7.2.1 Function of the Accumulator 275 7.2.2 Design of the Accumulator 277 7.3 Hydraulic Conduits 281 7.3.1 Function of Hydraulic Conduits 281 7.3.2 Specification of Hydraulic Conduits 281 7.4 Reservoirs 283 7.4.1 Functions of the Reservoir 283 7.4.2 Design of the Reservoir 283 7.5 Coolers 286 7.5.1 Function of the Cooler 286 7.5.2 Design of the Cooler 286 7.6 Filters 287 7.6.1 Function of the Filter 287 7.6.2 Placement of the Filter 287 7.7 Conclusion 289 7.8 References 290 7.9 Homework Problems 290 7.9.1 Accumulators 290 7.9.2 Hydraulic Conduits 290 7.9.3 Reservoirs 291 7.9.4 Coolers 291 7.9.5 Filters 292 III Hydraulic Control Systems 293 8 Valve-Controlled Hydraulic Systems 295 8.1 Introduction 295 8.2 Four-Way Valve Control of a Linear Actuator 297 8.2.1 Description 297 8.2.2 Analysis 298 8.2.3 Design 300 8.2.4 Control 306 8.2.5 Summary 311 8.3 Three-Way Valve Control of a Single-Rod Linear Actuator 312 8.3.1 Description 312 8.3.2 Analysis 313 8.3.3 Design 315 8.3.4 Control 320 8.3.5 Summary 325 8.4 Four-Way Valve Control of a Rotary Actuator 326 8.4.1 Description 326 8.4.2 Analysis 327 8.4.3 Design 329 8.4.4 Control 333 8.4.5 Summary 339 8.5 Conclusion 340 8.6 References 341 8.7 Homework Problems 341 8.7.1 Four-Way Valve Control of a Linear Actuator 341 8.7.2 Three-Way Valve Control of a Single Rod Linear Actuator 342 8.7.3 Four-Way Valve Control of a Rotary Actuator 342 9 Pump-Controlled Hydraulic Systems 345 9.1 Introduction 345 9.2 Fixed-displacement Pump Control of a Linear Actuator 346 9.2.1 Description 346 9.2.2 Analysis 348 9.2.3 Design 349 9.2.4 Control 352 9.2.5 Summary 357 9.3 Variable-displacement Pump Control of a Rotary Actuator 358 9.3.1 Description 358 9.3.2 Analysis 359 9.3.3 Design 361 9.3.4 Control 366 9.3.5 Summary 372 9.4 Conclusion 372 9.5 References 373 9.6 Homework Problems 373 9.6.1 Fixed-displacement Pump Control of a Linear Actuator 373 9.6.2 Variable-displacement Pump Control of a Rotary Actuator 374 Unit Conversions 375 Length 375 Area 375 Mass 375 Volume 375 Density 375 Temperature 375 Pressure 376 Flow 376 Torque 376 Angular Speed 376 Force 376 Linear Velocity 376 Power 376 Index 377

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps engineers and scientists assess and manage uncertainty at all stages of experimentation and validation of simulations Fully updated from its previous edition, Experimentation, Validation, and Uncertainty Analysis for Engineers, Fourth Edition includes expanded coverage and new examples of applying the Monte Carlo Method (MCM) in performing uncertainty analyses. Presenting the current, internationally accepted methodology from ISO, ANSI, and ASME standards for propagating uncertainties using both the MCM and the Taylor Series Method (TSM), it provides a logical approach to experimentation and validation through the application of uncertainty analysis in the planning, design, construction, debugging, execution, data analysis, and reporting phases of experimental and validation programs. It also illustrates how to use a spreadsheet approach to apply the MCM and the TSM, based on the authors' experience in applying uncertainty analysis in complex, large-scale Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Experimentation, Errors, and Uncertainty 1 1-1 Experimentation, 2 1-1.1 Why Is Experimentation Necessary?, 2 1-1.2 Degree of Goodness and Uncertainty Analysis, 3 1-1.3 Experimentation and Validation of Simulations, 5 1-2 Experimental Approach, 6 1-2.1 Questions to Be Considered, 7 1-2.2 Phases of Experimental Program, 8 1-3 Basic Concepts and Definitions, 8 1-3.1 Errors and Uncertainties, 9 1-3.2 Categorizing and Naming Errors and Uncertainties, 13 1-3.3 Estimating Standard Uncertainties, 15 1-3.4 Determining Combined Standard Uncertainties, 16 1-3.5 Elemental Systematic Errors and Effects of Calibration, 18 1-3.6 Expansion of Concept from “Measurement Uncertainty” to “Experimental Uncertainty”, 20 1-3.7 Repetition and Replication, 22 1-3.8 Associating a Percentage Coverage or Confidence with Uncertainty Estimates, 24 1-4 Experimental Results Determined from a Data Reduction Equation Combining Multiple Measured Variables, 25 1-5 Guides and Standards, 27 1-5.1 Experimental Uncertainty Analysis, 27 1-5.2 Validation of Simulations, 29 1-6 A Note on Nomenclature, 31 References, 31 Problems, 32 2 Coverage and Confidence Intervals for an Individual Measured Variable 33 2-1 Coverage Intervals from the Monte Carlo Method for a Single Measured Variable, 34 2-2 Confidence Intervals from the Taylor Series Method for a Single Measured Variable, Only Random Errors Considered, 35 2-2.1 Statistical Distributions, 35 2-2.2 The Gaussian Distribution, 36 2-2.3 Confidence Intervals in Gaussian Parent Populations, 42 2-2.4 Confidence Intervals in Samples from Gaussian Parent Populations, 43 2-2.5 Tolerance and Prediction Intervals in Samples from Gaussian Parent Populations, 48 2-2.6 Statistical Rejection of Outliers from a Sample Assumed from a Gaussian Parent Population, 51 2-3 Confidence Intervals from the Taylor Series Method for a Single Measured Variable: Random and Systematic Errors Considered, 55 2-3.1 The Central Limit Theorem, 55 2-3.2 Systematic Standard Uncertainty Estimation, 56 2-3.3 The TSM Expanded Uncertainty of a Measured Variable, 58 2-3.4 The TSM Large-Sample Expanded Uncertainty of a Measured Variable, 61 2-4 Uncertainty of Uncertainty Estimates and Confidence Interval Limits for a Measured Variable, 63 2-4.1 Uncertainty of Uncertainty Estimates, 63 2-4.2 Implications of the Uncertainty in Limits of High Confidence Uncertainty Intervals Used in Analysis and Design, 65 References, 67 Problems, 68 3 Uncertainty in a Result Determined from Multiple Variables 71 3-1 General Uncertainty Analysis vs. Detailed Uncertainty Analysis, 72 3-2 Monte Carlo Method for Propagation of Uncertainties, 73 3-2.1 Using the MCM in General Uncertainty Analysis, 73 3-2.2 Using the MCM in Detailed Uncertainty Analysis, 75 3-3 Taylor Series Method for Propagation of Uncertainties, 78 3-3.1 General Uncertainty Analysis Using the Taylor Series Method (TSM), 79 3-3.2 Detailed Uncertainty Analysis Using the Taylor Series Method (TSM), 80 3-4 Determining MCM Coverage Intervals and TSM Expanded Uncertainty, 82 3-4.1 MCM Coverage Intervals for a Result, 82 3-4.2 TSM Expanded Uncertainty of a Result, 85 3-5 General Uncertainty Analysis Using the TSM and MSM Approaches for a Rough-walled Pipe Flow Experiment, 87 3-5.1 TSM General Uncertainty Analysis, 88 3-5.2 MCM General Uncertainty Analysis, 89 3-5.3 Implementation Using a Spreadsheet, 89 3-5.4 Results of the Analysis, 92 3-6 Comments on Implementing Detailed Uncertainty Analysis Using a Spreadsheet, 95 References, 96 Problems, 97 4 General Uncertainty Analysis Using the Taylor Series Method (TSM) 99 4-1 TSM Application to Experiment Planning, 100 4-2 TSM Application to Experiment Planning: Special Functional Form, 103 4-3 Using TSM Uncertainty Analysis in Planning an Experiment, 107 4-4 Example: Analysis of Proposed Particulate Measuring System, 109 4-4.1 The Problem, 109 4-4.2 Proposed Measurement Technique and System, 109 4-4.3 Analysis of Proposed Experiment, 110 4-4.4 Implications of Uncertainty Analysis Results, 112 4-4.5 Design Changes Indicated by Uncertainty Analysis, 113 4-5 Example: Analysis of Proposed Heat Transfer Experiment, 114 4-5.1 The Problem, 114 4-5.2 Two Proposed Experimental Techniques, 115 4-5.3 General Uncertainty Analysis: Steady-State Technique, 117 4-5.4 General Uncertainty Analysis: Transient Technique, 121 4-5.5 Implications of Uncertainty Analysis Results, 123 4-6 Examples of Presentation of Results from Actual Applications, 124 4-6.1 Results from Analysis of a Turbine Test, 124 4-6.2 Results from Analysis of a Solar Thermal Absorber/Thruster Test, 125 References, 126 Problems, 127 5 Detailed Uncertainty Analysis: Overview and Determining Random Uncertainties in Results 131 5-1 Using Detailed Uncertainty Analysis, 131 5-2 Detailed Uncertainty Analysis: Overview of Complete Methodology, 134 5-3 Determining Random Uncertainty of Experimental Result, 137 5-3.1 Example: Random Uncertainty Determination in Compressible Flow Venturi Meter Calibration Facility, 139 5-3.2 Example: Random Uncertainty Determination in Laboratory-Scale Ambient Temperature Flow Test Facility, 141 5-3.3 Example: Random Uncertainty Determination in Full-Scale Rocket Engine Ground Test Facility, 143 5-3.4 Summary, 146 References, 146 6 Detailed Uncertainty Analysis: Determining Systematic Uncertainties in Results 147 6-1 Estimating Systematic Uncertainties, 149 6-1.1 Example: Estimating Uncertainty in Property Values, 152 6-1.2 Example: Estimating Systematic Uncertainties in the Turbulent Heat Transfer Test Facility (THTTF), 153 6-1.3 Example: An “Optimum” Calibration Approach Used in a Test to Determine Turbine Efficiency, 163 6-2 Determining Systematic Uncertainty of Experimental Result Including Correlated Systematic Error Effects, 165 6-2.1 Example: Correlated Systematic Error Effects with “% of Full Scale” (%FS) Systematic Uncertainties, 168 6-2.2 Example: Correlated Systematic Error Effects with “% of Reading” Systematic Uncertainties, 170 6-2.3 Example: Correlated Systematic Error Effects with Systematic Uncertainties that Vary with Set Point, 171 6-2.4 Example: Correlated Systematic Error Effects When Only Some Elemental Sources Are Correlated, 172 6-2.5 Example: Correlated Systematic Error Effects When Determining Average Velocity of a Fluid Flow, 176 6-3 Comparative Testing, 177 6-3.1 Result Is a Difference of Test Results, 178 6-3.2 Result Is a Ratio of Test Results, 181 6-4 Some Additional Considerations in Experiment Execution, 183 6-4.1 Choice of Test Points: Rectification, 183 6-4.2 Choice of Test Sequence, 188 6-4.3 Relationship to Statistical Design of Experiments, 189 6-4.4 Use of a Jitter Program, 191 6-4.5 Comments on Transient Testing, 193 6-4.6 Comments on Digital Data Acquisition Errors, 193 References, 194 Problems, 195 7 Detailed Uncertainty Analysis: Comprehensive Examples 199 7-1 TSM Comprehensive Example: Sample-to-Sample Experiment, 199 7-1.1 The Problem, 199 7-1.2 Measurement System, 200 7-1.3 Zeroth-Order Replication-Level Analysis, 201 7-1.4 First-Order Replication-Level Analysis, 205 7-1.5 Nth-Order Replication-Level Analysis, 206 7-2 TSM Comprehensive Example: Use of Balance Checks, 207 7-3 Comprehensive Example: Debugging and Qualification of a Timewise Experiment, 210 7-3.1 Orders of Replication Level in Timewise Experiments, 211 7-3.2 Example, 212 7-4 Comprehensive Example: Heat Exchanger Test Facility for Single and Comparative Tests, 216 7-4.1 Determination of the Uncertainty in q for a Single Core Design, 219 7-4.2 Determination of the Uncertainty in Δq for Two Core Designs Tested Sequentially Using the Same Facility and Instrumentation, 224 7-5 Case Study: Examples of Single and Comparative Tests of Nuclear Power Plant Residual Heat Removal Heat Exchanger, 230 7-5.1 Single Test Results for an RHR Heat Exchanger (HX1), 231 7-5.2 Comparative Test Approach for the Decrease in Fouling Resistance and Its Uncertainty, 234 References, 235 Problems, 235 8 The Uncertainty Associated with the Use of Regressions 239 8-1 Overview of Linear Regression Analysis and Its Uncertainty, 240 8-1.1 Uncertainty in Coefficients, 241 8-1.2 Uncertainty in Y from Regression Model, 241 8-1.3 (Xi, Yi) Variables Are Functions, 243 8-2 Determining and Reporting Regression Uncertainty, 243 8-2.1 MCM Regression Uncertainty Determination, 244 8-2.2 TSM Regression Uncertainty Determination, 244 8-2.3 Reporting Regression Uncertainties, 244 8-3 Method of Least Squares Regression, 246 8-4 First-Order Regression Example: MCM Approach to Determine Regression Uncertainty, 249 8-5 Regression Examples: TSM Approach to Determine Regression Uncertainty, 252 8-5.1 Uncertainty in First-Order Coefficients, 252 8-5.2 Uncertainty in Y from First-Order Regression, 253 8-5.3 Uncertainty in Y from Higher-Order Regressions, 255 8-5.4 Uncertainty in Y from Regressions in Which X and Y Are Functional Relations, 255 8-5.5 Uncertainty Associated with Multivariate Linear Regression, 257 8-6 Comprehensive TSM Example: Regressions and Their Uncertainties in a Flow Test, 259 8-6.1 Experimental Apparatus, 261 8-6.2 Pressure Transducer Calibration and Uncertainty, 261 8-6.3 Venturi Discharge Coefficient and Its Uncertainty, 265 8-6.4 Flow Rate and Its Uncertainty in a Test, 269 References, 273 Problems, 273 9 Validation of Simulations 277 9-1 Introduction to Validation Methodology, 277 9-2 Errors and Uncertainties, 278 9-3 Validation Nomenclature, 279 9-4 Validation Approach, 280 9-5 Code and Solution Verification, 284 9-6 Interpretation of Validation Results Using E and uval, 284 9-6.1 Interpretation with No Assumptions Made about Error Distributions, 285 9-6.2 Interpretation with Assumptions Made about Error Distributions, 285 9-7 Estimation of Validation Uncertainty uval, 286 9-7.1 Case 1: Estimating uval When Experimental Value D of Validation Variable Is Directly Measured, 287 9-7.2 Cases 2 and 3: Estimating uval When Experimental Value D of Validation Variable Is Determined from Data Reduction Equation, 290 9-7.3 Case 4: Estimating uval When Experimental Value D of Validation Variable Is Determined from Data Reduction Equation That Itself Is a Model, 295 9-8 Some Practical Points, 297 References, 299 Answers to Selected Problems 301 Appendix A Useful Statistics 305 Appendix B Taylor Series Method (TSM) for Uncertainty Propagation 311 B-1 Derivation of Uncertainty Propagation Equation, 312 B-2 Comparison with Previous Approaches, 316 B-2.1 Abernethy et al. Approach, 316 B-2.2 Coleman and Steele Approach, 317 B-2.3 ISO Guide 1993 GUM Approach, 318 B-2.4 AIAA Standard, AGARD, and ANSI/ASME Approach, 319 B-2.5 NIST Approach, 319 B-3 Additional Assumptions for Engineering Applications, 319 B-3.1 Approximating the Coverage Factor, 320 References, 322 Appendix C Comparison of Models for Calculation of Uncertainty 325 C-1 Monte Carlo Simulations, 325 C-2 Simulation Results, 328 References, 336 Appendix D Shortest Coverage Interval for Monte Carlo Method 337 Reference, 338 Appendix E Asymmetric Systematic Uncertainties 339 E-1 Procedure for Asymmetric Systematic Uncertainties Using TSM Propagation, 340 E-2 Procedure for Asymmetric Systematic Uncertainties Using MCM Propagation, 344 E-3 Example: Biases in a Gas Temperature Measurement System, 344 References, 351 Appendix F Dynamic Response of Instrument Systems 353 F-1 General Instrument Response, 353 F-2 Response of Zero-Order Instruments, 355 F-3 Response of First-Order Instruments, 356 F-4 Response of Second-Order Instruments, 359 F-5 Summary, 362 References, 362 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a concise yet comprehensive introduction to XPS and AES techniques in surface analysis This accessible second edition of the bestselling book, An Introduction to Surface Analysis by XPS and AES, 2nd Edition explores the basic principles and applications of X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) and Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES) techniques. It starts with an examination of the basic concepts of electron spectroscopy and electron spectrometer design, followed by a qualitative and quantitative interpretation of the electron spectrum. Chapters examine recent innovations in instrument design and key applications in metallurgy, biomaterials, and electronics. Practical and concise, it includes compositional depth profiling; multi-technique analysis; and everything about samplesincluding their handling, preparation, stability, and more. Topics discussed in more depth include peak fitting, energy loss background analysis, multi-technique analysis, andTable of ContentsPreface to First Edition xi Preface to Second Edition xiii Acknowledgements xvii 1 Electron Spectroscopy: Some Basic Concepts 1 1.1 Analysis of Surfaces 1 1.2 Notation 3 1.2.1 Spectroscopists’ Notation 3 1.2.2 X‐ray Notation 4 1.3 X‐ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 4 1.4 Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES) 8 1.5 Scanning Auger Microscopy 12 1.6 The Depth of Analysis in Electron Spectroscopy 13 1.7 Comparison of XPS and AES/SAM 16 1.8 The Availability of Surface Analytical Equipment 17 2 Electron Spectrometer Design 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 The Vacuum System 19 2.3 X‐ray Sources for XPS 22 2.3.1 Choice of X‐ray Anode 23 2.3.2 X‐ray Monochromators 27 2.3.3 Synchrotron Sources 30 2.4 The Electron Gun for AES 31 2.4.1 Electron Sources 31 2.4.1.1 Thermionic Emitter 32 2.4.1.2 Lanthanum Hexaboride Emitter 32 2.4.1.3 Cold Field Emitter 32 2.4.1.4 Hot Field Emitter 33 2.4.1.5 Comparison of Electron Emitters for AES 34 2.4.2 The Electron Column 35 2.4.3 Spot Size 35 2.5 Analysers for Electron Spectroscopy 37 2.5.1 The Cylindrical Mirror Analyser 38 2.5.2 The Hemispherical Sector Analyser 41 2.5.2.1 CAE Mode of Operation 42 2.5.2.2 CRR Mode of Operation 44 2.5.2.3 Comparison of CAE and CRR Modes 46 2.5.2.4 The Transfer Lens 47 2.5.3 Calibration of the Electron Spectrometer Energy Scale 48 2.6 Near Ambient Pressure XPS 49 2.7 Detectors 52 2.7.1 Channel Electron Multipliers 52 2.7.2 Microchannel Plates 54 2.7.3 Two‐Dimensional Detectors 54 2.7.3.1 The Resistive‐Anode Detector 55 2.7.3.2 The Delay‐Line Detector 55 2.8 Small Area XPS 56 2.8.1 Lens‐Defined Small Area XPS 56 2.8.2 Source-defined Small Area Analysis 57 2.9 XPS Imaging and Mapping 57 2.9.1 Serial Acquisition 58 2.9.2 Parallel Acquisition 59 2.9.2.1 Parallel Imaging Using a Hemispherical Spectrometer 59 2.9.2.2 Parallel Imaging Using a Spherical Mirror Analyser 60 2.9.2.3 Spatial Resolution and Chemical Imaging 61 2.10 Angle Resolved XPS 64 2.11 Automation 66 3 The Electron Spectrum: Qualitative and Quantitative Interpretation 69 3.1 Introduction 69 3.2 Qualitative Analysis 69 3.2.1 Unwanted Features in Electron Spectra 72 3.2.2 Data Acquisition 72 3.2.2.1 Core Level Spectra 72 3.2.2.2 Valence Band Spectra 73 3.3 Chemical State Information 74 3.3.1 X‐ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 74 3.3.2 Peak Fitting of XPS Spectra 78 3.3.3 Auger Electron Spectroscopy 81 3.3.4 X‐AES 82 3.3.5 Chemical State Plots 84 3.3.6 Shakeup Satellites 86 3.3.7 Multiplet Splitting 87 3.3.8 Plasmons 87 3.4 Quantitative Analysis 88 3.4.1 Quantification in XPS 89 3.4.1.1 Calculating Atomic Concentration 89 3.4.1.2 Measuring Peak Intensity 92 3.4.2 Quantification in AES 94 4 Compositional Depth Profiling 97 4.1 Introduction 97 4.2 Non‐destructive Depth Methods 98 4.2.1 Measurements at a Single Emission Angle 98 4.2.2 Angle Resolved XPS Measurements 99 4.2.3 Measurement of Overlayer Thickness Using ARXPS 101 4.2.4 Elastic Scattering 103 4.2.5 Multilayer Thickness Calculations Using ARXPS 104 4.2.6 Compositional Depth Profiles from ARXPS Measurements 107 4.2.7 Variation of Analysis Depth with Electron Kinetic Energy 110 4.2.8 Background Analysis 112 4.3 Depth Profiling by Sputtering with Energetic Ions 115 4.3.1 The Sputtering Process 115 4.3.2 Experimental Method 116 4.3.3 The Nature of the Ion Beam 118 4.3.3.1 Noble Gas Ions 118 4.3.3.2 Cluster Ions 119 4.3.3.3 Metal Ions 121 4.3.4 Sputter Yield and Etch Rate 122 4.3.5 Factors Affecting the Etch Rate 123 4.3.5.1 Material 123 4.3.5.2 Ion Current 123 4.3.5.3 Ion Energy 123 4.3.5.4 Nature of the Ion Beam 124 4.3.5.5 Angle of Incidence 124 4.3.6 Factors Affecting the Depth Resolution 124 4.3.6.1 Ion Beam Characteristics 124 4.3.6.2 Crater Quality 125 4.3.6.3 Beam Impurities 125 4.3.6.4 Information Depth 126 4.3.6.5 Original Surface Roughness 127 4.3.6.6 Induced Roughness 127 4.3.6.7 Preferential Sputtering 127 4.3.6.8 Redeposition of Sputtered Material 128 4.3.7 Calibration 128 4.3.8 Ion Gun Design 128 4.3.8.1 Electron Impact Ion Guns 128 4.3.8.2 Argon‐Cluster Ion Guns 129 4.3.8.3 Liquid Metal Ion Guns 131 4.4 Sectioning 131 4.4.1 FIB Sectioning 131 4.4.2 Angle Lapping 132 4.4.3 Ball Cratering 133 5 Multi‐technique Analysis 135 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Ultraviolet Photoelectron Spectroscopy (UPS) 135 5.3 Low Energy Ion Scattering Spectroscopy (LEISS) 137 5.4 Reflection Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy (REELS) 139 5.4.1 Elastic Scattering 140 5.4.2 Inelastic Scattering 141 5.5 Work Function Measurements 142 5.6 Energy Dispersive X‐ray Analysis (EDX) 143 6 The Sample 145 6.1 Sample Handling 145 6.2 Sample Preparation 147 6.3 Sample Mounting 149 6.4 Sample Stability 149 6.5 Contamination and Damage During Analysis 151 6.6 Controlling Sample Charging 152 6.6.1 Sample Charging in XPS 152 6.6.2 Sample Charging in AES 154 7 Applications of Electron Spectroscopy in Materials Science 157 7.1 Introduction 157 7.2 Metallurgy 157 7.2.1 Grain Boundary Segregation 158 7.2.2 Electronic Structure of Metallic Alloys 160 7.2.3 Surface Engineering 163 7.3 Corrosion Science 168 7.4 Ceramics 176 7.5 Microelectronics and Semiconductor Materials 181 7.5.1 Mapping Semiconductor Devices Using AES 182 7.5.2 XPS Failure Analysis of Microelectronic Devices 186 7.5.3 Depth Profiling of Semiconductor Materials 188 7.5.3.1 Transistor Gate Dielectrics 188 7.5.3.2 Inorganic Chemical State Profiling 189 7.5.3.3 Organic Semiconductor Profiling 190 7.6 Polymeric Materials 193 7.7 Adhesion Science 202 7.8 Nanotechnology 210 7.9 Biology 215 7.10 Energy 219 8 Comparison of XPS and AES with Other Analytical Techniques 223 Glossary 229 Bibliography 239 Appendix 1 247 Auger Electron Energies 247 Appendix 2 249 Table of Binding Energies Accessible with Al Kα Radiation 250 Appendix 3 255 Documentary Standards in Surface Analysis 255 The Scope of TC201 255 The Purpose of TC201 255 International Standards Relevant to Electron Spectroscopies 256 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume is part of the Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding (CESP) series. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii OPERATIONS Glass Plant Audits—Three Case Studies in Glass Production 3 Problems and Their SolutionsJ. M. Uhlik Furnace Design and Operation for the Long Term 19D. Boothe CONTROLS Energy Reduction with Model Based Predictive Control 33M. Powys and D. Armagost, M. P. H. Muijsenberg, R. Bodi, J. Muller, J. David, and G. Neff Smart Manufacturing for Continuous, High-Technology 45 Glass ProductionD. Kuhn and J. Ahrens Optimal Control Strategy for Predictive Compensation of Gas 55 Quality Fluctuations in Glass Melting FurnancesP. Hemmann ENERGY New Furnace Design Solution Breaks the 3 Gigajoules per Ton 67 Benchmark LimitM. Lindig-Nikolaus Ox-Fuel Tableware Furnace with Novel Oxygen- and Natural 73 Gas Preheating SystemT. Görüney, Ne et Arzan, Süleyman Koç, O. Öztürk and H. ahin, H. Kim and T. Kang, Y. Joumani, X. Paubel, and L. Jarry Advanced Heat Recovery for Ox-Fuel Fired Glass Furnaces with 83 Plus TechnologyS. Laux, U. Iyoha, R. Bell, J. Pedel, A. Francis, K.T. Wu, and H. Kobayashi Improving Energy Efficiency of Glass Furnances 93M. van Kersbergen, and S. Lessmann Optimization of Combustion Settings: An Energy Efficient Approach to the Reduction of Emissions by Glass Melting Furnaces 103S. Tiozzo, W. Battaglia, R. Dall’Igna, and A. Migatta MELTING Impact of Redox in Industrial Glass Melting and Importance of 115 Redox ControlM. Hubert, A. J. Faber, H. Sesigur, F. Akmaz, S-R. Kahl, E. Alejandro, and T. Maehara MODELING AND FORMING Fluid Dynamics Analysis Leading to Innovative Glass 131 Homogenization Device “Arctwister”A. Fuchs Non-Isothermal Glass Moulding of Complex LED Optics 141H. Kreilkamp, A. T. Vu, O. Dambon, and ND F. Klocke REFRACTORIES Tin Bath Block Evolution and Development: A Case of Toil, 153 Endeavour and FearsChristopher J. Windle New Oxy-Combustion Crown Efficient Flue Gas 167 Heat RecoveryW. Kuhn and A. Reynolds Extending the Life of Fused Cast Ceramics 171R. McGrath and J. Crowe Enhanced Radar Control for High Performance Bottom Paving 179J-G. Vuillermet, M. Gaubil, I. Cabodi, and O. Bories High Performance Superstructure Concept for Container Glass 187 FurnacesB. C. Snow and T. Close Enhanced Hydrated Lime—A Simple Solution for Acid Gas 201ComplianceG. Hunt and M. Sewell

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis groundbreaking book uniquely focuses on the exploration of the green synthesis of metal nanoparticles and their characterization and applications. Metal nanoparticles are the basic elements of nanotechnology as they are the primary source used in the design of nanostructured devices and materials. Nanomaterials can be manufactured either incidentally, with physical or chemical methods, or naturally; and the high demand for them has led to their large-scale production by various toxic solvents or high energy techniques. However, due to the growing awareness of environmental and safety issues, the use of clean, nontoxic and environment-friendly ways to synthesize metal nanoparticles has emerged out of necessity. The use of biological resources, such as microbes, plant parts, vegetable wastes, agricultural wastes, gums, etc., has grown to become an alternative way of synthesizing metal nanoparticles. This biogenic synthesis is green, environmentally friendly, cost-efTable of ContentsPreface xxi Part I Future Vision of Green Nanotechnology 1 1 Recent Advances in Green Nanotechnology and the Vision for the Future 3Sukanchan Palit and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 The Objective of this Study 4 1.3 The Rationale for this Study 5 1.4 What is Meant by Green Nanotechnology? 5 1.5 The Scientific Doctrine and Truth Behind Nanotechnology Applications 6 1.6 Recent Research Pursuit in the Field of Nanotechnology 7 1.7 Scientific Endeavors in the Field of Green Nanotechnology 8 1.8 Challenges and Opportunities in the Field of Green Nanotechnology 13 1.9 Environmental Sustainability, Humankind’s Progress and Vision of Science 14 1.10 Scientific Cognizance, the Greatness of Research Pursuit and Green Nanotechnology 14 1.11 Global Water Crisis – The Vision and Challenge of Science 15 1.12 Heavy Metal and Arsenic Groundwater Contamination – The Vision for the Future 15 1.13 Groundwater Remediation and Water Purification Technologies 16 1.14 Application of Nanotechnology in Industrial Wastewater Treatment 17 1.15 The Vision of Renewable Energy Technologies 18 1.16 Future Research Trends and Flow of Thoughts 19 1.17 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 20 References 20 2 Green Synthesis of Metal-Based Nanoparticles and Their Applications 23Shamaila Sajjad, Sajjad Ahmed Khan Leghari, Najam-Ul-Athar Ryma and Sidra Anis Farooqi 2.1 Introduction 24 2.2 Botanical Extract Mediated Green Synthesis 27 2.3 Microbial Extract-Mediated Green Synthesis 47 2.4 Conclusions 53 Acknowledgment 54 References 54 3 Plant and Tree Gums as Renewable Feedstocks for the Phytosynthesis of Nanoparticles: A Green Chemistry Approach 79Aruna Jyothi Kora 3.1 Introduction 80 3.2 Different Varieties of Plant Gums 90 3.3 Phytosynthesized Nanoparticles and Their Applications 96 3.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects 101 Acknowledgment 102 References 102 4 Green Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles and its Reaction Mechanisms 113Rajasekhar Chokkareddy and Gan G. Redhi 4.1 Introduction 114 4.2 Green Synthesis Using Plant Extracts 117 4.3 Synthesis and Mechanism Action of Metal Nanoparticles 120 4.4 Conclusions 134 References 135 5 Toxicity of Metal/Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and Their Future Prospects 141Subramanyam Deepika, Rajendran Harish Kumar, Chinnadurai Immanuel Selvaraj and Selvaraj Mohana Roopan 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Applications of Metal/Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and Their Toxicity 149 5.3 Future Perspectives 158 5.4 Conclusion 159 Conflict of Interest 160 Acknowledgment 160 Abbreviations 160 References 161 Part II Biosynthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles 165 6 Current Advances in Biosynthesis of Silver Nanoparticles and Their Applications 167Rajasekhar Chokkareddy, Niranjan Thondavada, Bakusele Kabane and Gan G. Redhi 6.1 Introduction 168 6.2 Synthesis of Nanoparticles 169 6.3 Biomedical Applications of Silver Nanoparticles 180 6.4 Conclusions 190 References 191 7 Green and Sustainable Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles Using Orange Peel Pith 199G. López-Téllez, A. R. Vílchis Néstor, E. Gutiérrez-Segura, J. E. Moreno-Marcelino, A. Alcántara-Cobos, J. M. Malvaez-Medina and A. Castrejón Mejía 7.1 Introduction 200 7.2 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles by Plants 201 7.3 Bioreduction Mechanism 201 7.4 Suitable Characteristics of Nanoparticles for Remediation 202 7.5 Orange Peel Pith as a Support, Reducing and Capping Agent of Metallic Nanoparticles 203 7.6 Conclusions 213 References 214 8 Biological and Biomedical Applications of Eco-Friendly Synthesized Gold Nanoparticles 217G. Madhumitha, J. Fowsiya and Selvaraj Mohana Roopan 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 Plant Extract as Bioreactors for Green Synthesis of AuNPs 218 8.3 Role of Phytochemicals in AuNPs 225 8.4 Biological and Biomedical Applications of AuNPs 228 8.5 Conclusion and Future Prospective 235 Conflict of Interest 235 Acknowledgment 235 References 235 9 Green Tiny Magnets: An Economic and Eco-Friendly Remedy for Environmental Damage 245Paramita Karfa and Rashmi Madhuri 9.1 Introduction 246 9.2 Classification of Magnetic Materials 247 9.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Magnetic Nanoparticles 253 9.4 Application of Magnetic Nanoparticles for Environmental Remediation 263 10 Green Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles Using Biopolymers and Plant Extracts 293Ibrahim M. El-Sherbiny and Ehab Salih 10.1 Introduction 294 10.2 Types of Nanomaterials 295 10.3 Synthesis Approaches of Metal Nanoparticles 297 10.4 Green Synthesis of MNPs 300 10.5 Conclusion 310 References 310 11 Green Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles from Natural Resources and Food Waste and Their Environmental Application 321Hussein I. Abdel-Shafy and Mona S. M. Mansour 11.1 Introduction 322 11.2 Several Methods for Metallic Nanoparticle Synthesis 323 11.3 Biosynthesis of Different Metallic Nanoparticles from Plant Derivatives 324 11.4 Green Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles Using Food and Agro Wastes 349 11.5 Nanotechnology in Environmental Applications 362 11.6 Conclusions 369 Acknowledgment 370 References 370 12 Green Synthesis of Silver Nanoparticles for Biomedical and Environmental Applications 387Varadavenkatesan Thivaharan, Vinayagam Ramesh and Selvaraj Raja 12.1 Introduction 388 12.2 Mechanistic Aspects of Silver Nanoparticle Synthesis 390 12.3 Applications of Phytogenic Silver Nanoparticles 391 12.4 Biomedical Applications 391 12.5 Environmental Applications 412 12.6 Conclusions and Future Directions 418 References 419 13 Green Synthesis of Silver, Copper and Iron Nanoparticles: Synthesis, Characterization and Their Applications in Wastewater Treatment 441Th. Babita Devi and M. Ahmaruzzaman 13.1 Introduction 442 13.2 Plants Mediated Green Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 444 13.3 Synthesis, Mechanism and Characterization of Synthesized Metals Nanoparticles 444 13.4 Catalytic Activities of Silver, Copper and Iron Nanoparticles for the Reduction and Photodegradation Process (Waste Water Treatment) 450 13.5 Toxicity and Future Prospect 457 13.6 Future of Green Route in Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 461 13.7 Concluding Summary 462 References 463 Part III Biosynthesis of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 467 14 Current Scenario in Green Approaches for Metal/Metal Oxide Nanoparticles Synthesis 469Selvaraj Mohana Roopan 14.1 Introduction 469 14.2 Overview of Biological Approach-Microbial Medium 473 14.3 Biological Approach Using Plant Sources as Medium 481 14.4 Applications 497 14.5 Conclusion 503 Conflict of Interest 503 Acknowledgment 503 Abbreviations 504 References 504 15 Advanced Tin-Oxide Nanostructures: Green Synthesis, Prospects and Challenges for Clean Energy and Environmental Sustainability 513Dipyaman Mohanta and M. Ahmaruzzaman 15.1 Introduction 514 15.2 Green Strategies for the Fabrication of Tin-Oxide Nanostructures 515 15.3 Detection of Pollutants and Environmental Remediation 517 15.4 Clean Energy Generation and Efficient Energy Storage 530 15.5 Discussion and Future Prospects 537 15.6 Conclusion 538 References 539 Part IV Biosynthesis of Noble Metal Nanoparticles 553 16 Green Synthesis of Noble Metal Nanoparticles: A Step Forward to Economical and Sustainable Development 555Santanu Patra and Rashmi Madhuri 16.1 Overview of Nanoparticles 556 16.2 Green Synthesis of Noble Metal Nanoparticles 561 16.3 Synthesis of Different Shaped Noble Metal Nanoparticles by Green Synthesis Approach 590 16.4 Conclusion and Future Scope 592 Acknowledgment 593 References 593 17 Green Synthesis of Platinum Nanoparticles and Their Biomedical Applications 603Niranjan Thondavada, Rajasekar Chokkareddy and Gan G. Redhi 17.1 Introduction 603 17.2 Synthesis of Platinum Nanoparticles 605 17.3 Toxicology of PtNPs 609 17.4 Biomedical Applications of PtNPs 610 17.5 Enzymatic Properties of PtNPs and their Applications 613 17.6 Conclusion 616 References 616 18 Eco-Friendly Noble Metal Nanoparticles for Therapeutic Applications: Present and Future Scenario 629Raksha Choudhary and Rashmi Madhuri 18.1 Introduction 630 18.2 Why Noble Metal Nanoparticles are Gaining in Popularity in the Biomedical Field 632 18.3 Biomedical Applications of Noble Metal Nanoparticles 632 18.4 Conclusions and Future Directions 651 Acknowledgment 654 References 654 Part V Synthesis of Biopolymer Nanoparticles and Quantum Dots 667 19 Role of Bioconjugated Quantum Dots in Detection and Reduction of Pathogenic Microbes 669Angappan Rameshkumar, Devanesan Arul Ananth, Sivagurunathan Periyasamy, Deviram Garlapati and Thilagar Sivasudha 19.1 Introduction 670 19.2 About QDs 671 19.3 General Applications of QDs 672 19.4 Mechanism of Action of QDs in Cell Lines 674 19.5 QDs as Antimicrobial Agents 674 19.6 Mechanism of QDs Exhibiting Antimicrobial Activity 675 19.7 Advantage and Disadvantages of QDs as Antimicrobial Agent 683 19.8 Conclusion and Future Prospects 684 References 684 Index 689

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn the last two decades, several promising engineered nanomaterials that combine therapeutic features and imaging functionalities have been presented, but very few have arrived on the market. The purpose of this book is to collect and comprehensively discuss the advances in this current and exciting topic in order to promote and enhance its growth. In the first part, a general introduction about the main features of both organic and inorganic nanomaterials is provided. Then, the most promising and innovative applications for cancer treatment and diagnostic are introduced. In the second part, an analysis of the nanomaterials in the market for healthcare applications is presented. The issue of unwanted accumulation of metals in organisms after the designed action is then discussed. Finally, the most recent progresses in the design of nanomaterials that are able to escape from organisms after the selected action are comprehensively described, and the perspectives of this exciting fiTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Introduction 1 References 3 2 Nanomaterials 5 2.1 Physical Properties of Nanomaterials 5 2.1.1 Thermodynamic Properties: Melting Point Depression and Superheating 7 2.1.2 Optical Properties 10 2.1.3 Magnetism 14 2.2 Nanomaterials: An Overview 21 2.2.1 Organic Nanoparticles 21 2.2.2 Inorganic Nanoparticles 39 References 65 3 Promising Applications in Medicine 79 3.1 Diagnostics 80 3.1.1 X-Ray Computed Tomography 80 3.1.2 Photoacoustic Imaging 84 3.1.3 Positron Emission Tomography 88 3.1.4 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 90 3.1.5 Raman-Based Diagnostics 95 3.2 Therapy 99 3.2.1 Chemotherapy 99 3.2.2 Hyperthermia 105 3.2.3 Radiotherapy 112 References 115 4 Interactions of Nanomaterials with Biological Systems 137 4.1 Cellular Level (in vitro) 137 4.1.1 Cellular Uptake and Intracellular Fate 137 4.1.2 Physio-Chemical Dependence of Nanomaterials Uptake 145 4.1.3 Cytotoxicity 149 4.2 Body Level (in vivo) 153 4.2.1 Blood Circulation 154 4.2.2 Immune/Inflammatory Response 167 4.2.3 Metabolism (RES, Degradation, Excretion and Persistence) 172 References 183 5 Nanomaterials in the Market or in the Way of 201 5.1 Approval Pipeline (FDA and EMA) 202 5.2 Nanotherapeutics 205 5.3 Nanodiagnostics 209 References 212 6 Avoiding the Persistence of Metal Nanomaterials 217 6.1 Ultrasmall-in-Nano Approach 218 6.2 Porphyrin-Based Nanomaterials 229 References 233 7 Conclusions and Perspectives 241 References 244 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis unique book will enable engineers and natural-based polymer scientists to achieve multi-functionality in products using soy protein and various nano- and micro-sized biobased materials and reinforcements. Many of the recent research accomplishments in the area of soy-based blends, composites and bionanocomposites are presented in this book. In addition to introducing soy protein and its structure and relationship properties, the book covers many other relevant topics such as the state-of-the-art, new challenges, advances and opportunities in the field such as: biomedical applications of soy protein; electrospinning of soy protein nanofibers, their synthesis and applications; soy protein-based materials rheology; soy proteins as a potential source of active peptides of nutraceutical significance; soy protein isolate-based films; and use of soy protein-based carriers for encapsu??lating bioactive ingredients.Table of ContentsPreface xiv 1 Soy Protein: State-of-the-Art, New Challenges and Opportunities 1Visakh P. M. 1.1 Soy Protein: Introduction, Structure and Properties Relationship 1 1.2 Advances in Soy Protein-Based Nanocomposites 3 1.3 Applications of Soy Protein-Based Blends, Composites, and Nanocomposites 5 1.4 Biomedical Applications of Soy Protein 6 1.5 Electrospinning of Soy Protein Nanofibers: Synthesis and Applications 8 1.6 Soy Proteins as Potential Source of Active Peptides of Nutraceutical Significance 10 1.7 Soy Protein Isolate-Based Films 12 1.8 Use of Soy Protein-Based Carriers for Encapsulating Bioactive Ingredients 14 References 15 2 Soy Protein: Introduction, Structure and Properties Relationship 23Visakh P. M. 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Structure of Soy Proteins 23 2.3 Source of Soy Proteins 24 2.4 Properties of Soy Proteins 26 2.5 Chemical Modification of Soy Proteins 29 2.6 Characterization of Soy Proteins 30 References 33 3 Advances in Soy Protein-Based Nanocomposites 39Huafeng Tian Gaiping Guo and Xiaogang Luo 3.1 Introduction 40 3.2 Preparation Methods of Soy Protein Nanocomposites 41 3.3 Properties of Thermoplastic Soy Protein Nanocomposites 43 3.4 Protein-Based Nanocomposites 48 3.5 Conclusion 61 Acknowledgements 61 References 61 4 Applications of Soy Protein-Based Blends, Composites, and Nanocomposites 67Ruann Janser Soares de Castro, André Ohara, Paula Okuro, Camila Utsunomia, Joelise de Alencar Figueira Angelotti, Fabíola Aliaga de Lima and Hélia Harumi Sato 4.1 Introduction 68 4.2 Applications of Soy Protein Particulars 69 4.3 Applications of Soy Protein-Based Blends 79 4.4 Applications of Soy Protein-Based Composites 86 4.5 Applications of Soy Protein-Based Nanocomposites 90 4.6 Conclusion 92 References 93 5 Biomedical Applications of Soy Protein 103Blessing A. Aderibigbe 5.1 Introduction 103 5.2 The forms of SP 105 5.3 Wound-Dressing Materials 107 5.4 Potential Applications of SP in Regenerative Medicine and Tissue Engineering 113 5.5 Application of SP Product for Regeneration of Bone 118 5.6 Application of SP in Drug Delivery Systems 121 5.7 Conclusion 126 References 128 6 Electrospinning of Soy Protein Nanofibers: Synthesis and Applications 135Carlos L. Salas 6.1 Introduction 136 6.2 Properties of Soybean Proteins That Affect Electrospinning 136 6.3 Applications 148 6.4 Conclusion and Outlook 152 References 153 7 Soy Proteins as Potential Source of Active Peptides of Nutraceutical Significance 155Junus Salampessy and Narsimha Reddy 7.1 Introduction 156 7.2 Soy Proteins as Source of Bioactive Peptides 157 7.3 Identification of Potential Bioactive Peptides from Soy Proteins 159 7.4 Production of Bioactive Peptides from Soy Proteins 169 7.5 Potential Applications of Bioactive Peptides from Soy Proteins 183 7.6 Conclusion 185 References 186 8 Soy Protein Isolate-Based Films 193Shifeng Zhang 8.1 Introduction 193 8.2 Soy Protein Film Preparation 196 8.3 Characterization of Soy Protein Films 199 8.4 Modifications 211 8.5 Applications 215 References 218 9 Use of Soy Protein-Based Carriers for Encapsulating Bioactive Ingredients 229Zhen-Xing Tang and Jie-Yu Liang 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Encapsulation Methods 231 9.3 Soy Protein-Based Encapsulation Carriers 233 9.4 Conclusion 242 References 242

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces readers to the field of cyber modeling and simulation and examines current developments in the US and internationally This book provides an overview of cyber modeling and simulation (M&S) developments. Using scenarios, courses of action (COAs), and current M&S and simulation environments, the author presents the overall information assurance process, incorporating the people, policies, processes, and technologies currently available in the field. The author ties up the various threads that currently compose cyber M&S into a coherent view of what is measurable, simulative, and usable in order to evaluate systems for assured operation. An Introduction to Cyber Modeling and Simulation provides the reader with examples of tools and technologies currently available for performing cyber modeling and simulation. It examines how decision-making processes may benefit from M&S in cyber defense. It also examines example emulators, simulators and their potential combination. The bookTable of Contents1 Brief Review of Cyber Incidents 1 1.1 Cyber’s Emergence as an Issue 3 1.2 Estonia and Georgia – Militarization of Cyber 4 1.3 Conclusions 6 2 Cyber Security – An Introduction to Assessment and Maturity Frameworks 9 2.1 Assessment Frameworks 9 2.2 NIST 800 Risk Framework 9 2.2.1 Maturity Models 12 2.2.2 Use Cases/Scenarios 13 2.3 Cyber Insurance Approaches 14 2.3.1 An Introduction to Loss Estimate and Rate Evaluation for Cyber 17 2.4 Conclusions 17 2.5 Future Work 18 2.6 Questions 18 3 Introduction to Cyber Modeling and Simulation (M&S) 19 3.1 One Approach to the Science of Cyber Security 19 3.2 Cyber Mission System Development Framework 21 3.3 Cyber Risk Bow‐Tie: Likelihood to Consequence Model 21 3.4 Semantic Network Model of Cyberattack 22 3.5 Taxonomy of Cyber M&S 24 3.6 Cyber Security as a Linear System – Model Example 25 3.7 Conclusions 26 3.8 Questions 27 4 Technical and Operational Scenarios 29 4.1 Scenario Development 30 4.1.1 Technical Scenarios and Critical Security Controls (CSCs) 31 4.1.2 ARMOUR Operational Scenarios (Canada) 32 4.2 Cyber System Description for M&S 34 4.2.1 State Diagram Models/Scenarios of Cyberattacks 34 4.2.2 McCumber Model 35 4.2.3 Military Activity and Cyber Effects (MACE) Taxonomy 36 4.2.4 Cyber Operational Architecture Training System (COATS) Scenarios 37 4.3 Modeling and Simulation Hierarchy – Strategic Decision Making and Procurement Risk Evaluation 39 4.4 Conclusions 42 4.5 Questions 43 5 Cyber Standards for Modeling and Simulation 45 5.1 Cyber Modeling and Simulation Standards Background 46 5.2 An Introduction to Cyber Standards for Modeling and Simulation 47 5.2.1 MITRE’s (MITRE) Cyber Threat Information Standards 47 5.2.2 Cyber Operational Architecture Training System 49 5.2.3 Levels of Conceptual Interoperability 50 5.3 Standards Overview – Cyber vs. Simulation 51 5.3.1 Simulation Interoperability Standards Organization (SISO) Standards 52 5.3.2 Cyber Standards 54 5.4 Conclusions 56 5.5 Questions 57 6 Cyber Course of Action (COA) Strategies 59 6.1 Cyber Course of Action (COA) Background 59 6.1.1 Effects‐Based Cyber‐COA Optimization Technology and Experiments (EBCOTE) Project 59 6.1.2 Crown Jewels Analysis 60 6.1.3 Cyber Mission Impact Assessment (CMIA) Tool 61 6.1.4 Analyzing Mission Impacts of Cyber Actions 63 6.2 Cyber Defense Measurables – Decision Support System (DSS) Evaluation Criteria 64 6.2.1 Visual Analytics 65 6.2.2 Managing Cyber Events 67 6.2.3 DSS COA and VV&A 68 6.3 Cyber Situational Awareness (SA) 68 6.3.1 Active and Passive Situational Awareness for Cyber 69 6.3.2 Cyber System Monitoring and Example Approaches 69 6.4 Cyber COAs and Decision Types 70 6.5 Conclusions 71 6.6 Further Considerations 72 6.7 Questions 72 7 Cyber Computer‐Assisted Exercise (CAX) and Situational Awareness (SA) via Cyber M&S 75 7.1 Training Type and Current Cyber Capabilities 77 7.2 Situational Awareness (SA) Background and Measures 78 7.3 Operational Cyber Domain and Training Considerations 79 7.4 Cyber Combined Arms Exercise (CAX) Environment Architecture 81 7.4.1 CAX Environment Architecture with Cyber Layer 82 7.4.2 Cyber Injections into Traditional CAX – Leveraging Constructive Simulation 84 7.4.3 Cyber CAX – Individual and Group Training 85 7.5 Conclusions 86 7.6 Future Work 87 7.7 Questions 87 8 Cyber Model‐Based Evaluation Background 89 8.1 Emulators,Simulators, and Verification/Validation for Cyber System Description 89 8.2 Modeling Background 90 8.2.1 Cyber Simulators 91 8.2.2 Cyber Emulators 93 8.2.3 Emulator/Simulator Combinations for Cyber Systems 94 8.2.4 Verification, Validation, and Accreditation (VV&A) 96 8.3 Conclusions 99 8.4 Questions 100 9 Cyber Modeling and Simulation and System Risk Analysis 101 9.1 Background on Cyber System Risk Analysis 101 9.2 Introduction to using Modeling and Simulation for System Risk Analysis with Cyber Effects 104 9.3 General Business Enterprise Description Model 105 9.3.1 Translate Data to Knowledge 107 9.3.2 Understand the Enterprise 114 9.3.3 Sampling and Cyber Attack Rate Estimation 114 9.3.4 Finding Unknown Knowns – Success in Finding Improvised Explosive Device Example 116 9.4 Cyber Exploit Estimation 116 9.4.1 Enterprise Failure Estimation due to Cyber Effects 118 9.5 Countermeasures and Work Package Construction 120 9.6 Conclusions and Future Work 122 9.7 Questions 124 10 Cyber Modeling & Simulation (M&S) for Test and Evaluation (T&E) 125 10.1 Background 125 10.2 Cyber Range Interoperability Standards (CRIS) 126 10.3 Cyber Range Event Process and Logical Range 127 10.4 Live,Virtual, and Constructive (LVC) for Cyber 130 10.4.1 Role of LVC in Capability Development 132 10.4.2 Use of LVC Simulations in Cyber Range Events 133 10.5 Applying the Logical Range Construct to System under Test (SUT) Interaction 134 10.6 Conclusions 135 10.7 Questions 136 11 Developing Model‐Based Cyber Modeling and Simulation Frameworks 137 11.1 Background 137 11.2 Model‐ Based Systems Engineering (MBSE) and System of Systems Description (Data Centric) 137 11.3 Knowledge‐ Based Systems Engineering (KBSE) for Cyber Simulation 138 11.3.1 DHS and SysML Modeling for Buildings (CEPHEID VARIABLE) 139 11.3.2 The Cyber Security Modeling Language (CySeMoL) 140 11.3.3 Cyber Attack Modeling and Impact Assessment Component (CAMIAC) 140 11.4 Architecture‐ Based Cyber System Optimization Framework 141 11.5 Conclusions 141 11.6 Questions 142 12 Appendix: Cyber M&S Supporting Data, Tools, and Techniques 143 12.1 Cyber Modeling Considerations 143 12.1.1 Factors to Consider for Cyber Modeling 143 12.1.2 Lessons Learned from Physical Security 144 12.1.3 Cyber Threat Data Providers 146 12.1.4 Critical Security Controls (CSCs) 147 12.1.5 Situational Awareness Measures 147 12.2 Cyber Training Systems 148 12.2.1 Scalable Network Defense Trainer (NDT) 153 12.2.2 SELEX ES NetComm Simulation Environment (NCSE) 153 12.2.3 Example Cyber Tool Companies 154 12.3 Cyber‐ Related Patents and Applications 154 12.4 Conclusions 160 Bibliography 161 Index 175

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the fundamental science of grinding and polishing by examining the chemical and mechanical interactions over many scale lengths Manufacturing next generation optics has been, and will continue to be, enablers for enhancing the performance of advanced laser, imaging, and spectroscopy systems. This book reexamines the age-old field of optical fabrication from a materials-science perspective, specifically the multiple, complex interactions between the workpiece (optic), slurry, and lap. It also describes novel characterization and fabrication techniques to improve and better understand the optical fabrication process, ultimately leading to higher quality optics with higher yield. Materials Science and Technology of Optical Fabrication is divided into two major parts. The first part describes the phenomena and corresponding process parameters affecting both the grinding and polishing processes during optical fabrication. It then relates them to the critical resulting properties oTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xvii Glossary of Symbols and Abbreviations xix Part I Fundamental Interactions – Materials Science 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Optical-Fabrication Processes 3 1.2 Major Characteristics of the Optical-Fabrication Process 7 1.3 Material Removal Mechanisms 11 References 12 2 Surface Figure 15 2.1 The Preston Equation 15 2.2 The Preston Coefficient 16 2.3 Friction at Interface 19 2.4 Kinematics and Relative Velocity 22 2.5 Pressure Distribution 25 2.5.1 Applied Pressure Distribution 26 2.5.2 Elastic Lap Response 27 2.5.3 Hydrodynamic Forces 28 2.5.4 Moment Forces 31 2.5.5 Viscoelastic and Viscoplastic Lap Properties 34 2.5.5.1 Viscoelastic Lap 34 2.5.5.2 Viscoplastic Lap 38 2.5.6 Workpiece–Lap Mismatch 38 2.5.6.1 Workpiece Shape 41 2.5.6.2 PadWear/Deformation 42 2.5.6.3 Workpiece Bending 44 2.5.6.4 Residual Grinding Stress 47 2.5.6.5 Temperature 51 2.5.6.6 Global Pad Properties 56 2.5.6.7 Slurry Spatial Distribution 58 2.5.6.8 Local Nonlinear Material Deposits 60 2.6 Deterministic Surface Figure 63 References 68 3 Surface Quality 75 3.1 Subsurface Mechanical Damage 75 3.1.1 Indentation Fracture Mechanics 76 3.1.1.1 Static Indentation 76 3.1.1.2 Edge Chipping and Bevels 81 3.1.1.3 Sliding Indentation 84 3.1.1.4 Impact Indentation Fracture 87 3.1.2 SSD During Grinding 92 3.1.2.1 Subsurface Mechanical Depth Distributions 92 3.1.2.2 Relationship of Roughness and Average Crack Length to the Maximum SSD Depth 97 3.1.2.3 Fraction of Abrasive Particles Mechanically Loaded 98 3.1.2.4 Relationship Between the Crack Length and Depth 100 3.1.2.5 SSD Depth-distribution Shape 102 3.1.2.6 Effect of Various Grinding Parameters on SSD Depth Distributions 104 3.1.2.7 Rogue Particles During Grinding 106 3.1.2.8 Conclusions on Grinding SSD 108 3.1.3 SSD During Polishing 109 3.1.4 Effect of Etching on SSD 118 3.1.4.1 Topographical Changes of SSD During Etching 120 3.1.4.2 Influence of SDD Distribution on Etch Rate and Roughness 123 3.1.5 Strategies to Minimize SSD 127 3.2 Debris Particles and Residue 129 3.2.1 Particles 130 3.2.2 Residue 132 3.2.3 Cleaning Strategies and Methods 134 3.3 The Beilby Layer 136 3.3.1 K Penetration by Two-step Diffusion 140 3.3.2 Ce Penetration by Chemical Reactivity 142 3.3.3 Chemical–Structural–Mechanical Model of the Beilby Layer and Polishing Process 145 References 148 4 Surface Roughness 157 4.1 Single-Particle Removal Function 157 4.2 Beilby Layer Properties 166 4.3 Slurry PSD 167 4.4 Pad Mechanical Properties and Topography 170 4.5 Slurry Interface Interactions 174 4.5.1 Slurry Islands and μ-roughness 174 4.5.2 Colloidal Stability of Particles in Slurry 180 4.5.3 Glass Reaction Product Buildup at Polishing Interface 184 4.5.4 Three-Body Forces at Polishing Interface 185 4.6 Slurry Redeposition 187 4.7 Predicting Roughness 192 4.7.1 EHMG – The Ensemble Hertzian Multi-gap Model 192 4.7.1.1 Pad Deflection and Fraction of Pad Area Making Contact 194 4.7.1.2 Asperity Stress, Interface Gap, Load/Particle Distribution, and Fraction of Active Particles 194 4.7.1.3 Single Particle Removal Function and Load per Particle Distribution 196 4.7.1.4 Monte Carlo Workpiece Roughness Simulation 196 4.7.2 IDG Island-distribution Gap Model 199 4.8 Strategies to Reduce Roughness 204 4.8.1 Strategy 1: Reduce or Narrow the Load-per-particle Distribution 204 4.8.2 Strategy 2: Modify the Removal Function of a Given Slurry 204 References 207 5 Material Removal Rate 211 5.1 Grinding Material Removal Rate 211 5.2 Polishing Material Removal Rate 217 5.2.1 Deviations from Macroscopic Preston Equation 217 5.2.2 Macroscopic Material Removal Trends from Microscopic/Molecular Phenomena 219 5.2.3 Factors Affecting Single-particle Removal Function 226 5.2.3.1 Nanoplastic Effects: Workpiece Hardness 226 5.2.3.2 Chemical Effects: Condensation Rate and Partial-charge Model 228 References 238 Part II Applications – Materials Technology 241 6 Increasing Yield: Scratch Forensics and Fractography 243 6.1 Fractography 101 243 6.2 Scratch Forensics 248 6.2.1 Scratch Width 249 6.2.2 Scratch Length 251 6.2.3 Scratch Type 251 6.2.4 Scratch Number Density 252 6.2.5 Scratch Orientation and Trailing-indent Curvature 252 6.2.6 Scratch Pattern and Curvature 252 6.2.7 Location on Workpiece 253 6.2.8 Scratch Forensics Example 254 6.3 Slow Crack Growth and Lifetime Predictions 254 6.4 Fracture Case Studies 257 6.4.1 Temperature-induced Fracture 257 6.4.1.1 Laser-Phosphate-glass Thermal Fracture 259 6.4.1.2 KDP Crystal-Workpiece Thermal Fracture 262 6.4.1.3 Thermal Fracture of Multilayers 265 6.4.2 Blunt Loading with Friction 267 6.4.3 Glass-to-metal Contact and Edge Chipping 269 6.4.4 Glue Chipping Fracture 271 6.4.5 Workpiece Failure from Differential Pressure 273 6.4.6 Chemical Interactions and Surface Cracking 276 6.4.6.1 Surface Cracking of Phosphate Glass 276 6.4.6.2 Surface Cracking of the DKDP Crystals 279 References 282 7 Novel Process and Characterization Techniques 285 7.1 Process Techniques 286 7.1.1 Stiff Versus Compliant Blocking 286 7.1.2 Strip Etch and Bulk Etch 290 7.1.3 Pad Wear Management with Septum or Conditioner 291 7.1.4 Hermetically Sealed, High-humidity Polishing Chamber 294 7.1.5 Engineered Filtration System 295 7.1.6 Slurry Chemical Stabilization 296 7.1.7 Slurry Lifetime and Slurry Recycling 300 7.1.8 Ultrasonic Pad Cleaning 301 7.2 Workpiece Characterization Techniques 304 7.2.1 Single-particle Removal Function Using Nanoscratching 304 7.2.2 Subsurface Damage Measurement Using a Taper Wedge 305 7.2.3 Stress Measurement Using the Twyman Effect 306 7.2.4 Beilby Layer Characterization Using SIMS 307 7.2.5 Surface Densification Using Indentation and Annealing 308 7.2.6 Crack Initiation and Growth Constants Using Static Indentation 309 7.3 Polishing- or Grinding-system Characterization Techniques 309 7.3.1 Tail End of Slurry PSD Using SPOS 309 7.3.2 Pad Topography Using Confocal Microscopy 311 7.3.3 Slurry Stability Using Zeta Potential 311 7.3.4 Temperature Distribution During Polishing Using IR Imaging 313 7.3.5 Slurry Spatial Distribution and Viscoelastic Lap Response Using a Nonrotating Workpiece 314 7.3.6 Slurry Reactivity Versus Distance Using Different Pad Grooves 315 References 316 8 Novel Polishing Methods 319 8.1 Magnetorheological Finishing (MRF) 319 8.2 Float Polishing 326 8.3 Ion Beam Figuring (IBF) 329 8.4 Convergent Polishing 331 8.5 Tumble Finishing 336 8.6 Other Subaperture Polishing Methods 344 References 347 9 Laser Damage Resistant Optics 353 9.1 Laser Damage Precursors 356 9.2 Reduction of SSD in Laser Optics 362 9.3 Advanced Mitigation Process 363 References 369 Index 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn excellent one-volume resource for understanding the most important current issues in the research and advances in materials science for environmental and energy technologies This proceedings volume contains a collection of 20 papers from the 2016 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''16) meeting held in Salt Lake City, UT, from October 24-27 of that year. These conference symposia provided a forum for scientists, engineers, and technologists to discuss and exchange state-of-the-art ideas, information, and technology on advanced methods and approaches for processing, synthesis, characterization, and applications of ceramics, glasses, and composites. Topics covered include: the 8th International Symposium on Green and Sustainable Technologies for Materials Manufacturing Processing; Materials Issues in Nuclear Waste Management in the 21st Century; Construction and Building Materials for a Better Environment; Materials for Nuclear Applications and Extreme EnvirTable of ContentsPreface ix GREEN AND SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Titania Nanosheet Production by an Inexpensive Green Process 3Cody Cannon and Allen W. Apblett Green Synthetic Method for Synthesis of Calcium Molybdate 15 Based on a Bimetallic ComplexAhmed Moneeb, Cory Perkins, Allen W. Apblett, Abdullah Al-Abdulrahman, and Abdulaziz Bagabas Controlling Factors Aiming for High Performance SiC 27 Polycrystalline FiberToshihiro Ishikawa and Ryutaro Usukawa Extrusion and Tape Casting Based Production of New 39 Lightweight Kiln Furniture with Non-Planar SurfaceUwe Scheithauer, Eric Schwarzer, Hans-Jürgen Richter, Tassilo Moritz, and Alexander Michaelis Development of Stoneware Body Formulation Suitable For 51 Fast FiringC. S. Prasad and L. K. Sharma Comparative Study on the Microstructure Evolution of Semicoke 5 9 and Lump Coal under High TemperatureRunsheng Xu, Wei Wang, Jianliang Zhang, Zhengliang Xue, Changgui Cheng, and Yun Zhou Carbon Structure in Blast Furnace Dusts Characterized by 69 Raman Spectroscope and Its Links with Combustion ReactivityDi Zhao, Jianliang Zhang, Guangwei Wang, Runsheng Xu, Haiyang Wang, and Jianbo Zhong CONSTRUCTION AND BUILDING MATERIALS FOR A BETTER ENVIRONMENT Portland Cement Paste Blended with Pulverized Coconut 79 FibersHenry A. Colorado and Alexandra Loaiza Mechanical Properties of Jute Fiber Reinforced Geopolymers 85Ana Carolina Constâncio Trindade, Himad Ahmed Alcamand, Paulo Henrique Ribeiro Borges, and Flávio de Andrade Silva Calcium Aluminate Cements Subject to High Temperature 97John F. Zapata, Maryory Gomez, and Henry A. Colorado Aggregate Optimization in Concrete using the Viterbo Method 107Edinson Murillo-Mosquera, Sergio Cifuentes, and Henry A. Colorado MATERIALS ISSUES IN NUCLEAR WASTE MANAGEMENT IN THE 21ST CENTURY Xtractite: An Inorganic Ion-Exchange Material for Sorption of 121 RadionuclidesAllen W. Apblett, Nicholas Materer, Cory Perkins, Evgueni Kadossov, Shoaib Shaikh, and Hayden Hamby Effect of Carbonate Concentration on the Dissolution Rates of 133 UO2 and Spent Fuel—A ReviewAkira Kitamura and Kuniaki Akahori Volumetrically-Stabilized Pyrochlore Waste form using 145 Co-DopingS. T. Locker, B. M. Clark, and S. K. Sundaram Integrated Research Program Overview on the “Innovative 151 Approaches to Marine Atmospheric Stress Corrosion Cracking Inspection, Evaluation and Modeling in Used-Fuel Dry Storage Canisters"Z. Shayer, Z. Yu, D. L. Olson, S. Liu, S. Gordon, X. Wu, K. L. Murty, N. Kumar, D. Kaoumi, B. Anderson, M. Remillieus, T. J. Ulrich, C. Bryan, D. Enos, J. D. Almer, J. R. Johns, and D. Lewis SCC Detection and Life Prediction for Nuclear Waste Management 165 using PGAA and NAAZeev Shayer and Jason Brookman Advances in Materials Science for Environmental and Energy Technologies MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR APPLICATIONS AND EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS Reducing Risks in Nuclear Power Plants Operation by using 181 FeCrAl Alloys as Fuel CladdingR. B. Rebak, K. A. Terrani, William Gassmann, John Williams, R. M. Fawcett, and R. E. Stachowski Annular Accident Tolerant Fuel with Discs and Rod Inserts 195Robert D. Mariani, Pavel Medvedev, and Douglas L. Porter NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, ENVIRONMENT, ELECTRONICS, AND INDUSTRY Nanocarbon-Infused Metals: A New Class of Covetic Materials for 207 Energy ApplicationsU. (Balu) Balachandran, B. Ma, S. E. Dorris, R. E. Koritala, and D. R. Forrest MATERIALS AND PROCESSES FOR CO2 CAPTURE, CONVERSION, AND SEQUESTRATION The Study of Catalysts Based on Intermetallic NiAl Alloys 221Karina Belokon and Yuriy Belokon

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn interdisciplinary guide to the newest solar cell technology for efficient renewable energy Rational Design of Solar Cells for Efficient Solar Energy Conversion explores the development of the most recent solar technology and materials used to manufacture solar cells in order to achieve higher solar energy conversion efficiency. The text offers an interdisciplinary approach and combines information on dye-sensitized solar cells, organic solar cells, polymer solar cells, perovskite solar cells, and quantum dot solar cells. The text contains contributions from noted experts in the fields of chemistry, physics, materials science, and engineering.The authors review the development of components such as photoanodes, sensitizers, electrolytes, and photocathodes for high performance dye-sensitized solar cells. In addition, the text puts the focus on the design of material assemblies to achieve higher solar energy conversion. This important resource: <Table of ContentsBiographies xiii List of Contributors xv Preface xix 1 Metal Nanoparticle Decorated ZnO Nanostructure Based Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cells 1Gregory Thien Soon How, Kandasamy Jothivenkatachalam, Alagarsamy Pandikumar, and Nay Ming Huang 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Metal Dressed ZnO Nanostructures as Photoanodes 3 1.2.1 Metal Dressed ZnO Nanoparticles as Photoanodes 4 1.2.2 Metal Dressed ZnO Nanorods as Photoanodes 6 1.2.3 Metal Dressed ZnO Nanoflowers as Photoanodes 8 1.2.4 Metal Dressed ZnO Nanowires as Photoanodes 8 1.2.5 Less Common Metal Dressed ZnO Nanostructures as Photoanodes 10 1.2.6 Comparison of the Performance of Metal Dressed ZnO Nanostructures in DSSCs 10 1.3 Conclusions and Outlook 11 References 13 2 Cosensitization Strategies for Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cells 15Gachumale Saritha, Sambandam Anandan, and Muthupandian Ashokkumar 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Cosensitization 18 2.2.1 Cosensitization of Metal Complexes with Organic Dyes 19 2.2.1.1 Phthalocyanine‐based Metal Complexes 19 2.2.1.2 Porphyrin‐based Metal Complexes 21 2.2.1.3 Ruthenium‐based Metal Complexes 27 2.2.2 Cosensitization of Organic–Organic Dyes 41 2.3 Conclusions 51 Acknowledgements 51 References 52 3 Natural Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cells – Strategies and Measures 61N. Prabavathy, R. Balasundaraprabhu, and Dhayalan Velauthapillai 3.1 Introduction 61 3.1.1 Mechanism of the Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cell Compared with the Z‐scheme of Photosynthesis 62 3.2 Components of Dye‐sensitized Solar Cell 63 3.2.1 Photoelectrode 63 3.2.2 Dye 64 3.2.3 Liquid Electrolyte 64 3.2.4 Counterelectrode 65 3.3 Fabrication of Natural DSSCs 65 3.3.1 Preparation of TiO2 Nanorods by the Hydrothermal Method 65 3.3.2 Characterization of the Photoelectrode for DSSCs 66 3.3.3 Preparation of Natural Dye 67 3.3.4 Sensitization 68 3.3.5 Arrangement of the DSSC 68 3.4 Efficiency and Stability Enhancement in Natural Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cells 68 3.4.1 Effect of Photocatalytic Activity of TiO2 Molecules on the Photostability of Natural Dyes 69 3.4.1.1 Important Points to be Considered for the Preparation of Photoelectrodes 70 3.4.2 Citric Acid – Best Solvent for Extracting Anthocyanins 70 3.4.3. Algal Buffer Layer to Improve Stability of Anthocyanins in DSSCs 72 3.4.3.1 Preparation of Buffer Layers – Sodium Alginate and Spirulina 73 3.4.4 Sodium‐doped Nanorods for Enhancing the Natural DSSC Performance 75 3.4.4.1 Preparing Sodium‐doped Nanorods as the Photoelectrode 75 3.4.5 Absorber Material for Liquid Electrolytes to Avoid Leakage 77 3.5 Other Strategies and Measures taken in DSSCs Using Natural Dyes 79 3.6 Conclusions 82 References 82 4 Advantages of Polymer Electrolytes for Dye‐Sensitized Solar Cells 85L.P. Teo and A.K. Arof 4.1 Why Solar Cells? 85 4.2 Structure and Working Principle of DSSCs with Gel Polymer Electrolytes (GPEs) 86 4.3 Gel Polymer Electrolytes (GPEs) 87 4.3.1 Chitosan (Ch) and Blends 88 4.3.2 Phthaloylchitosan (PhCh) and Blends 91 4.3.3 Poly(Vinyl Alcohol) (PVA) 98 4.3.4 Polyacrylonitrile (PAN) 105 4.3.5 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVdF) 109 4.4 Summary and Outlook 110 Acknowledgements 111 References 111 5 Advantages of Polymer Electrolytes Towards Dye‐sensitized Solar Cells 121Nagaraj Pavithra, Giovanni Landi, Andrea Sorrentino, and Sambandam Anandan 5.1 Introduction 121 5.1.1 Energy Demand 121 5.1.1.1 Generation of Solar Cells 122 5.1.2 Types of Electrolyte Used in Third Generation Solar Cells 124 5.1.2.1 Liquid Electrolytes (LEs) 124 5.1.2.2 Room Temperature Ionic Liquids (RTILs) 125 5.1.2.3 Solid State Hole Transport Materials (SS‐HTMs) 126 5.2 Polymer Electrolytes 127 5.2.1 Mechanism of Ion Transport in Polymer Electrolytes 128 5.2.2 Types of Polymer Electrolyte 129 5.2.2.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 129 5.2.2.2 Gel Polymer Electrolytes 129 5.2.2.3 Composite Polymer Electrolyte 130 5.3 Dye‐ sensitized Solar Cells 130 5.3.1 Components and Operational Principle 131 5.3.1.1 Substrate 133 5.3.1.2 Photoelectrode 134 5.3.1.3 Photosensitizer 135 5.3.1.4 Redox Electrolyte 137 5.3.1.5 Counter Electrode 140 5.3.2 Application of Polymer Electrolytes in DSSCs 140 5.3.2.1 Solid‐state Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (SS‐DSSCs) 140 5.3.2.2 Quasi‐solid‐state Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (QS‐DSSC) 142 5.3.2.3 Types of Additives in GPEs 144 5.3.3 Bifacial DSSCs 148 5.4 Quantum Dot Sensitized Solar Cells (QDSSC) 150 5.5 Perovskite‐ Sensitized Solar Cells (PSSC) 152 5.6 Conclusion 153 Acknowledgements 154 References 154 6 Rational Screening Strategies for Counter Electrode Nanocomposite Materials for Efficient Solar Energy Conversion 169Prabhakarn Arunachalam 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Principles of Next Generation Solar Cells 171 6.2.1 Dye‐sensitized Solar Cells 171 6.2.2 Principles of Quantum Dot Sensitized Solar Cells 173 6.2.3 Principles of Perovskite Solar Cells 174 6.3 Platinum‐ free Counterelectrode Materials 175 6.3.1 Carbon‐based Materials for Solar Energy Conversion 175 6.3.2 Metal Nitride and Carbide Materials 178 6.3.3 Metal Sulfide Materials 179 6.3.4 Composite Materials 182 6.3.5 Metal Oxide Materials 183 6.3.6 Polymer Counterelectrodes 184 6.4 Summary and Outlook 185 References 186 7 Design and Fabrication of Carbon‐based Nanostructured Counter Electrode Materials for Dye‐sensitized Solar Cells 193Jayaraman Theerthagiri, Raja Arumugam Senthil, and Jagannathan Madhavan 7.1 Photovoltaic Solar Cells – An Overview 193 7.1.1 First Generation Solar Cells 194 7.1.2 Second Generation Solar Cells 194 7.1.3 Third Generation Solar Cells 194 7.1.4 Fourth Generation Solar Cells 195 7.2 Dye‐ sensitized Solar Cells 195 7.2.1 Major Components of DSSCs 196 7.2.1.1 Transparent Conducting Glass Substrate 197 7.2.1.2 Photoelectrode 197 7.2.1.3 Dye Sensitizer 198 7.2.1.4 Redox Electrolytes 199 7.2.1.5 Counterelectrode 200 7.2.2 Working Mechanism of DSSCs 200 7.3 Carbon‐ based Nanostructured CE Materials for DSSCs 201 7.4 Conclusions 216 References 217 8 Highly Stable Inverted Organic Solar Cells Based on Novel Interfacial Layers 221Fang Jeng Lim and Ananthanarayanan Krishnamoorthy 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Research Areas in Organic Solar Cells 222 8.3 An Overview of Inverted Organic Solar Cells 224 8.3.1 Transport Layers in Inverted Organic Solar Cells 227 8.3.2 PEDOT:PSS Hole Transport Layer 227 8.3.3 Titanium Oxide Electron Transport Layer 229 8.4 Issues in Inverted Organic Solar Cells and Respective Solutions 232 8.4.1 Wettability Issue of PEDOT:PSS in Inverted Organic Solar Cells 233 8.4.2 Light‐soaking Issue of TiOx‐based Inverted Organic Solar Cells 234 8.5 Overcoming the Wettability Issue and Light‐soaking Issue in Inverted Organic Solar Cells 235 8.5.1 Fluorosurfactant‐modified PEDOT:PSS as Hole Transport Layer 235 8.5.2 Fluorinated Titanium Oxide as Electron Transport Layer 239 8.6 Conclusions and Outlook 245 Acknowledgements 246 References 246 9 Fabrication of Metal Top Electrode via Solution‐based Printing Technique for Efficient Inverted Organic Solar Cells 255Navaneethan Duraisamy, Kavitha Kandiah, Kyung‐Hyun Choi, Dhanaraj Gopi, Ramesh Rajendran, Pazhanivel Thangavelu, and Maadeswaran Palanisamy 9.1 Introduction 255 9.2 Organic Photovoltaic Cells 257 9.3 Working Principle 258 9.4 Device Architecture 260 9.4.1 Single Layer or Monolayer Device 260 9.4.2 Planar Heterojunction Device 261 9.4.3 Bulk Heterojunction Device 261 9.4.4 Ordered Bulk Heterojunction Device 261 9.4.5 Inverted Organic Solar Cells 262 9.5 Fabrication Process 263 9.5.1 Hybrid‐EHDA Technique 263 9.5.1.1 Flow Rate 265 9.5.1.2 Applied Potential 265 9.5.1.3 Pneumatic Pressure 265 9.5.1.4 Stand‐off Distance 265 9.5.1.5 Nozzle Diameter 266 9.5.1.6 Ink Properties 266 9.5.2 Mode of Atomization 267 9.5.2.1 Dripping Mode 267 9.5.2.2 Unstable Spray Mode 267 9.5.2.3 Stable Spray Mode 267 9.6 Fabrication of Inverted Organic Solar Cells 267 9.6.1 Deposition of Zinc Oxide (ZnO) on ITO Substrate 268 9.6.2 Deposition of P3HT:PCBM 268 9.6.3 Deposition of PEDOT:PSS 268 9.6.4 Deposition of Silver as a Top Electrode 269 9.7 Device Morphology 272 9.8 Device Performance 273 9.9 Conclusion 277 Acknowledgements 277 References 277 10 Polymer Solar Cells – An Energy Technology for the Future 283 Alagar Ramar and Fu‐Ming Wang 10.1 Introduction 283 10.2 Materials Developments for Bulk Heterojunction Solar Cells 284 10.2.1 Conjugated Polymer–Fullerene Solar Cells 284 10.2.2 Non‐Fullerene Polymer Solar Cells 289 10.2.3 All‐Polymer Solar Cells 290 10.3 Materials Developments for Molecular Heterojunction Solar Cells 291 10.3.1 Double‐cable Polymers 291 10.4 Developments in Device Structures 293 10.4.1 Tandem Solar Cells 295 10.4.2 Inverted Polymer Solar Cells 297 10.5 Conclusions 300 Acknowledgements 300 References 301 11 Rational Strategies for Large‐area Perovskite Solar Cells: Laboratory Scale to Industrial Technology 307Arunachalam Arulraj and Mohan Ramesh 11.1 Introduction 307 11.2 Perovskite 308 11.3 Perovskite Solar Cells 309 11.3.1 Architecture 310 11.3.1.1 Mesoporous PSCs 310 11.3.1.2 Planar PSCs 313 11.4 Device Processing 313 11.4.1 Solvent Engineering 313 11.4.2 Compositional Engineering 314 11.4.3 Interfacial Engineering 314 11.5 Enhancing the Stability of Devices 316 11.5.1 Deposition Techniques 317 11.5.1.1 Spin Coating 317 11.5.1.2 Blade Coating 319 11.5.1.3 Slot Die Coating 320 11.5.1.4 Screen Printing 321 11.5.1.5 Spray Coating 324 11.5.1.6 Laser Patterning 324 11.5.1.7 Roll‐to‐Roll Deposition 325 11.5.1.8 Other Large Area Deposition Techniques 326 11.6 Summary 329 Acknowledgement 329 References 329 12 Hot Electrons Role in Biomolecule‐based Quantum Dot Hybrid Solar Cells 339T. Pazhanivel, G. Bharathi, D. Nataraj, R. Ramesh, and D. Navaneethan 12.1 Introduction 339 12.2 Classifications of Solar Cells 341 12.2.1 Inorganic Solar Cells 342 12.2.2 Organic Solar Cells (OSCs) 343 12.2.3 Hybrid Solar Cells 344 12.3 Main Losses in Solar Cells 344 12.3.1 Recombination Loss 345 12.3.2 Contact Losses 345 12.4 Hot Electron Concept in Materials 346 12.5 Methodology 347 12.5.1 Hot Injection Method 348 12.5.1.1 Nucleation and Growth Stages 349 12.5.1.2 Merits of this Method 350 12.6 Material Synthesis 350 12.6.1 CdSe QD Preparation 350 12.6.2 QD–βC Hybrid Formation 351 12.7 Identification of Hot Electrons 351 12.7.1 Photoluminescence (PL) Spectrum 351 12.7.2 Time‐correlated Single Photon Counting (TCSPC) 355 12.7.3 Transient Absorption 357 12.8 Quantum Dot Sensitized Solar Cells 360 12.8.1 Working Principle 360 12.8.2 Device Preparation 361 12.8.2.1 Preparation of TiO2 Nanoparticle Electrode 361 12.8.2.2 QDs Deposition on TiO2 Nanoparticle 362 12.8.2.3 Counterelectrode and Assembly of QDSSC 362 12.8.3 Performance 362 12.9 Conclusion 363 References 363 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to orbital mechanics and spacecraft attitude dynamics Foundations of Space Dynamics offers an authoritative text that combines a comprehensive review of both orbital mechanics and dynamics. The author a noted expert in the field covers up-to-date topics including: orbital perturbations, Lambert''s transfer, formation flying, and gravity-gradient stabilization. The text provides an introduction to space dynamics in its entirety, including important analytical derivations and practical space flight examples. Written in an accessible and concise style, Foundations of Space Dynamics highlights analytical development and rigor, rather than numerical solutions via ready-made computer codes. To enhance learning, the book is filled with helpful tables, figures, exercises, and solved examples. This important book: Covers space dynamics with a systematic and comprehensive approach Is designed to bTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Space Flight 1 1.1.1 Atmosphere as Perturbing Environment 1 1.1.2 Gravity as the Governing Force 4 1.1.3 Topics in Space Dynamics 5 1.2 Reference Frames and Time Scales 5 1.2.1 Sidereal Frame 5 1.2.2 Celestial Frame 8 1.2.3 Synodic Frame 8 1.2.4 Julian Date 8 1.3 Classification of Space Missions 10 Exercises 10 References 11 2 Dynamics 13 2.1 Notation and Basics 13 2.2 Plane Kinematics 14 2.3 Newton’s Laws 16 2.4 Particle Dynamics 17 2.5 The n-Body Problem 20 2.6 Dynamics of a Body 24 2.7 Gravity Field of a Body 27 2.7.1 Legendre Polynomials 29 2.7.2 Spherical Coordinates 31 2.7.3 Axisymmetric Body 34 2.7.4 Spherical Body with Radially Symmetric Mass Distribution 37 Exercises 37 References 40 3 Keplerian Motion 41 3.1 The Two-Body Problem 41 3.2 Orbital Angular Momentum 43 3.3 Orbital Energy Integral 45 3.4 Orbital Eccentricity 46 3.5 Orbit Equation 49 3.5.1 Elliptic Orbit 53 3.5.2 Parabolic Orbit 56 3.5.3 Hyperbolic Orbit 56 3.5.4 Rectilinear Motion 58 3.6 Orbital Velocity and Flight Path Angle 60 3.7 Perifocal Frame and Lagrange’s Coefficients 63 Exercises 65 4 Time in Orbit 69 4.1 Position and Velocity in an Elliptic Orbit 70 4.2 Solution to Kepler’s Equation 75 4.2.1 Newton’s Method 76 4.2.2 Solution by Bessel Functions 78 4.3 Position and Velocity in a Hyperbolic Orbit 80 4.4 Position and Velocity in a Parabolic Orbit 84 4.5 Universal Variable for Keplerian Motion 86 Exercises 88 References 89 5 Orbital Plane 91 5.1 Rotation Matrix 91 5.2 Euler Axis and Principal Angle 94 5.3 Elementary Rotations and Euler Angles 97 5.4 Euler-Angle Representation of the Orbital Plane 101 5.4.1 Celestial Reference Frame 103 5.4.2 Local-Horizon Frame 104 5.4.3 Classical Euler Angles 106 5.5 Planet-Fixed Coordinate System 111 Exercises 114 6 Orbital Manoeuvres 117 6.1 Single-Impulse Orbital Manoeuvres 119 6.2 Multi-impulse Orbital Transfer 123 6.2.1 Hohmann Transfer 124 6.2.2 Rendezvous in Circular Orbit 127 6.2.3 Outer Bi-elliptic Transfer 130 6.3 Continuous Thrust Manoeuvres 133 6.3.1 Planar Manoeuvres 134 6.3.2 Constant Radial Acceleration from Circular Orbit 135 6.3.3 Constant Circumferential Acceleration from Circular Orbit 136 6.3.4 Constant Tangential Acceleration from Circular Orbit 139 Exercises 141 References 143 7 Relative Motion in Orbit 145 7.1 Hill-Clohessy-Wiltshire Equations 148 7.2 Linear State-Space Model 151 7.3 Impulsive Manoeuvres About a Circular Orbit 153 7.3.1 Orbital Rendezvous 153 7.4 Keplerian Relative Motion 155 Exercises 158 8 Lambert’s Problem 161 8.1 Two-Point Orbital Transfer 161 8.1.1 Transfer Triangle and Terminal Velocity Vectors 162 8.2 Elliptic Transfer 164 8.2.1 Locus of the Vacant Focii 165 8.2.2 Minimum-Energy and Minimum-Eccentricity Transfers 166 8.3 Lambert’s Theorem 168 8.3.1 Time in Elliptic Transfer 169 8.3.2 Time in Hyperbolic Transfer 173 8.3.3 Time in Parabolic Transfer 175 8.4 Solution to Lambert’s Problem 177 8.4.1 Parameter of Transfer Orbit 178 8.4.2 Stumpff Function Method 179 8.4.3 Hypergeometric Function Method 185 Exercises 188 References 190 9 Orbital Perturbations 191 9.1 Perturbing Acceleration 191 9.2 Osculating Orbit 192 9.3 Variation of Parameters 194 9.3.1 Lagrange Brackets 197 9.4 Lagrange Planetary Equations 199 9.5 Gauss Variational Model 209 9.6 Variation of Vectors 214 9.7 Mean Orbital Perturbation 219 9.8 Orbital Perturbation Due to Oblateness 220 9.8.1 Sun-Synchronous Orbits 225 9.8.2 Molniya Orbits 226 9.9 Effects of Atmospheric Drag 227 9.9.1 Life of a Satellite in a Low Circular Orbit 228 9.9.2 Effect on Orbital Angular Momentum 229 9.9.3 Effect on Orbital Eccentricity and Periapsis 231 9.10 Third-Body Perturbation 235 9.10.1 Lunar and Solar Perturbations on an Earth Satellite 238 9.10.2 Sphere of Influence and Conic Patching 243 9.11 Numerical Methods for Perturbed Keplerian Motion 246 9.11.1 Cowell’s Method 246 9.11.2 Encke’s Method 246 Exercises 250 References 254 10 Three-Body Problem 255 10.1 Equations of Motion 256 10.2 Particular Solutions by Lagrange 257 Equilibrium Solutions in a Rotating Frame 257 Conic Section Solutions 259 10.3 Circular Restricted Three-Body Problem 261 10.3.1 Equations of Motion in the Inertial Frame 261 10.4 Non-dimensional Equations in the Synodic Frame 263 10.5 Lagrangian Points and Stability 267 10.5.1 Stability Analysis 268 10.6 Orbital Energy and Jacobi’s Integral 270 10.6.1 Zero-Relative-Speed Contours 272 10.6.2 Tisserand’s Criterion 275 10.7 Canonical Formulation 276 10.8 Special Three-Body Trajectories 278 10.8.1 Perturbed Orbits About a Primary 279 10.8.2 Free-Return Trajectories 279 Exercises 282 Reference 283 11 Attitude Dynamics 285 11.1 Euler’s Equations of Attitude Kinetics 286 11.2 Attitude Kinematics 288 11.3 Rotational Kinetic Energy 290 11.4 Principal Axes 292 11.5 Torque-Free Rotation of Spacecraft 294 11.5.1 Stability of Rotational States 295 11.6 Precession and Nutation 298 11.7 Semi-Rigid Spacecraft 299 11.7.1 Dual-Spin Stability 301 11.8 Solution to Torque-Free Euler’s Equations 303 11.8.1 Axisymmetric Spacecraft 304 11.8.2 Jacobian Elliptic Functions 307 11.8.3 Runge-Kutta Solution 308 11.9 Gravity-Gradient Stabilization 312 Exercises 321 12 Attitude Manoeuvres 323 12.1 Impulsive Manoeuvres with Attitude Thrusters 323 12.1.1 Single-Axis Rotation 324 12.1.2 Rigid Axisymmetric Spin-Stabilized Spacecraft 326 12.1.3 Spin-Stabilized Asymmetric Spacecraft 330 12.2 Attitude Manoeuvres with Rotors 330 12.2.1 Reaction Wheel 332 12.2.2 Control-Moment Gyro 333 12.2.3 Variable-Speed Control-Moment Gyro 334 Exercises 335 References 337 A Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations 339 A.1 Fixed-Step Runge-Kutta Algorithms 339 A.2 Variable-Step Runge-Kutta Algorithms 340 A.3 Runge-Kutta-Nyström Algorithms 342 References 343 B Jacobian Elliptic Functions 345 Reference 346 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanotechnology has attracted attention of textile and polymer scientists and has been playing extraordinary role over the past few decades in the functional finishing of different textile materials. Nanoparticles due to their diverse functions have not only imparted flame retardant, UV-blocking, water repellent, self-cleaning, and antimicrobial properties to the textiles, but also have greater affinity for fabrics leading to an increase in durability of the functions. This book emphasizes recent approaches and strategies that are currently at operation to functionalize both natural and synthetic textile materials using diverse nanoparticles and their composites with polymers. The book concludes by paying attention towards removal of toxic chemicals using state-of-the-art nano-adsorbents. Main Topics 1. Textile dyeing using metallic nanoparticles2. Metal oxide nanoparticles for multifunctional finishing 3. New approaches to produce UV protective textiles4. Polymeric nanocomposites foTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Functional Finishing of Textiles via Nanomaterials 1Azadeh Bashari, Mina Shakeri, Anahita Rouhani Shirvan and Seyyed Abbas Noorian Najafabadi 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Antibacterial Textiles 2 1.2.1 Antibacterial Organic and Non-Organic Nanostructures 4 1.2.1.1 TiO2 Nanoparticles 4 1.2.1.2 Silver Nanoparticles 5 1.2.1.3 ZnO Nanoparticles 6 1.2.1.4 Chitosan 7 1.3 Anti-Odor Textiles 8 1.3.1 Odor-Control Methods 8 1.3.1.1 Absorption Mechanism 9 1.3.1.2 Prevention Mechanism 13 1.4 Deodorant Textiles 13 1.4.1 Aromatic Textiles with Nanocarriers 13 1.4.1.1 Polymeric Nanocarriers 14 1.4.1.2 Lipid Nanostructures 16 1.4.1.3 Cyclodextrins 18 1.4.1.4 Dendrimers 19 1.4.2 Application of Aroma Textiles 19 1.5 Protective Textile Against Electromagnetic Radiation 20 1.5.1 EM Waves 20 1.5.2 The Effect of EM Radiation on the Body 20 1.5.3 Shielding Materials Against the EM Waves 21 1.5.3.1 Conductive Polymer 22 1.5.3.2 Metal Nanocoating 23 1.5.3.3 Carbon Nanostructures 24 1.6 UV-Protective Textiles 25 1.6.1 The Necessity of Using UV-Protective Textiles 26 1.6.2 UV Protection Effect of Textile 26 1.6.2.1 UV-Protective Textiles with Nanomaterials 27 1.7 Water-Repellent Textiles 30 1.7.1 Are Water-Repellent and Waterproof Finishing the Same? 30 1.7.2 Plasma Treatment 31 1.7.3 Electrospinning 33 1.7.4 Pulsed Laser Deposition 34 1.7.5 Sol–Gel Technique 35 1.7.6 Dendrimer 36 1.7.7 Carbon Nanotube 38 1.8 Self-Cleaning Textiles 38 1.8.1 Self-Cleaning and Superhydrophobic Surfaces 39 1.8.1.1 Natural Superhydrophobic Surfaces 39 1.8.2 Superhydrophobic Finishing of the Textiles 40 1.8.3 Modification of Textiles Using Photoactive Coatings 41 1.9 Flame-Retardant Textiles 43 1.9.1 Flame-Retardant Finishing Agents 44 1.9.1.1 Flame-Retardant Nanostructures 45 1.10 Wrinkle-Resistant Fabrics 50 1.10.1 Nano-Structured Materials as Anti-Wrinkle Agents 51 1.10.1.1 Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles (TiO2) 52 1.10.1.2 Silver Nanoparticles 54 1.10.1.3 Silica Nanoparticles 54 1.10.1.4 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles 55 1.10.1.5 Carbon Nanotubes 56 1.10.1.6 Chitosan Nanoparticles 56 1.11 Future Trends and Challenges of Nano-Based Textiles 57 References 58 2 Antimicrobial Textiles Based on Metal and Metal Oxide Nano-particles 71Mangala Joshi and Anasuya Roy 2.1 Introduction 72 2.2 Antimicrobial NP Used in Functionalization of Textiles 75 2.2.1 Ag NP: Synthesis and Antimicrobial Activity 75 2.2.2 Titania NP: Synthesis and Antimicrobial Activity 76 2.2.3 Cu NP: Synthesis and Antimicrobial Activity 77 2.2.4 ZnO NP: Synthesis and Antimicrobial Activity 79 2.3 Application of NP onto Textile Substrates 80 2.3.1 Application of Ag NP on Textiles 80 2.3.2 Application of TiO2 NP on Textiles 88 2.3.3 Application of Cu NP and CuO NP on Textiles 89 2.3.4 Application of ZnO NP on Textiles 90 2.3.5 Application of other NP on Textiles 91 2.4 Mechanism of Action of Inorganic NP 91 2.4.1 Cell Membrane Leakage and/or Impairment 92 2.4.2 Oxidative Stress Generation through ROS 92 2.4.3 Protein Activity Interference and Genotoxicity 93 2.5 Nano-Toxicological Impact of NP on the Eco-System 94 2.6 Conclusion 96 Acknowledgment 97 References 97 3 Nano-Zinc Oxide: Prospects in the Textile Industry 113N. Vigneshwaran, V. Prasad, A. Arputharaj, A.K. Bharimalla and P.G. Patil 3.1 Introduction 114 3.2 Synthesis of Nano-ZnO 114 3.2.1 Chemical Methods 116 3.2.1.1 Sol–Gel Method 116 3.2.1.2 Chemical Precipitation Method 116 3.2.1.3 Hydrothermal Method 117 3.2.1.4 Microwave Method 117 3.2.1.5 Microemulsion Method 118 3.2.1.6 Sonochemical Method 118 3.2.1.7 Gas Phase Synthesis 118 3.2.2 Physical Method 119 3.2.3 Green Synthesis of Nano-ZnO 119 3.3 Application of Nano-ZnO onto Textiles 120 3.3.1 Sonochemical Method 120 3.3.2 Pad-Dry-Cure Method 120 3.3.3 In Situ Synthesis 121 3.3.4 Layer-by-Layer Assembly 122 3.3.5 Plasma Coating of Surfaces 123 3.4 Properties of Nano-ZnO-Finished Textiles 123 3.4.1 Antibacterial Activity 123 3.4.1.1 Generation of ROS 125 3.4.1.2 Release of Zinc Ions (Zn2+) 125 3.4.1.3 Abrasive Nature of Nano-ZnO 125 3.4.2 UV Protection 126 3.4.3 Self-Cleaning Property 127 3.4.4 Biosensing 129 3.4.5 Super Hydrophobicity 129 3.5 Conclusion 130 References 130 4 Application of Nanomaterials in the Remediation of Textile Effluents from Aqueous Solutions 135Mohammad Kashif Uddin and Ziaur Rehman 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Types of Dyes 138 4.3 Adsorption of Various Dyes on Nanomaterials 142 4.4 Conclusion 153 References 156 5 Chitosan–Graphene-Grafted Nanocomposite Materials for Wastewater Treatment 163Mohammad Shahadat, Ankita Jha, Parveen Fatimah Rupani, Asha Embrandiri, Shaikh Ziauddin Ahammad and S. Wazed Ali 5.1 Introduction 164 5.2 Chitosan–Graphene-Grafted Nanocomposite 165 5.3 Removal and Recovery of Environmental Pollutants 168 5.3.1 Removal of Heavy Metals 168 5.3.2 Treatment of Organic Pollutant 173 5.4 Conclusion 175 Acknowledgment 178 References 178 6 Decolorization of Textile Wastewater Using Composite Materials 187Sharf Ilahi Siddiqui, Rangnath Ravi, Geetanjali Rathi, Nusrat Tara, Shahid-ul-Islam and Saif Ali Chaudhry 6.1 Introduction 187 6.2 Classification of Dyes and Their Toxicity 189 6.3 Decolorization of Colored Water 191 6.4 Sorption Technology 193 6.5 Recent Development in Adsorption Technology 193 6.6 Removal of Dyes Using Composites 195 6.7 Adsorption Mechanism 207 6.8 Conclusion 210 Acknowledgements 211 References 211 7 Adsorption of Cr (VI) and Textile Dyes on to Mesoporous Silica, Titanate Nanotubes, and Layered Double Hydroxides 219Rashmi Acharya, Brundabana Naik and K. M. Parida 7.1 Introduction 220 7.2 Mesoporous Silica (m-SiO2) 223 7.2.1 Adsorption of Cr (VI) on to Mesoporous Silica 223 7.2.2 Adsorption of Dyes on to Mesoporous Silica 224 7.3 Titanate Nanotubes 234 7.3.1 Adsorption of Cr (VI) on to Titanate Nanotubes 239 7.3.2 Adsorption of Dyes on to Titanate Nanotubes 242 7.4 Layered Double Hydroxides 243 7.4.1 Adsorption of Cr (VI) on to Layered Double Hydroxides 244 7.4.2 Adsorption of Dyes on to Layered Double Hydroxides 247 7.5 Conclusion 252 Acknowledgment 253 References 253 8 Ultrasonic Synthesis of Zero Valent Iron Nanoparticles for the Efficient Discoloration of Aqueous Solutions Containing Methylene Blue Dye 261Mohammadreza Kamali, Isabel Capela and Maria Elisabete Costa 8.1 Introduction 262 8.2 Materials and Methods 265 8.2.1 Materials 265 8.2.2 Synthesis and Characterization of NMs 266 8.2.3 Discoloration of MB 267 8.3 Results and Discussion 267 8.3.1 Materials’ Characterization 267 8.3.2 Discoloration Studies 270 8.3.2.1 MB Discoloration under Acidic Conditions 270 8.3.2.2 MB Discoloration under Quasi-neutral Conditions 272 8.3.2.3 MB Discoloration under Basic Conditions 275 8.4 Conclusions 278 Acknowledgments 278 References 279 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn eight-volume set of handbooks on graphene research and applications This set features Volumes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the Handbook of Graphene. Each volume is dedicated to specific topics within the subject area, such as Physics, Chemistry, and Biology; Biomaterials; and Composites. The handbooks offer an overview of graphene research and its role in emerging applications. Graphene, a a valuable nanomaterial, is used in leading edge technological development, including sensing and biosensing. Topics covered in detail within the handbooks include: graphene composites; the synthesis and functionalization of graphene on various substrates; modeling methods in graphene research; and graphene-based materials for biological applications. Handbook of Graphene comprises 8 volumes:Set ISBN 978-1-119-45990-3 / 9781119459903 Volume 1: Growth, Synthesis, and FunctionalizationEdited by Edvige Celasco and Alexander Chaik

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith 16 chapters from world-renowned researchers, this book offers an extraordinary commentary on the burgeoning current research activity in contact angle and wettability The present volume constitutes Volume 3 in the ongoing series Advances in Contact Angle, Wettability and Adhesion which was conceived with the intent to provide periodic updates on the research activity and salient developments in the fascinating arena of contact angle, wettability and adhesion. The book is divided into four parts: Part 1: Contact Angle Measurement and Analysis; Part 2: Wettability Behavior; Part 3: Superhydrophobic Surfaces; Part 4: Wettability, Surface Free Energy and Adhesion. The topics covered include: procedure to measure and analyse contact angle/drop shape behaviors; contact angle measurement considering spreading, evaporation and reactive substrate; measurement of contact angle of a liquid on a substrate of the same liquid; evolution of axisymmetric droplet shaTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 Contact Angle Measurement and Analysis 1 1 A More Appropriate Procedure to Measure and Analyse Contact Angles/Drop Shape Behaviours 3M. Schmitt and F. Heib 1.1 Introduction 4 1.1.1 Brief Summary of the History of “Modern” Wetting 4 1.1.2 Vexing Question in Wettability 5 1.1.3 Background 6 1.1.3.1 Force Balance and Roughness 6 1.1.3.2 Selected Theoretical Aspects 8 1.1.3.3 Contact Angle Analysis and Hysteresis 11 1.2 Experimental 13 1.3 Obtaining “Continuous” Drop Shapes and Independent Contact Angles 14 1.3.1 HPDSA: Image Transformation 14 1.3.2 HPDSA: Contact Angle Determination 17 1.3.3 HPDSA: Triple Point Determination 20 1.3.4 HPDSA Software 21 1.3.4.1 Baseline Determination 21 1.3.4.2 Image Transformation 21 1.3.4.3 Fitting Procedure and Convergence 24 1.4 Different Contact Angles Analyses 25 1.4.1 Possible Static Analysis 25 1.4.2 Overall Contact Angle Analysis 25 1.4.2.1 Example: Inclined Plane 27 1.4.2.2 Example: Horizontal Plane with Immersed Needle 30 1.4.3 Statistical Event Analysis: Velocity and Statistical Event Definition 33 1.4.4 Statistical Event Analysis: Independent/Global Contact Angle Analysis 35 1.4.5 Statistical Event Analysis: Dependent/Individual Contact Angle Analysis 39 1.4.6 Statistical Event Analysis: Example Demonstration of Analysis Procedures 39 1.5 Summary/Outlook 44 1.5.1 Summary – Contact Angles Determination and Analyses 44 1.5.2 Outlook – Drop Shape Behaviour 46 Acknowledgements 48 Glossary of Symbols 48 Copyrights 52 References 52 2 Optical Contact Angle Measurement Considering Spreading, Evaporation and Reactive Substrate 59Md Farhad Ismail, Aleksey Baldygin, Thomas Willers and Prashant R. Waghmare 2.1 Introduction 60 2.2 Experimental Setup for Contact Angle Measurement 64 2.2.1 Ideal Drop Spreading 65 2.2.2 Role of Environmental Condition 66 2.2.3 Ideal Environmental (Saturated Vapor) Condition 69 2.2.4 Reactive System Condition 71 2.3 Summary 74 2.4 Supplementary Media Material 75 Acknowledgement 75 References 75 3 Method Development for Measuring Contact Angles of Perfluoropolyether Liquid on Fomblin HC/25® PFPE Film 81D. Rossi, S. Dall’Acqua, S. Rossi, M. Zancato, P. Pittia, E. Franceschinis, N. Realdon and A. Bettero 3.1 Introduction 82 3.2 Experimental 83 3.2.1 Method Used 84 3.2.2 Determination of Surface Free Energy (SFE) 86 3.2.3 Contact Angles Measurements of PFPE Drop on PFPE “Liquid Film” (PFPEd/PFPEf) 86 3.2.4 Statistical Analyses 86 3.3 Results and Discussion 87 3.3.1 Surface Free Energy (SFE) Characterization of PermaFoam 87 3.3.2 Surface Free Energy Characterization of PFPE “Liquid Film” 87 3.4 Summary 94 Acknowledgements 95 References 96 4 Characterizing the Physicochemical Processes at the Interface through Evolution of the Axisymmetric Droplet Shape Parameters 99Ludmila Boinovich and Alexandre Emelyanenko 4.1 Introduction 99 4.2 The Relationships between the Contact Angle and the Thermodynamic and Geometric Characteristics of the Surface 100 4.3 Experimental Methods for Determination of the Contact Angle and the Surface Tension for a Sessile Droplet on the Surface 106 4.4 Determination of the Wetting Tension and the Wetted Area Fraction on the Basis of Temporal Evolution of Contact Angle and Surface Tension in Sessile Drop Method 109 4.5 Testing the Mechanical Durability of Superhydrophobic Coatings 118 4.6 Summary 124 References 125 5 The Interfacial Modulus of a Solid Surface and the Young’s Equilibrium Contact Angle Using Line Energy 131Sakshi B. Yadav, Ratul Das, Semih Gulec, Jie Liu and Rafael Tadmor 5.1 Introduction 132 5.2 The Young Equation Obtained with a Three-Dimensional Description 134 5.3 Incorporating the Contact Line into the Young Equation 135 5.4 Finding the Young Thermodynamic Contact Angle from Advancing/Receding Data 136 5.5 Interfacial Modulus Gs Associated with the Solid Surface 138 5.6 Summary 141 References 141 Part 2 Wettability Behavior 145 6 Patterned Functionalization of Textiles Using UV-Based Techniques for Surface Modification – Patterned Wetting Behavior 147Thomas Bahners, Thomas Mayer-Gall, Wolfgang Molter-Siemens and Jochen S. Gutmann 6.1 Introduction 148 6.2 UV-Based Processes for Surface Modification 152 6.2.1 Modifying the Surface Chemistry by Photo-Grafting 152 6.2.2 Laser-Induced Roughening of Fiber Surfaces 153 6.3 Experimental 154 6.4 Results 155 6.4.1 Lateral Wetting Patterns 155 6.4.2 Selective Wetting on Inner and Outer Surfaces 158 6.5 Summary and Outlook 160 References 161 7 Wettability Behavior of Oleophilic and Oleophobic Nanorough Surfaces in Air or Immersed in Water 167Luisa Coriand, Nadja Felde and Angela Duparre 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 Sample Preparation 168 7.3 Characterization Methods 169 7.3.1 Roughness 169 7.3.2 Wetting 169 7.4 Surface Roughness of Al2O3 Coatings 170 7.5 Wetting Behavior of Al2O3 Coatings 173 7.5.1 Air as Fluid Phase 173 7.5.2 Water as Fluid Phase 173 7.6 Wetting Behavior of Al2O3 Coatings Overcoated with a Thin Top Layer 174 7.6.1 Air as Fluid Phase 174 7.6.2 Water as Fluid Phase 175 7.7 Summary 177 Acknowledgements 177 References 177 8 Effect of Particle Loading and Stability on the Wetting Behavior of Nanofluids 179A. Karthikeyan, S. Coulombe and A.M. Kietzig 8.1 Introduction 180 8.2 Review on Wetting Behavior and Stability of Nanofluids 181 8.3 Summary 186 References 188 9 Dielectrowetting for Digital Microfluidics 193Hongyao Geng and Sung Kwon Cho 9.1 Introduction 194 9.2 Electrowetting on Dielectric (EWOD) 196 9.3 Liquid-Dielectrophoresis (L-DEP) 198 9.4 L-DEP in Microfluidics 200 9.5 Dielectrowetting 203 9.6 Droplet Manipulations by Dielectrowetting 208 9.6.1 Experimental Setup 208 9.6.2 Droplet Splitting and Transporting 209 9.6.3 Multi-Splitting and Merging of Droplets 210 9.6.4 Droplet Creating 211 9.6.5 Manipulations of Aqueous Droplets 212 9.7 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 214 References 215 Part 3 Superhydrophobic Surfaces 219 10 Development of a Superhydrophobic/Superhydrophilic Hybrid Surface by Selective Micropatterning and Electron Beam Irradiation 221Keun Park and Hyun-Joong Lee 10.1 Introduction 222 10.2 Selective Micropatterning Using Ultrasonic Imprinting 224 10.2.1 Ultrasonic Imprinting for Micropattern Replication 224 10.2.2 Selective Ultrasonic Imprinting Using a Profiled Mask Film 225 10.2.3 Fabrication of a Micropatterned Mold 225 10.2.4 Selective Ultrasonic Imprinting for Development of Hydrophobic Micropatterns 227 10.3 Selective Wettability Control 229 10.3.1 Selective Surface Treatments 229 10.3.2 Surface Hydrophobization Using Selective Hydrophobic Silane Coating 230 10.3.3 Surface Hydrophilization Using Electron Beam Irradiation 232 10.4 Development of Hybrid Surfaces with Versatile Wettability 233 10.4.1 Investigation of Selectively Wettable Characteristics 233 10.4.2 Water Collection by the Developed Hybrid Surface 234 10.4.3 Hybrid Surface with a Combination of Three Surface Treatments 235 10.5 Summary 236 Acknowledgements 237 References 237 11 Hydrophobicity and Superhydrophobicity in Fouling Prevention in Sea Environment 241Michele Ferrari and Francesca Cirisano 11.1 Introduction 241 11.1.1 Marine Biofouling 243 11.1.1.1 Biofouling and Inorganic Fouling 244 11.1.1.2 Colonization 245 11.1.1.3 Inorganic Fouling 246 11.1.2 Surface Features and Bioadhesion 247 11.2 Antifouling Options 248 11.3 Problem Statement 251 11.4 Coatings with Special Wettability and Performance Against Biofouling 252 11.4.1 Silane-Based Coatings 253 11.4.1.1 Hydrophobic Behaviour 253 11.4.1.2 Superhydrophobic Behaviour 255 11.4.2 Other Materials 256 11.4.2.1 Hydrophobic Behaviour 256 11.4.2.2 Superhydrophobic Behaviour 257 11.5 General Discussion 258 11.6 Summary 260 References 260 12 Superhydrophobic Surfaces for Anti-Corrosion of Aluminum 267Junghoon Lee and Chang-Hwan Choi 12.1 Introduction 268 12.1.1 Corrosion of Metallic Materials 268 12.1.2 Surface Treatment for Anti-Corrosion of Metals 269 12.1.3 Anti-Corrosion of a Superhydrophobic Surface on Aluminum and Its Alloys 271 12.2 Fundamentals of Superhydrophobic Surface for Anti-Corrosion 273 12.2.1 Electrochemical Reactions 273 12.2.2 Wetting on Solid Surfaces 275 12.2.3 Superhydrophobic Surface for Anti-Corrosion 276 12.3 Applications of Superhydrophobized Aluminum Surfaces for Anti-corrosion 278 12.4 Summary 287 References 288 Part 4 Wettability, Surface Free Energy and Adhesion 299 13 Determination of the Surface Free Energy of Solid Surfaces: Statistical Considerations 301Frank M. Etzler 13.1 Introduction 302 13.1.1 Neumann’s Method 302 13.1.2 van Oss, Chaudhury and Good Approach 305 13.1.3 Chen and Chang Model 308 13.1.4 The Present Work 309 13.2 Data Analysis 310 13.2.1 Data by Kwok et al. 310 13.2.1.1 Lessons from Analysis of Data by Kwok et al. 315 13.2.2 Analysis of Data by Dalal 317 13.2.3 An Alternate Experimental Approach 325 13.3 Summary and Conclusions 326 References 328 14 Equilibrium Contact Angle and Determination of Apparent Surface Free Energy Using Hysteresis Approach on Rough Surfaces 331Konrad Terpiłowski, Diana Rymuszka, Olena Goncharuk and Lyudmyla Yakovenko 14.1 Introduction 332 14.2 Experimental 334 14.2.1 Sample Preparation 334 14.2.2 Contact Angle Measurements 335 14.2.3 Surface Free Energy Calculation 335 14.2.4 Surface Structure Characterisation 336 14.3 Results and Discussion 336 14.3.1 Contact Angles and Surface Free Energy of Sol-Gel Films 336 14.3.2 Surface Roughness and Structure of Sol-Gel Films 339 14.4 Conclusions 344 Acknowledgment 345 References 345 15 Contact Angle and Wettability Correlations for Bioadhesion to Reference Polymers, Metals, Ceramics and Tissues 349Digvijay Singh and Robert Baier 15.1 Introduction 350 15.2 Materials and Methods 351 15.2.1 Critical Surface Tension 355 15.2.2 Calculations of Bond Strength 356 15.3 Results 357 15.3.1 Tissue Testing 357 15.4 Discussion 358 15.4.1 Regression Analysis 358 15.4.1.1 Regression Analysis for Reference Materials (Without Pyrolytic Carbon and 316 LSS) 362 15.4.2 Remaining Concerns 364 15.4.2.1 The Peculiar Case of Pyrolytic Carbon 364 15.4.2.2 The Case of Ti Alloy and 316 LSS 367 15.5 Summary and Conclusions 367 15.5.1 Limitations 369 15.6 Future Scope 369 References 370 16 The Efficacy of Laser Material Processing for Enhancing Stem Cell Adhesion and Growth on Different Materials 373D.G. Waugh and J. Lawrence 16.1 Introduction 374 16.2 Surface Engineering Techniques in Stem Cell Technologies 376 16.2.1 Laser Surface Engineering 376 16.2.2 Plasma Surface Engineering 377 16.2.3 Lithography Techniques 377 16.2.4 Micro- and Nano-Printing 377 16.3 Laser Surface Engineering of Polymeric Materials 378 16.3.1 Experimental Technique 378 16.3.1.1 Materials 378 16.3.1.2 Laser Surface Engineering Techniques 378 16.3.1.3 Analytical Techniques 378 16.3.1.4 Biological Analysis Techniques 379 16.3.2 Effects of Laser Surface Engineering on Surface Topography 380 16.3.3 Effects of Laser Surface Engineering of Polymeric Materials on Stem Cell Adhesion and Growth 382 16.4 Laser Welding of NiTi Alloys 385 16.4.1 Experimental Technique 385 16.4.1.1 Material 385 16.4.1.2 Laser Micro-Welding Technique 385 16.4.1.3 Analytical and Biological Analysis Techniques 385 16.4.2 Surface Chemistry of Laser Micro-Welded NiTi Alloys 387 16.4.3 Effects of Laser Welding of NiTi Alloy on Stem Cell Adhesion and Growth 387 16.5 Summary and Future Considerations 390 References 392 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book addresses some essential topics in the science of energy converting devices emphasizing recent aspects of nano-derived materials in the application for the protection of the environment, storage, and energy conversion. The aim, therefore, is to provide the basic background knowledge. The electron transfer process and structure of the electric double layer and the interaction of species with surfaces and the interaction, reinforced by DFT theory for the current and incoming generation of fuel cell scientists to study the interaction of the catalytic centers with their supports. The chief focus of the chapters is on materials based on precious and non-precious centers for the hydrogen electrode, the oxygen electrode, energy storage, and in remediation applications, where the common issue is the rate-determining step in multi-electron charge transfer processes in electrocatalysis. These approaches are used in a large extent in science and technology, so that each chapter demoTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Physics, Chemistry and Surface Properties 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Electrochemical Interface 2 1.2.1 Conductivity and Electrical Field: Metal Versus Electrolyte 3 1.2.2 Magnitude of Double Layer Capacitance 6 1.3 Energy in Solids and Liquids: Junction Formation 9 1.4 Surface Reactivity of Low-Index Planes 14 1.5 Electron Charge-Transfer Reactions 18 1.5.1 Hydrogen Electrode vs. Oxygen Electrode 21 1.5.2 Organic-Fuels vs. Oxygen Electrode 22 1.6 The Effect of CN- Surface Coordination on Low-Index Pt Surface: ORR 26 References 29 2 Computational Chemistry for Electro-Catalysis 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Scope and Limitations of Different Models 39 2.2.1 Clusters 40 2.2.2 Slabs 49 2.2.3 Nanoparticles 59 2.3 Influence of the Support in Electrocatalysis 64 References 69 3 The Hydrogen Electrode Reaction 75 3.1 Introduction 75 3.2 Thermodynamics 77 3.3 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction-HER 78 3.3.1 HER on Platinum Catalytic Center 85 3.3.2 HER on Non-Noble Metal Catalyst Centers 90 3.4 Hydrogen Oxidation Reaction-HOR 100 3.4.1 HOR on Precious Metal Centers 108 3.4.2 HOR on Non-Precious Metal Centers 119 References 124 4 Oxygen Reduction/Evolution Reaction 143 4.1 Introduction 143 4.2 Electrolyzer Thermodynamics 146 4.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 148 4.3.1 ORR Pt-Based Nano-Structure Materials 157 4.3.2 Reaction Pathways 159 4.3.3 ORR on Au and Pd-Based Nano-Structure Materials 171 4.4 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 173 References 178 5 Electrochemical Energy Storage 187 5.1 Introduction 187 5.2 Basic Terminology in Batteries 188 5.3 Present Status of Electrochemical Batteries 195 5.3.1 Lead Acid Battery 196 5.3.2 Nickel-Cadmium Battery 197 5.3.3 Nickel-Metal Hydride Battery 198 5.4 Lithium Ion Battery 199 5.4.1 Insertion Electrode Materials 202 5.4.2 Conversion Reaction Electrodes 209 5.4.3 Alloy Electrodes 210 5.5 Post-Li Technologies 210 5.5.1 Na-Ion Batteries 210 5.5.2 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 212 5.5.3 Metal Air Batteries 215 5.5.3.1 Aqueous Metal Air Batteries 216 5.5.3.2 Non-Aqueous Metal Air Batteries 218 References 220 6 Electrocatalysis and Remediation 225 6.1 Introduction 225 6.2 NOx Reduction 228 6.3 COx Reduction and Methanol Oxidation 240 6.3.1 Methanol Oxidation 246 6.3.2 SOx Reduction 249 6.3.3 Oxidation of Emergent Pollutants 254 6.4 Determination of Nitrate-Based Compounds in DNA 257 References 262 Subject Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is designed for researchers and students interested in carbon dots applications in health care, especially as a theranostic agent. Carbon Dots as Theranostic Agents focuses on the fundamental understanding along with the applications of this unique fluorescent nano-biomachine. The book begins with the explanation that carbon dots fall between the usual daily macro or bulk physics and the quantum mechanics and covers their unique properties like quantum mechanics and quantum confinement. It then encompasses the domain of various physical, chemical and biological methods that efficiently synthesizes the carbon dots and their desired properties. The basic characterization techniques used for carbon dots is also covered in this book. Conjugation of carbon dots with different moieties is another aspect that enhances its applications, hence this is highlighted too. The book also details how to maneuver the carbon dots for their use in targeted drug delivery with emphasis on cancTable of ContentsPreface 1. Carbon Dots: Discovery, Synthesis and Characterization 1 1.1. Background 1 1.2. Introduction to QD 2 1.2.1. What is Quantum Mechanics? 4 1.2.2. Quantum Confinement 7 1.2.3. Discovery and History of Carbon Dots 8 1.3. Carbon QD and Graphene QD 9 1.4. Various Methods of Synthesis of Carbon Dots 10 1.4.1. Electrochemical Methods 11 1.4.2. Combustion and Thermal Oxidation Method 13 1.4.3. Hydrothermal Oxidation Method 15 1.4.4. Solvothermal Method 18 1.4.5. Laser Ablation of Graphite 18 1.4.6. Pulsed Laser Irradiation of Carbon Source 20 1.4.7. Arc Discharge Method 20 1.4.8. Plasma Treatment 21 1.4.9. Opening of Fullerene Cage 22 1.4.10. Ultrasonication Method 22 1.4.11. Microwave-Assisted Method 23 1.4.12. Chemical Methods 26 1.4.13. Supported Synthetic Procedure 26 1.4.14. Biogenic Method 28 1.5. Characterization of Carbon Dots 31 1.5.1. Microscopic Methods 32 1.5.1.1. SEM and TEM Characterization 32 1.5.1.2. AFM and STM Characterization 34 1.5.2. Spectroscopic Methods 35 1.5.2.1. UV-Vis Spectroscopy and its Application for Band Gap Determination 37 1.5.2.2. Fluorescence Spectrometry 37 1.5.2.3. Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopy 38 1.5.2.4. X-Ray Diffraction (XRD) Analysis 40 1.5.2.5. X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 41 1.5.2.6. Dynamic Light Scattering/Photon Correlation Spectroscopy (DLS/PCS) 41 1.5.2.7. Dual Polarization Interferometry (DPI) 42 1.5.2.8. Raman Spectroscopy 43 1.5.2.9. Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy 44 1.6. Summary 45 2. Properties of Carbon Dots 47 2.1. Introduction 47 2.2. Optical Properties 49 2.2.1. Absorbance 51 2.2.2. Photo-Induced Electron Transfer (PET) with CDs 52 2.2.3. Fluorescence/Photoluminescence (PL) 53 2.2.3.1. Multiphoton Excitation 60 2.2.3.2. Upconversion Photoluminescence 61 2.2.3.3. Lack of Blinking 63 2.2.3.4. Resistance to Photobleaching 64 2.2.4. Photocatalytic Property 65 2.3. Chemically Inert 67 2.4. Easy Functionalization 67 2.5. Water Solubility 68 2.6. Low Toxicity 68 2.7. Biocompatibility 69 2.8. Summary 70 3. Carbon Dots and Conjugates 71 3.1. Introduction 71 3.2. Why Conjugation of Carbon Dots? 74 3.3. Types of Carbon Dot Conjugates and Their Applications 76 3.3.1. Biogenic Compounds Conjugated with Carbon Dots 77 3.3.1.1. CDs Conjugated with Proteins/Peptides 78 3.3.1.2. CD Conjugates of Amino: Carboxylic Acid Ratio 80 3.3.1.3. CDs Conjugated with DNA 80 3.3.1.4. CDs Conjugated with RNase and SiRNA 84 3.3.1.5. CDs Conjugated with Lipid 86 3.3.1.6. CDs Conjugated with Folic Acid 86 3.3.1.7. CDs Conjugated with Chitosan 88 3.3.1.8. CDs Conjugated with Digitonin 89 3.3.2. Inorganic Heteroatoms Conjugated with CDs 90 3.3.2.1. CDs Conjugated with Gold Nanoparticles 91 3.3.2.2. CDs Conjugated with Silica 92 3.3.2.3. CDs Conjugated with ZnO 94 3.3.2.4. CDs Conjugated with CdS 95 3.3.2.5. CDs Conjugated with Strontium Oxide 96 3.3.2.6. CDs Conjugated with Gadolinium(III) 97 3.3.2.7. CDs Conjugated with Europium 97 3.3.2.8. CDs Conjugated/Doped with Nitrogen, Sulphur, Phosphorus and Boron 99 3.3.3. Carbon Dots Conjugated with Organic Material 100 3.3.3.1. PEG (Polyethylene Glycol) 101 3.3.3.2. CDs Conjugated with PEI (Polyethylenimin) or Polyaziridine 102 3.3.3.3. CDs Conjugated with α-Cyclodextrin 105 3.3.3.4. CDs Conjugated with Cysteamine 106 3.3.3.5. CDs Conjugated with Dihydrolipoic Acid 106 3.3.3.6. CDs Conjugated with Polyamidoamine (PAMAM) Dendrimers 107 3.3.3.7. CDs Covalently Conjugated with Rhodamine B Dyes 108 3.3.3.8. CDs Conjugated with Fe–Aminoclay (FeAC) 109 3.3.3.9. CDs Conjugated with MWCNT 109 3.3.4. CDs Conjugated with Antibiotics 110 3.3.4.1. CDs Conjugated with Ciprofloxacin 111 3.3.4.2. CDs Conjugated with Tetracycline 114 3.3.4.3. CDs Conjugated with Vancomycin 114 3.3.4.4. CDs Conjugated with Ampicillin 115 3.3.4.5. CDs Conjugated with Streptomycin 116 3.3.5. CDs Conjugated with Anti-Neurodegenerative Drugs for Delivery to Central Nervous System 118 3.3.5.1. CDs Conjugated with Haloperidol 119 3.3.5.2. CDs Conjugated with Transferrin 124 3.3.5.3. CDs Conjugated with Curcumin 125 3.3.6. CDs Conjugated with Anticancer Drugs 128 3.3.6.1. CDs Conjugated with Doxorubicin 128 3.3.6.2. CDs Conjugated with Cisplatin 130 3.4. Summary 132 4. CD as Drug Delivery Vehicle 133 4.1. Introduction 133 4.2. Considerations in Using CD as Drug Delivery Vehicle 136 4.3. Designs of CD-Based Drug Delivery System 137 4.3.1. Designing for Water-Insoluble Drugs 138 4.3.2. Designing for Targeting Tumor Location 138 4.3.3. Designing a Theranostic Nanomedicine 139 4.3.4. Designing a Photoresponsive Nzzano Drug Delivery System 139 4.3.5. Designing for Gene Delivery 140 4.3.6. Designing for Antibiotics Delivery 141 4.4. Carbon Dots for Delivery of Anti-Cancer Drug 142 4.4.1. A Brief Introduction to Cancer 143 4.4.2. Necessity of Drug Targeting in Cancer Therapy 144 4.4.3. Targeting Angiogenesis with CD 144 4.4.4. Various CD Conjugates for Delivering Anti-Cancer Drug 145 4.4.5. CD for pH-Dependent Drug Release 146 4.4.6. CD for Drug Delivery to Renal Cancer 147 4.4.7. CD for Drug Delivery to Lung Cancer 148 4.4.8. CD for Drug Delivery to Breast Cancer 149 4.5. CD for Drug Delivery to Neurodegenerative Disease 150 4.6. CD for Gene Therapy 151 4.7. CD to Monitor Delivery of SiRNA 152 4.8. Challenges in Using CD as Drug Delivery Vehicle 152 4.8.1. Prevention of Drug from Biological Degradation 153 4.8.2. Effective Targeting 154 4.8.3. Patient Compliance 155 4.8.4. Cost Effectiveness 155 4.9. Suitability of CD-Conjugated Drugs 156 4.9.1. For Oral Drug Delivery 156 4.9.2. By Inhalation 156 4.9.3. As Transdermal Drug Delivery 157 4.9.4. As Injection 157 4.10. Summary 157 5. Carbon Dots for Cell Imaging and Diagnostics 159 5.1. Introduction 159 5.2. Bioimaging 162 5.2.1. Bioimaging of Cancerous Cells 166 5.2.1.1. HeLa Cells 168 5.2.1.2. Human Breast Cancer MCF-7 Cells and Human Breast Tumor Cells MDA-MB-468 170 5.2.1.3. B16F11 and HEK293 Cells 171 5.2.1.4. Ehrlich Ascites Carcinoma (EAC) Cells 173 5.2.1.5. Human U87 Cell 173 5.2.1.6. MGC-803 Human Gastric Cancer Cells 174 5.2.1.7. A549 Adenocarcinomic Human Alveolar (Lung) Basal Epithelial Cells 175 5.2.1.8. Human Hepatocellular Carcinoma Cells 175 5.2.1.9. Kidney Proximal Tubule Cell Line(LLC-PK1) 176 5.2.1.10. C6 Glioma Cells 177 5.2.2. Bioimaging of Nucleus 178 5.2.3. Bioimaging of Virus 180 5.2.4. Bioimaging of Bacteria 181 5.2.5. Bioimaging of Drosophila melanogaster 183 5.3. CDs as Sensor 184 5.3.1. Intracellular Detection of Ions 185 5.3.1.1. Detection of Ag Ions 185 5.3.1.2. CD for Detection of Cu Ion 187 5.3.1.3. Detection of Fe3+ Ions 190 5.3.1.4. Detection of Hg2+ Ions 191 5.3.2. Detection of Small Molecules 192 5.3.2.1. Detection of Nitric Oxide 193 5.3.2.2. Detection of Phosphate 193 5.3.2.3. Detection of Reactive Oxygen Species 194 5.3.2.4. Detection of H2S 194 5.3.2.5. Detection of TNT 195 5.3.2.6. Detection of Hydroquinone 195 5.3.2.7. Detection of Surfactant 196 5.3.2.8. Detection of Humidity 197 5.3.3. Detection of Biological pH Value 198 5.3.4. Detection of Nucleic Acid 200 5.3.5. Detection of Vitamins 201 5.3.6. Detection of Protein and Enzymes 202 5.3.7. Detection of Glucose 202 5.3.8. Detection of Cancerous Cells 203 5.3.9. Detection of Dopamine Neurotransmitter 204 5.4. Concluding Remarks 206 6. Suitability of Carbon Dots as Payload for Plants 209 6.1. Introduction 209 6.2. Suitability of Carbon Dots as a Payload for Plant 211 6.2.1. Cytotoxicity of Carbon Dots 212 6.2.2. Carbon Dots and Plant Growth 213 6.2.2.1. Wheat 215 6.2.2.2. Green Beans 215 6.2.3. Is Cell Wall a Barrier for Carbon Dot Internalization? 216 6.2.4. Other Possible Routes for Entry of Carbon Dots 219 6.3. Carbon Dots and Plant Fertilizer 221 6.3.1. Nitrogen 222 6.3.2. Phosphorus 224 6.3.3. Potassium 225 6.3.4. Micronutrients 226 6.4. Need for Sensor to Detect 227 6.4.1. Plant Nutrient Status 228 6.4.2. Water 229 6.4.3. Pathological Status of Plant 231 6.4.4. Residual Pesticide, Herbicide or Insecticide in Plants 232 6.5. Carbon Dots and Foliar Application of Drugs on Plants 233 6.5.1. Cuticular Layer 233 6.5.2. Cell Wall 235 6.5.3. Plasma Membrane 235 6.6. Carbon Dots as Trojan Horse to Penetrate Foliar Surface for Therapeutic Molecule Delivery 236 6.6.1. CD for Delivery of Antibiotics to Plants 237 6.7. Concluding Remarks 240 References 241

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book will be about various aspects related to applications and use of knowledge of nanotechnology in promoting defense activities. The area in which scientists are focusing includes (i) nano-devices such as sensors, GPS & computers, chemical & biological weapons, nano-fabrics, bulletproof materials, nano-stealth coating, use of nanotechnology in various areas of aerospace. It is intended to cover available methodologies and understanding of technologies for these applications. Not only for destructive but also to improve medical and casualty, safety care for soldiers, and to produce lightweight, strong and multi-functional materials for use in body armour, both for protection and to provide enhanced connectivity will be covered.Table of ContentsPreface xv Foreword xvii 1 Nanotechnology’s Entry into the Defense Arena 1Madhuri Sharon 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 What is Nanotechnology 2 1.3 Nanotechnology Offers Innovative Opportunities for Defense 4 1.4 Nanotechnology for Soldiers 5 1.4.1 Smart Clothing Using Nanotechnology for Various Applications 5 1.4.2 Invisibility and Adaptive Camouflage 6 1.4.3 Armor Fabric 8 1.4.3.1 Artificial Muscles 9 1.4.3.2 Strong, Lightweight and Self-Repairing Material 9 1.4.3.3 Tungsten as Ultrastrong Material 9 1.4.3.4 Carbon Nanomaterials 9 1.4.3.5 Future Combat Suits 10 1.4.4 Faster Intensive Medical Help 11 1.4.4.1 Diagnostic Support Using Nanotechnology 11 1.4.4.2 Nano-Tourniquet 11 1.4.4.3 Antitoxin Guard 12 1.4.4.4 Lab-on-Chip 12 1.4.4.5 In-Situ Tissue Repair 12 1.4.4.6 Artificial Organs 13 1.4.5 Food and Safe Drinking Water 13 1.5 Increased Surveillance for Better Protection and Security 14 1.6 Smaller, More Effective and Cheaper Nanotechnology-Based Weapons 15 1.7 Nanotechnology in Aeronautics for Lighter and Faster Aircraft 17 1.7.1 Exfoliated Nanocomposites 18 1.7.2 Single-Wall Carbon Nanotubes (SWCNT), Double-Wall Carbon Nanotubes (DWCNT) and Multi-Wall Carbon Nanotubes (MWCNT) 18 1.7.3 Nanoplatelets and Nanofibers of Graphite/Graphene 18 1.7.4 Electrospun Nanofibers 19 1.8 Nanotechnology for Stealth Warships and Submarines for Ocean Exploration 20 1.8.1 Microwave Absorber for Stealth Technology 20 1.8.2 Invisible Stealth Ships, Planes and Vehicles 21 1.8.3 Radar Absorbing Material: Carbon Nanotubes (CNT) 22 1.8.4 Radar Absorbing Material: Ionic Liquids 23 1.9 Nanotechnology for Vehicles 23 1.9.1 Vehicles with Scratch Resistant Surfaces 24 1.10 Nanotechnology for Satellites 24 1.11 Nanomaterials for Portable Energy/Power 25 1.11.1 Portable Fuel Cells (FC) 25 1.11.2 Rechargeable Lithium (Li) Batteries 26 1.11.3 Supercapacitor 27 1.11.4 Solar Cells 27 1.12 Nanosensors 28 1.12.1 Chemical Nanosensors 29 1.12.2 Mechanical Nanosensors 29 1.12.3 Magnetic Nanosensors 30 1.12.4 Radiation Nanosensors 30 1.12.5 Portable Miniature X-Ray Nanosensors 30 1.12.6 Surface-Enhanced Raman Spectroscopy (SERS) Nanosensors 31 1.12.7 Smart Dust Sensors 31 1.13 Nanotechnology for Logistics 31 1.13.1 Smaller, Faster Nano-Cameras 32 1.14 Conclusions 33 References 34 2 Stealth, Counter Stealth and Nanotechnology 37Madhuri Sharon 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Radar – An Incentive for Developing Stealth 38 2.2.1 Principle of Radar 38 2.2.2 How Radar Functions 39 2.3 What is Stealth and Why Was It Developed? 40 2.4 Considerations and Efforts for Designing Stealth Aircraft 43 2.4.1 Camouflaging 43 2.4.2 Plasma Active Stealth 44 2.4.3 Inactivating Radar Signal or Making Planes Less Visible 45 2.4.3.1 Radar Absorbing Material (RAM) 46 2.4.3.2 What are Microwaves? 47 2.4.3.3 How are Microwaves Absorbed? 48 2.4.3.4 Microwave Transmitting Structures 51 2.4.3.5 Types of Microwave Absorbers 52 2.5 Radar Cross Section (RCS) 58 2.6 Shaping of Stealth or Improved Aerodynamics by Reducing RCS 59 2.7 Reducing the IR Signature 60 2.8 Muffling Aircraft Noise 61 2.9 What is Counter Stealth and Why is it Used? 61 2.9.1 LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) 62 2.9.2 Multi-Band 3D Radar 62 2.9.3 Quantum Radar 63 2.10 Nanotechnology for Improved Stealth Performance 63 2.10.1 Nanomaterials as RAM or Microwave Absorber 64 2.10.1.1 Nanoferrite Absorber 65 2.10.1.2 Nano-Carbon and Carbon Nanotube (CNT) Composites as Absorbers 68 2.10.2 Nanomaterials in Airframe Structure 72 2.10.2.1 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) Conjugated with Polymers 74 2.10.2.2 Nanoclay Reinforced Polymer Composites 78 2.10.2.3 Metal Nanoparticle Incorporated Composites 78 2.10.3 Nano-Metal Coatings for Aero-Engine Parts 79 2.10.4 Nanomaterials for Electro-Communication Component of Aircraft 80 2.10.4.1 Nanoparticles for Data Storage Media 80 2.10.4.2 Nanoparticles for Supercapacitors 82 2.10.4.3 MEMS and NEMS for Fuel Management 83 2.10.4.4 Other Applications of Nanotechnology in Supporting Advanced Stealth Systems 84 2.11 Conclusions 84 References 85 3 Nanocomputers in Aid of Defense 89Angelica Sylvestris Lopez Rodriguez 3.1 Introduction 89 3.1.1 Classification of Nanocomputers 90 3.1.1.1 Electronic Nanocomputers 90 3.1.1.2 Mechanical Nanocomputers 91 3.1.1.3 Chemical and Biochemical Nanocomputers 91 3.1.1.4 Quantum Nanocomputers 92 3.1.1.5 DNA Nanocomputers 93 3.2 History of Nanocomputers 93 3.3 The Nanocomputers 97 3.3.1 Nanotechnology and Quantum Computers 98 3.3.2 Recent Advances in Nanocomputers 99 3.4 Applications of Nanocomputers in the Military 100 3.5 More Powerful Computers to Come 103 3.6 Summary 105 References 105 4 Nanotechnology-Aided Armor 109Pio Sifullentes Gallardo 4.1 Historical Background of Armor 109 4.2 Nanomaterial-Aided Armor 111 4.2.1 Polymers 111 4.2.1.1 Polymerization Reaction 112 4.2.2 Carbon Nanoforms 118 4.2.2.1 Synthesis of Carbon Nanotubes (CNT) 119 4.2.2.2 Functionalization of CNT 121 4.2.3 Nanocomposites 122 4.2.3.1 Processes for Preparing Nanocomposites for Armor 125 4.2.4 Armor of Smart Nanomaterials 128 4.2.4.1 Memory Materials 129 4.3 Summary 131 References 131 5 Nanotechnology and Weapons 133Chetna Sharon 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Considerations for Developing Nano High Energy Materials (HEMs) for Weapons 134 5.2.1 Propellants 135 5.2.2 Explosives 137 5.2.3 Pyrotechnics 139 5.3 Requirements for Nanoparticles Used in Nanoweapons 142 5.4 Synthesis of Nanomaterials for Weapons 143 5.5 Characterization of Nanomaterials Used in Weapons 146 5.6 Nanomaterials for Use in Nanoweapons and Ammunition 147 5.6.1 Super Penetrating Materials 147 5.6.2 Nanocrystalline Tungsten 148 5.6.3 Liquid Metal 148 5.6.4 High Energy Laser Weapons 148 5.7 Nanoweapons 149 5.7.1 Types of Nanoweapons 150 5.7.1.1 Molecularly Assembled Nanoweapons 151 5.7.1.2 Mini-Nukes and Mosquito-Like Robot Weapons 152 5.7.1.3 Invisible Nano-Needle Bullets 153 5.7.1.4 Non-Nuclear Bomb 153 5.7.1.5 Nanoweapons to Replace or Improvise Current Nuclear Weapons 154 5.7.1.6 New Nano Spies – Nano-Sized Fighter Jets 155 5.7.1.7 CornerShot 155 5.7.1.8 Laser-Guided Weapons 156 5.7.1.9 Bullet Camera (TNO Concept) 157 5.7.1.10 Landmines and Improvised Explosive Devices 157 5.8 Defensive Measures to Combat Nanoweapons 158 5.9 Risks Posed by Nanoweapons 159 5.10 Need for Preventive Anti-Nanoweapon and Anti-Ecophagic Policies 160 5.11 Summary 160 References 161 6 Nanotechnology to Aid Biological and Chemical Warfare Defense 165Madhuri Sharon 6.1 Introduction 165 6.2 What is Biological Warfare? 166 6.2.1 Types of Biological Warfare 170 6.2.1.1 Bacteria 170 6.2.1.2 Fungus 185 6.2.1.3 Virus 188 6.2.1.4 Insects 198 6.2.1.5 Biogenic Toxins 202 6.3 Chemical Warfare 209 6.3.1 Types of Chemical Weapons 210 6.3.1.1 Nerve Agents 210 6.3.1.2 Blister Agents 211 6.3.1.3 Choking Agents 212 6.3.1.4 Blood Agents 212 6.3.1.5 Riot Control Agents 213 6.4 How Nanotechnology Can Protect from Biological and Chemical Warfare 214 6.4.1 Nanosensors that Aid Biological and Chemical Warfare 214 6.4.1.1 Blue Crab Nanosensors 215 6.4.1.2 Nanowire Biosensors 215 6.4.1.3 Intracellular Biosensors 216 6.4.1.4 Biosensors 216 6.4.1.5 Nanosensor as Nano-Nose 217 6.4.2 Nanotechnology and Protective Clothing for Defense Personnel 217 6.4.2.1 Nanofabrics and On-Time Detection and Treatment 218 6.4.3 Nanorobotics and Other Futuristic Nano-Applications 224 6.5 Disadvantages of Nanotechnology 224 6.6 Summary 225 References 225 7 Smart Nanofabrics for Defense 235Madhuri Sharon 7.1 Introduction 236 7.2 A Brief History of Smart Skin Material 238 7.3 Types of Smart Textiles 237 7.3.1 Passive Smart Textiles 238 7.3.2 Active Smart Textiles 238 7.3.3 Ultra Small Textiles 238 7.4 Fabrication of Smart Textiles 239 7.4.1 Metal Fibers 240 7.4.2 Conducting Inks 240 7.4.3 Inherently Conductive Polymers (ICP) 241 7.4.3.1 Polypyrrole (PPy) 242 7.4.3.2 Polyacetylene or Polyethylene or Polythene (PE) 242 7.4.3.3 Polyaniline (PANi) 242 7.4.3.4 Polythiophene and Its Derivatives 243 7.4.4 Electrically Conductive Polymers (ECP) 243 7.4.5 Optical Fibers 244 7.4.6 Shape Memory Material (SMM) 245 7.4.7 Chromic Material 246 7.4.7.1 Thermochromism 247 7.4.7.2 Photochromism 247 7.4.7.3 Electrochromism 247 7.4.7.4 Piezochromism 248 7.4.7.5 Solvation Chromism 249 7.4.8 Phase Change Materials (PCM) 249 7.5 Nanoparticle Coated Textiles 249 7.5.1 Antimicrobial Fabrics 250 7.5.2 Water Repellant (Hydrophobic Fabric), Stain Repellant and Spill Resistant Fabrics 250 7.5.3 Self-Cleaning Fabrics 252 7.5.4 UV Radiation Protection 253 7.5.5 Static Resistant or Anti-Static Fabric 254 7.6 Applications of Nanoparticle Coated Smart Textiles 254 7.6.1 Healthcare Fabrics 255 7.6.2 Self-Powered Smart Textiles 256 7.6.3 CNT-Based Smart Fabrics 259 7.6.3.1 CNT and Metallic Antennas for Smart Textiles 260 7.6.3.2 Cotton Coated with MWCNT for Energy Storage 261 7.6.3.3 CNT Braided Fabric for Monitoring Composites 261 7.6.3.4 CNT-Based Smart Electronic Textile 262 7.7 Sensors for Smart Textiles 263 7.7.1 Temperature Sensor 264 7.7.2 Humidity Sensitive Textiles 265 7.7.3 Capacitive Pressure Sensors 266 7.7.4 Resistive Pressure Sensors 266 7.7.5 Optical Textile Sensors 267 7.8 Actuators for Smart Textile 267 7.9 Summary 269 References 269 8 Nanomaterial for Adaptive Camouflage and Structure 275Angelica Sylvestris Lopez Rodriguez 8.1 Introduction 275 8.2 Camouflage 277 8.3 Camouflage for the Military 279 8.4 Types of Camouflage 280 8.4.1 Woodland Camouflage 280 8.4.2 Desert Camouflage 280 8.4.3 Desert Camouflage of Three Colors 280 8.4.4 Digital Army Combat Uniform (ACU) Camouflage 281 8.4.5 Tiger Stripe Camouflage 281 8.4.6 City or Urban Camouflage 282 8.5 Active or Adaptive Camouflage 282 8.6 Nanomaterials for Advanced Camouflaging 288 8.6.1 Some Possibilities in the Near Future 285 8.7 Summary 286 References 286 9 Applications of Nanotechnology in Aerospace 289Madhuri Sharon 9.1 Introduction 289 9.2 Use of Nanomaterials in Different Areas of Aviation 291 9.2.1 Airframe Structure 291 9.2.1.1 Commonly Used Aluminum Alloys in Heavier Parts of the Aircraft 292 9.2.1.2 Commonly Used Aluminum Alloys in Other Parts of the Aircraft 294 9.2.1.3 Aluminum Oxide Nanoparticles 294 9.2.1.4 Nanomaterials for Airframe Structures 295 9.2.2 Nanocoating 296 9.2.3 Aero Engine Parts 300 9.2.4 Aircraft Electrocommunication System 300 9.2.5 Radar Technology for Detecting Landmines 304 9.3 Possible Uses of Graphene in Aerospace 304 9.4 Stealth Technology 306 9.5 Summary 306 References 307 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisA solid introduction to the field of surfactant science, this new edition provides updated information about surfactant uses, structures, and preparation, as well as seven new chapters expanding on technology applications. Offers a comprehensive introduction and reference of the science and technology of surface active materials Elaborates, more fully than prior editions, aspects of surfactant crystal structure as well as their effects on applications Adds more information on new classes and applications of natural surfactants in light of environmental consequences of surfactant use Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 An Overview of Surfactant Science and Technology 1 1.1 A Brief History of Surfactant Science and Technology 3 1.2 Surfactants in the Modern World 5 1.3 The Economics of Surfactant Science and Technology 8 1.4 The Near-Term Economic and Technological Future for Surfactants 10 1.5 Surfactantsin the Environment 11 1.6 A Surfactant Glossary 13 2 The Classification of Surfactants 17 2.1 The Basic Structure of Amphiphilic Molecules 17 2.2 A Systematic Classification of Surfactants 19 2.2.1 Surfactant Solubilizing Groups 19 2.2.2 Making a Choice 21 2.3 The Generic Anatomy of Surfactants 21 2.3.1 The Many Faces of Dodecane 22 2.3.2 Surfactant Solubilizing Groups 25 2.3.3 Common Surfactant Hydrophobic Groups 26 2.3.3.1 The Natural Fatty Acids 27 2.3.3.2 Saturated Hydrocarbons or Paraffins 28 2.3.3.3 Olefins 28 2.3.3.4 Alkyl Benzenes 29 2.3.3.5 Alcohols 29 2.3.3.6 Alkyl Phenols 30 2.3.3.7 Polyoxypropylenes 30 2.3.3.8 Fluorocarbons 31 2.3.3.9 Silicone Surfactants 32 2.3.3.10 Miscellaneous Biological Structures 32 2.4 The Systematic Classification of Surfactants 33 2.5 Anionic Surfactants 34 2.5.1 Sulfate Esters 35 2.5.1.1 Fatty Alcohol Sulfates 36 2.5.1.2 Sulfated Fatty Acid Condensation Products 36 2.5.1.3 Sulfated Ethers 37 2.5.1.4 Sulfated Fats and Oils 38 2.5.2 Sulfonic Acid Salts 39 2.5.2.1 Aliphatic Sulfonates 39 2.5.2.2 Alkyl Aryl Sulfonates 40 2.5.2.3 α-Sulfocarboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives 42 2.5.2.4 Miscellaneous Sulfo-Ester and Amide Surfactants 43 2.5.2.5 Alkyl Glyceryl Ether Sulfonates 46 2.5.2.6 Lignin Sulfonates 46 2.5.3 Carboxylate Soaps and Detergents 46 2.5.4 Phosphoric Acid Esters and Related Surfactants 48 2.6 Cationic Surfactants 49 2.7 Nonionic Surfactants 51 2.7.1 Polyoxyethylene-Based Surfactants 51 2.7.2 Derivatives of Polyglycerols and Other Polyols 52 2.7.3 Block Copolymer Nonionic Surfactants 54 2.7.4 Miscellaneous Nonionic Surfactants 54 2.8 Amphoteric Surfactants 55 2.8.1 Imidazoline Derivatives 56 2.8.2 Surface-Active Betaines and Sulfobetaines 57 2.8.3 Phosphatides and Related Amphoteric Surfactants 58 3 Surfactant Chemical Structures: Putting the Pieces Together 61 3.1 Surfactant Building Blocks 61 3.2 A Surfactant Family Tree 63 3.2.1 The Many Faces of Dodecane 63 3.3 Common Surfactant Hydrophobic Groups 66 3.3.1 The Natural Fatty Acids 67 3.3.2 Paraffins or Saturated Hydrocarbons 67 3.3.3 Olefins 67 3.3.4 Alkylbenzenes 68 3.3.5 Alcohols 69 3.3.6 Alkylphenols 70 3.3.7 Polyoxypropylene 70 3.3.8 Fluorocarbons 70 3.3.9 Silicone-Based Surfactants 72 3.3.10 Nonchemically Produced, a.k.a. “Natural” Surfactants 74 4 Natural Surfactants and Biosurfactants 75 4.1 What Makes a Surfactant “Natural”? 76 4.2 Surfactants Based on a Natural Sugar-Based Polar Head Groups 78 4.3 Biosurfactants 80 4.3.1 Biosurfactants as Nature Makes Them 80 4.3.2 Properties of Biosurfactants 81 4.3.3 Biosurfactant Classification 83 4.3.4 Some Aspects of Biosurfactant Production 84 4.3.5 Some Factors Affecting Biosurfactant Production 85 4.4 Biosurfactant Applications 87 4.5 Potential Limitations on the Commercial Use of Biosurfactants 90 4.6 Some Opportunities for Future Research and Development 90 4.7 Some Observations About the Future of Biosurfactants 90 5 Fluid Surfaces and Interfaces 93 5.1 Molecules at Interfaces 95 5.2 Interfaces and Adsorption Phenomena 97 5.2.1 A Thermodynamic Picture of Adsorption 97 5.2.2 Surface and Interfacial Tensions 99 5.2.3 The Effect of Surface Curvature 101 5.2.4 The Surface Tension of Solutions 102 5.2.5 Surfactants and the Reduction of Surface Tension 103 5.2.6 Efficiency, Effectiveness, and Surfactant Structure 105 6 Surfactants in Solution: Self-Assembly and Micelle Formation 115 6.1 Surfactant Solubility 116 6.2 The Phase Spectrum of Surfactants in Solution 119 6.3 The History and Development of Micellar Theory 123 6.3.1 Manifestations of Micelle Formations 124 6.3.2 Thermodynamics of Dilute Surfactant Solutions 127 6.3.3 Classical Theories of Micelle Formation 128 6.3.4 Free Energy of Micellization 129 6.4 Molecular Geometry and the Formation of Association Colloids 130 6.5 Experimental Observations of Micellar Systems 133 6.5.1 Micellar Aggregation Numbers 133 6.5.2 The Critical Micelle Concentration 135 6.5.3 The Hydrophobic Group 135 6.5.4 The Hydrophilic Group 143 6.5.5 Counterion Effects on Micellization 145 6.5.6 The Effects of Additives on the Micellization Process 146 6.5.6.1 Electrolyte Effects on Micelle Formation 147 6.5.6.2 The Effect of pH 148 6.5.6.3 The Effects of Added Organic Materials 149 6.5.7 The Effect of Temperature on Micellization 151 6.6 Micelle Formation in Mixed Surfactant Systems 153 6.7 Micelle Formation in Nonaqueous Media 154 6.7.1 Aggregation in Polar Organic Solvents 155 6.7.2 Micelles in Nonpolar Solvents 155 7 Beyond Micelles: Higher Level Self-Assembled Aggregate Structures 161 7.1 The Importance of Surfactant Phase Information 161 7.2 Amphiphilic Fluids 163 7.2.1 Liquid Crystalline, Bicontinuous, and Microemulsion Structures 163 7.2.2 “Classical” Liquid Crystals 165 7.2.3 Liquid Crystalline Phases in Simple Binary Systems 166 7.3 Temperature and Additive Effects on Phase Behavior 170 7.4 Some Current Theoretical Analyses of Novel Mesophases 171 7.5 Vesicles and Bilayer Membranes 171 7.5.1 Vesicles 173 7.5.2 Polymerized Vesicles 174 7.6 Biological Membranes 176 7.6.1 Some Biological Implications of Mesophases 176 7.6.2 Membrane Surfactants and Lipids 177 7.7 Microemulsions 179 7.7.1 Surfactants, Co-surfactants, and Microemulsion Formation 183 7.7.1.1 Ionic Surfactant Systems 183 7.7.1.2 Nonionic Surfactant Systems 184 7.7.2 Applications 185 8 Surfactant Self-Assembled Aggregates at Work 187 8.1 Solubilization in Surfactants Micelles 188 8.1.1 The “Geography” of Solubilization in Micelles 189 8.1.2 Surfactant Structure and the Solubilization Process 191 8.1.3 Solubilization and the Nature of the Additive 194 8.1.4 The Effect of Temperature on Solubilization Phenomena 196 8.1.5 The Effects of Nonelectrolyte Solutes 197 8.1.6 The Effects of Added Electrolyte 198 8.1.7 Miscellaneous Factors Affecting Micellar Solubilization 199 8.1.8 Hydrotropes 199 8.2 Micellar Catalysis 201 8.2.1 Micellar Catalysis in Aqueous Solution 201 8.2.2 Micellar Catalysis in Nonaqueous Solvents 203 9 Polymeric Surfactants and Surfactant–Polymer Interactions 205 9.1 Polymeric Surfactants and Amphiphiles 205 9.2 Some Basic Chemistry of Polymeric Surfactant Synthesis 207 9.2.1 The Modification of Natural Cellulosic Materials, Gums, and Proteins 207 9.2.2 Synthetic Polymeric Surfactants 208 9.3 Polymeric Surfactants at Interfaces: Structure and Methodology 213 9.4 The Interactions of “Normal” Surfactants with Polymers 214 9.4.1 Surfactant–Polymer Complex Formation 215 9.4.2 Nonionic Polymers 218 9.4.3 Ionic Polymers and Proteins 219 9.5 Polymers, Surfactants, and Solubilization 222 9.6 Surfactant–Polymer Interactions in Emulsion Polymerization 223 10 Emulsions 225 10.1 The Liquid–Liquid Interface 226 10.2 General Considerations of Emulsion Stability 227 10.2.1 The Lifetimes of Typical Emulsions 230 10.2.2 Theories of Emulsion Stability 232 10.3 Emulsion Type and the Nature of the Surfactant 233 10.4 Surface Activity and Emulsion Stability 235 10.5 Mixed Surfactant Systems and Interfacial Complexes 239 10.6 Amphiphile Mesophases and Emulsion Stability 242 10.7 Surfactant Structure and Emulsion Stability 245 10.7.1 The Hydrophile–Lipophile Balance (HLB) 245 10.7.2 Phase Inversion Temperature (PIT) 250 10.7.3 Application of HLB and PIT in Emulsion Formulation 251 10.7.4 The Effects of Additives on the “Effective” HLB of Surfactants 253 10.8 Multiple Emulsions 254 10.8.1 Nomenclature for Multiple Emulsions 254 10.8.2 Preparation and Stability of Multiple Emulsions 254 10.8.3 Pathways for Primary Emulsion Breakdown 255 10.8.4 The Surfactants and Phase Components 256 11 Foams and Liquid Aerosols 259 11.1 The Physical Basis for Foam Formation 260 11.2 The Role of Surfactant in Foams 263 11.2.1 Foam Formation and Surfactant Structure 266 11.2.2 Amphiphilic Mesophases and Foam Stability 268 11.2.3 The Effects of Additives on Surfactant Foaming Properties 269 11.3 Foam Inhibition 271 11.4 Chemical Structures of Antifoaming Agents 272 11.5 A Summary of the Foaming and Antifoaming Activity of Additives 273 11.6 The Spreading Coefficient 274 11.7 Liquid Aerosols 276 11.7.1 The Formation of Liquid Aerosols 276 11.7.1.1 Spraying and Related Mechanisms of Mist and Fog Formation 276 11.7.1.2 Nozzle Atomization 277 11.7.1.3 Rotary Atomization 278 11.7.2 Aerosol Formation by Condensation 279 11.7.3 Colloidal Properties of Aerosols 282 11.7.3.1 The Dynamics of Aerosol Movement 282 11.7.3.2 Colloidal Interactions in Aerosols 284 12 Solid Surfaces: Adsorption, Wetting, and Dispersions 287 12.1 The Nature of Solid Surfaces 287 12.2 Liquid Versus Solid Surfaces 290 12.3 Adsorption at the Solid–Liquid Interface 291 12.3.1 Adsorption Isotherms 292 12.3.2 Mechanisms of Surfactant Adsorption 293 12.3.2.1 Dispersion Forces 294 12.3.2.2 Polarization and Dipolar Interactions 295 12.3.2.3 Electrostatic Interactions 296 12.3.3 The Electrical Double Layer 297 12.4 The Mechanics of Surfactant Adsorption 298 12.4.1 Adsorption and the Nature of the Adsorbent Surface 299 12.4.2 Nonpolar, Hydrophobic Surfaces 299 12.4.3 Polar, Uncharged Surfaces 300 12.4.4 Surfaces Having Discrete Electrical Charges 301 12.5 Surfactant Structure and Adsorption from Solution 303 12.5.1 Surfaces Possessing Strong Charge Sites 303 12.5.2 Adsorption by Uncharged, Polar Surfaces 306 12.5.3 Surfactants at Nonpolar, Hydrophobic Surfaces 306 12.6 Surfactant Adsorption and the Character of Solid Surfaces 307 12.7 Wetting and Related Phenomena 308 12.7.1 Surfactant Manipulation of the Wetting Process 311 12.7.2 Some Practical Examples of Wetting Control By Surfactants 314 12.7.3 Detergency and Soil Removal 314 12.7.4 The Cleaning Process 314 12.7.5 Soil Types 315 12.7.6 Solid Soil Removal 316 12.7.7 Liquid Soil Removal 317 12.7.8 Soil Re-deposition 318 12.7.9 Correlations of Surfactant Structure and Detergency 319 12.7.10 Nonaqueous Cleaning Solutions 320 12.8 Suspensions and Dispersions 321 13 Special Topics in Surfactant Applications 323 13.1 Surfactants in Foods 323 13.1.1 The Legal Status of Surfactants in Food Products 324 13.1.2 Typical Food Emulsifier Sources 324 13.1.3 Chemical Structures of Some Important Food Emulsifiers 326 13.1.3.1 Monoglycerides 326 13.1.3.2 Derivatives of Monoglycerides 327 13.1.3.3 Derivatives of Sorbitol 329 13.1.3.4 Polyhydric Emulsifiers 330 13.1.3.5 Polyglycerol Esters 331 13.1.3.6 Sucrose Esters 331 13.1.3.7 Anionic Food Emulsifiers 332 13.1.3.8 Lecithin 333 13.2 Some Important Functions of Surfactants in Food Products 334 13.2.1 Emulsifiers as Crystal Modifiers in Food 335 13.2.2 Bakery Products 337 13.2.2.1 Anti-staling Agents 338 13.2.2.2 Starch–Emulsifier Complexation 339 13.2.2.3 Dough Strengtheners 340 13.2.2.4 Aerating Agents 341 13.2.3 Emulsifier Use in Dairy and Nondairy Substitutes 342 13.2.3.1 What Makes Milk “Milk”? 343 13.2.3.2 Surfactant Uses in Cheeses and Cheese Substitutes 344 13.2.3.3 Surfactant Use in Deserts and Yogurts 344 13.2.3.4 Butter and Margarine 344 13.2.3.5 Whipped Cream and Nondairy Whipped Toppings 345 13.2.3.6 Dairy Drinks 347 13.2.3.7 Ice Cream 347 13.2.3.8 Coffee Whiteners 348 13.2.4 Protein Emulsifiers in Foods 349 13.2.4.1 Proteins as Foam Stabilizers 351 13.2.4.2 Proteins as Emulsifying Agents 352 13.2.4.3 Protein–Low Molecular Weight Emulsifier Interactions 353 13.3 Pharmaceutical and Medicinal Applications 354 13.4 Petroleum and Natural Gas Extraction 355 13.4.1 Enhanced Oil Recovery 356 13.4.2 Hydraulic Fracturing or “Fracking” 358 13.5 Paints and Surface Coatings 359 13.5.1 Interfaces in Paints and Coatings 360 13.5.2 Wetting and Dispersing Additives 361 13.5.3 Wetting Agents 363 13.5.4 Dispersing Agents 363 13.5.5 Surface Wetting with Silicone Surfactants 366 14 “Multiheaded” Amphiphiles: Gemini and Bolaform Surfactants 369 14.1 Two (or More) Can Be Better Than One 369 14.1.1 Structural Characteristics of Gemini Surfactants 370 14.1.2 Some Synthetic Pathways to Gemini Structures 371 14.1.3 Important Surfactant Properties of Gemini Surfactants 372 14.1.4 Some “Outside the Box” Potential Applications of Gemini Surfactants 375 14.2 Bolaform Surfactants 377 14.3 Chemical Structures and Self-Assembly Patterns 380 Chapter Bibliographies 381 Index 389

Read more less

Book SynopsisHEAT TRANSFER Provides authoritative coverage of the fundamentals of heat transfer, written by one of the most cited authors in all of Engineering Heat Transfer presents the fundamentals of the generation, use, conversion, and exchange of heat between physical systems. A pioneer in establishing heat transfer as a pillar of the modern thermal sciences, Professor Adrian Bejan presents the fundamental concepts and problem-solving methods of the discipline, predicts the evolution of heat transfer configurations, the principles of thermodynamics, and more. Building upon his classic 1993 book Heat Transfer, the author maintains his straightforward scientific approach to teaching essential developments such as Fourier conduction, fins, boundary layer theory, duct flow, scale analysis, and the structure of turbulence. In this new volume, Bejan explores topics and research developments that have emerged during the past decade, including the designing of convTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Author xv Acknowledgments xvi List of Symbols xvii About the Companion Website xxvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Fundamental Concepts 1 1.1.1 Heat Transfer 1 1.1.2 Temperature 2 1.1.3 Specific Heats 4 1.2 The Objective of Heat Transfer 5 1.3 Conduction 6 1.3.1 The Fourier Law 6 1.3.2 Thermal Conductivity 8 1.3.3 Cartesian Coordinates 12 1.3.4 Cylindrical Coordinates 14 1.3.5 Spherical Coordinates 15 1.3.6 Initial and Boundary Conditions 16 1.4 Convection 18 1.5 Radiation 23 1.6 Evolutionary Design 24 1.6.1 Irreversible Heating 25 1.6.2 Reversible Heating 27 References 29 Problems 30 2 Unidirectional Steady Conduction 37 2.1 Thin Walls 37 2.1.1 Thermal Resistance 37 2.1.2 Composite Walls 39 2.1.3 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 40 2.2 Cylindrical Shells 42 2.3 Spherical Shells 44 2.4 Critical Insulation Radius 45 2.5 Variable Thermal Conductivity 48 2.6 Internal Heat Generation 49 2.7 Evolutionary Design: Extended Surfaces (Fins) 51 2.7.1 The Enhancement of Heat Transfer 51 2.7.2 Constant Cross-Sectional Area 53 2.7.2.1 The Longitudinal Conduction Model 53 2.7.2.2 Long Fin 54 2.7.2.3 Fin with Insulated Tip 55 2.7.2.4 Heat Transfer Through the Tip 57 2.7.2.5 Fin Efficiency 58 2.7.2.6 Fin Effectiveness 59 2.7.3 Variable Cross-Sectional Area 60 2.7.4 Scale Analysis: When the Unidirectional Conduction Model Is Valid 61 2.7.5 Fin Shape Subject to Volume Constraint 63 2.7.6 Heat Tube Shape 64 2.7.7 Rewards from Freedom 66 References 70 Problems 71 3 Multidirectional Steady Conduction 85 3.1 Analytical Solutions 85 3.1.1 Two-Dimensional Conduction in Cartesian Coordinates 85 3.1.1.1 Homogeneous Boundary Conditions 85 3.1.1.2 Separation of Variables 87 3.1.1.3 Orthogonality 88 3.1.2 Heat Flux Boundary Conditions 92 3.1.3 Superposition of Solutions 95 3.1.4 Cylindrical Coordinates 98 3.1.5 Three-Dimensional Conduction 100 3.2 Integral Method 101 3.3 Scale Analysis 103 3.4 Evolutionary Design 104 3.4.1 Shape Factors 104 3.4.2 Trees: Volume–Point Flow 108 3.4.3 Rewards from Freedom 111 References 113 Problems 114 4 Time-Dependent Conduction 121 4.1 Immersion Cooling or Heating 121 4.2 Lumped Capacitance Model (The “Late” Regime) 124 4.3 Semi-infinite Solid Model (The “Early” Regime) 125 4.3.1 Constant Surface Temperature 125 4.3.2 Constant Heat Flux Surface 128 4.3.3 Surface in Contact with Fluid Flow 129 4.4 Unidirectional Conduction 133 4.4.1 Plate 133 4.4.2 Cylinder 138 4.4.3 Sphere 141 4.4.4 Plate, Cylinder, and Sphere with Fixed Surface Temperature 142 4.5 Multidirectional Conduction 148 4.6 Concentrated Sources and Sinks 152 4.6.1 Instantaneous (One-Shot) Sources and Sinks 152 4.6.2 Persistent (Continuous) Sources and Sinks 154 4.6.3 Moving Heat Sources 156 4.7 Melting and Solidification 158 4.8 Evolutionary Design 162 4.8.1 Spacings Between Buried Heat Sources 162 4.8.2 The S-Curve Growth of Spreading and Collecting 164 References 166 Problems 167 5 External Forced Convection 177 5.1 Classification of Convection Configurations 177 5.2 Basic Principles of Convection 179 5.2.1 Mass Conservation Equation 179 5.2.2 Momentum Equations 180 5.2.3 Energy Equation 185 5.3 Laminar Boundary Layer 189 5.3.1 Velocity Boundary Layer 189 5.3.2 Thermal Boundary Layer 195 5.3.2.1 Thick Thermal Boundary Layer 195 5.3.2.2 Thermal Boundary Layer 196 5.3.3 Nonisothermal Wall 198 5.3.4 Film Temperature 200 5.4 Turbulent Boundary Layer 202 5.4.1 Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow 202 5.4.2 Time-Averaged Equations 203 5.4.3 Eddy Diffusivities 206 5.4.4 Wall Friction 208 5.4.5 Heat Transfer 211 5.5 Other External Flows 215 5.5.1 Single Cylinder 215 5.5.2 Sphere 218 5.5.3 Other Body Shapes 218 5.5.4 Arrays of Cylinders 219 5.5.5 Turbulent Jets 221 5.6 Evolutionary Design 223 5.6.1 Size of Object with Heat Transfer 223 5.6.2 Evolution of Size 225 5.6.3 Visualization: Heatlines 226 References 227 Problems 230 6 Internal Forced Convection 245 6.1 Laminar Flow Through a Duct 245 6.1.1 Entrance Region 245 6.1.2 Fully Developed Flow Region 247 6.1.3 Friction Factor and Pressure Drop 249 6.2 Heat Transfer in Laminar Flow 252 6.2.1 Thermal Entrance Region 252 6.2.2 Thermally Fully Developed Region 253 6.2.3 Uniform Wall Heat Flux 255 6.2.4 Isothermal Wall 258 6.3 Turbulent Flow 261 6.3.1 Transition, Entrance Region, and Fully Developed Flow 261 6.3.2 Friction Factor and Pressure Drop 263 6.3.3 Heat Transfer Coefficient 265 6.4 Total Heat Transfer Rate 269 6.4.1 Isothermal Wall 269 6.4.2 Uniform Wall Heating 271 6.5 Evolutionary Design 271 6.5.1 Size of Duct with Fluid Flow 271 6.5.2 Tree-Shaped Ducts 272 6.5.3 Spacings 274 6.5.4 Packaging for Maximum Heat Transfer Density 276 References 277 Problems 278 7 Natural Convection 291 7.1 What Drives Natural Convection? 291 7.2 Boundary Layer Flow on Vertical Wall 292 7.2.1 Boundary Layer Equations 292 7.2.2 Scale Analysis of the Laminar Regime 295 7.2.3 Isothermal Wall 299 7.2.4 Transition and the Effect of Turbulence 302 7.2.5 Uniform Heat Flux 304 7.3 Other External Flows 305 7.3.1 Thermally Stratified Reservoir 305 7.3.2 Inclined Walls 306 7.3.3 Horizontal Walls 308 7.3.4 Horizontal Cylinder 310 7.3.5 Sphere 310 7.3.6 Vertical Cylinder 310 7.3.7 Other Immersed Bodies 311 7.4 Internal Flows 314 7.4.1 Vertical Channels 314 7.4.2 Enclosures Heated from the Side 317 7.4.3 Enclosures Heated from Below 320 7.4.4 Inclined Enclosures 323 7.4.5 Annular Space Between Horizontal Cylinders 325 7.4.6 Annular Space Between Concentric Spheres 326 7.5 Evolutionary Design 327 7.5.1 Spacings 327 7.5.2 Miniaturization 329 References 331 Problems 333 8 Convection with Change of Phase 343 8.1 Condensation 343 8.1.1 Laminar Film on Vertical Surface 343 8.1.2 Turbulent Film on Vertical Surface 350 8.1.3 Film Condensation in Other Configurations 353 8.1.4 Dropwise and Direct-Contact Condensation 359 8.2 Boiling 361 8.2.1 Pool Boiling 361 8.2.2 Nucleate Boiling and Peak Heat Flux 365 8.2.3 Film Boiling and Minimum Heat Flux 369 8.2.4 Flow Boiling 373 8.3 Evolutionary Design 373 8.3.1 Latent Heat Storage 374 8.3.2 Shaping Inserts for Faster Melting 375 8.3.3 Rhythmic Surface Renewal 376 References 376 Problems 378 9 Heat Exchangers 387 9.1 Classification of Heat Exchangers 387 9.2 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 391 9.3 Log-Mean Temperature Difference Method 397 9.3.1 Parallel Flow 397 9.3.2 Counterflow 399 9.3.3 Other Flow Arrangements 400 9.4 Effectiveness–NTU Method 408 9.4.1 Effectiveness and Limitations Posed by the Second Law 408 9.4.2 Parallel Flow 409 9.4.3 Counterflow 410 9.4.4 Other Flow Arrangements 411 9.5 Pressure Drop 417 9.5.1 Pumping Power 417 9.5.2 Abrupt Contraction and Enlargement 418 9.5.3 Acceleration and Deceleration 422 9.5.4 Tube Bundles in Cross-Flow 423 9.5.5 Compact Heat Exchanger Surfaces 423 9.6 Evolutionary Design 428 9.6.1 Entrance-Length Heat Exchangers 428 9.6.2 Dendritic Heat Exchangers 428 9.6.3 Heat Exchanger Size 430 9.6.4 Heat Tubes with Convection 432 References 435 Problems 437 10 Radiation 447 10.1 Introduction 447 10.2 Blackbody Radiation 448 10.2.1 Definitions 448 10.2.2 Temperature and Energy 450 10.2.3 Intensity 452 10.2.4 Emissive Power 453 10.3 Heat Transfer Between Black Surfaces 460 10.3.1 Geometric View Factor 460 10.3.2 Relations Between View Factors 463 10.3.2.1 Reciprocity 463 10.3.2.2 Additivity 464 10.3.2.3 Enclosure 466 10.3.3 Two-Surface Enclosures 467 10.4 Diffuse-Gray Surfaces 471 10.4.1 Emissivity 471 10.4.2 Absorptivity and Reflectivity 475 10.4.3 Kirchhoff’s Law 482 10.4.4 Two-Surface Enclosures 485 10.4.5 Enclosures with More than Two Surfaces 489 10.5 Participating Media 493 10.5.1 Volumetric Absorption 493 10.5.2 Gas Emissivities and Absorptivities 494 10.5.3 Gas Surrounded by Black Surface 500 10.5.4 Gray Medium Surrounded by Diffuse-Gray Surfaces 501 10.6 Evolutionary Design 502 10.6.1 Terrestrial Solar Power 502 10.6.2 Extraterrestrial Solar Power 503 10.6.3 Climate 505 References 506 Problems 507 Appendix A Constants and Conversion Factors 521 Appendix B Properties of Solids 527 Appendix C Properties of Liquids 541 Appendix D Properties of Gases 551 Appendix E Mathematical Formulas 557 Appendix F Turbulence Transition 565 Appendix G Extremum Subject to Constraint 571 Author Index 573 Subject Index 579

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis unique multidisciplinary 8-volume set focuses on the emerging issues concerning graphene materials and provides a shared platform for both researcher and industry. The Handbook of Graphene comprises a set of 8 individual volumes that brings an interdisciplinary perspective to accomplish a more detailed understanding of the interplay between the synthesis, structure, characterization, processing, applications and performance of the advanced materials. The Handbook of Graphene comprises 140 chapters from world renowned experts. Volume 1 is solely focused on Growth, Synthesis, and Functionalization of Graphene. Some of the important topics include but not limited to: Graphite in metallic materials-growths, structures and defects of spheroidal graphite in ductile iron; synthesis and quality optimization; methods of synthesis and physico-chemical properties of fluorographenes; graphene-SiC reinforced hybrid composite foam: response to high s

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical and accessible guide to managing a successful project Effective Project Management is based around an activities and action check list approach to project management. It provides a guide to the basic principles and the disciplines that managers need to master in order to be successful. The author's check lists approach (based on his years of practical experience on projects) ensure that project managers are following valid processes, helping them to be innovative in their approach to developing plans and resolving problems. In addition, the author's check list pick and mix format is designed to be flexible in order to meet the individual needs of the reader. Effective Project Management also contains some information on the theories underpinning project management. Knowledge of the theory helps in the understanding of how project management works in practice. In addition to the book's check lists of what activities need to be perTable of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgements xxi Introduction 1 Part I Projects and Their Management 5 Section A Project Characteristics and Phases 6 1 Characteristics 7 2 Phases 8 3 Project Patterns 11 4 Reasons for Projects 12 5 Project Needs 12 Section B Project Management Characteristics 14 1 Models 16 2 Characteristics 18 3 Key Management Decisions and Phases 20 4 Project Management Patterns 24 Section C Execution Planning Influences 26 1 Project Characteristics, Size, and Complexity 26 2 Strategic Decisions 27 3 The Historic Nature of an Industry 30 4 The Characteristics of the Industry/Business Sector 31 5 Phases and Schedule 41 6 Execution Planning 41 7 Generic Influences on Project Execution 42 Section D The Project Management Role 43 1 Strategic and Contractual 43 2 Organizational and Functions 43 3 Responsibilities and Orientation 46 4 Competencies and Leadership 47 5 Abilities and Skills 48 6 The Project Manager 50 Section E The Manager of Projects 52 1 Financial Situation 52 2 Scope of Work and Change Orders 54 3 Project Progress and Status 54 4 Health, Safety, and Environment 56 5 Quality Audits and Status 56 6 Risk Management 56 7 Client Relations 56 8 Formal Reviews 56 9 The Project Management Group 57 10 Evaluating a Project Manager 57 11 The Manager of Projects and the Client(s) 58 Section F The Owner and Client 59 1 Some Fundamentals 59 2 Cost and Planning 61 3 Things to Watch 61 4 Most Important of All – Safety 62 Section G Achieving Success 63 1 The Project Management 66 2 Alignment of Objectives and Client-Contractor Relations 67 3 Involvement of Users 68 4 Get and Build the Right Team with Clear Roles and Responsibilities 70 5 Clear and Complete Scope Definition 70 6 Thorough Planning of the Work 71 7 Planning Communications 72 8 The Efficiency of the Project Launch Phase 73 9 Change Control 74 10 Effective Decision Making 74 11 Tackle Things Today – Tomorrow They Will Be Bigger 75 12 Conclusions for Success 75 Part II Programme Management 77 Section A Programme Management – What’s in A Name? 78 1 Programme Management Conclusions 79 2 Summarizing Programme Management 80 3 Key Roles for a Programme Manager 81 Section B Business Change Programmes 82 1 Blueprint 82 2 Programme Organization 82 3 Change Stakeholders 83 4 Benefits Realization 83 5 Gate Reviews 84 6 Project Controls 84 7 Terminating the Programme 85 Section C Management of Portfolios 86 Part III Feasibility and Contracting 89 Section A Feasibility Studies 90 1 Feasibility Study Plan 91 2 Defining the Project 92 3 The Feasibility Report 92 4 Proposed Execution Plan 94 5 The Next Step 95 Section B Contracting Strategy Considerations 96 1 Business Strategy and Stakeholder Alignment 96 2 Regional and Local Factors 96 3 Market Intelligence 97 4 Prequalification Processes 97 5 General Contracting Issues 98 Section C Issuing an Enquiry 103 1 Enquiry Preparation Phase 103 2 Tendering Phase 106 3 Evaluation Phase 106 Section D To Tender or Not to Tender 109 1 The Tendering Decision 109 2 The Tender Decision Analysis 110 3 The Final Tendering Decision 113 Section E Tendering and Proposal Phase 115 1 Tendering Preliminaries 115 2 Developing the Tender or Proposal – In-house Work 117 3 Coordinating with Third Parties 121 4 Coordinating with the Client 121 5 Commercial 122 6 Reviewing the Tender or Proposal 124 7 Before Submitting the Tender or Proposal 125 8 After Completion of the Tender or Proposal 125 9 Proposal Team Presentation 126 10 Possible Client Questions for the Proposal Team 129 Section F Contracts 131 1 Starting Work 133 2 Awarding Contracts 134 3 Contract Document 134 4 Contract Awarded 136 5 Contractual Issues 137 6 Some Contractual Reminders 138 7 Discharge of a Contract 138 Part IV Project Execution 139 Section A Project Launch 140 1 Project Checks 142 2 Project Objectives 143 3 Scope Launch 144 4 Team Launch 144 5 Execution Launch 145 6 Launch Controls 145 7 Hold Kick-Off Meeting 146 8 Kick-Off Meeting Agenda 146 9 Kick-Off Schedule 148 Section B Establishing An Office 150 Section C Getting Organized 152 1 Setting up the Project Infrastructure 152 2 Controlling the Documents 154 3 Responsibilities 155 4 Procedures 156 5 Project Execution Plan 156 6 Formalities 157 7 Project Insurance 157 8 Some Advice 158 Section D Mobilization 159 Section E Client Relations 161 Section F Scope 163 1 Scope Documents 164 2 Changes to the Scope 164 3 Work Packaging 164 Section G Estimates and Budget 166 1 Establishing the Estimate(s) 167 2 Trend Programme 167 3 Allowances 168 4 The Budget 168 Section H Accounting 170 1 Looking after the Finances 170 2 Bonds 172 Section J Planning and Scheduling 173 1 Getting Organized 173 2 Planning 173 3 Scheduling 174 Section K Project Controls 176 1 Setting Up 177 2 Progress and Reporting 178 3 Cost Progress and Control 179 4 The Critical Path 179 Section L Variations/Changes/Claims 181 1 Trend Base Estimate 182 2 Trend Meetings 183 3 Potential Trends 184 4 Claims for Changes 184 5 Managing Claims 186 6 Resist Change 187 Section M Reporting 188 1 Reporting Cycle 188 2 Visibility 189 3 Progress Reporting 190 4 Progress Report 191 5 Cost Reporting 192 Section N Project Meetings 193 Section O Design 195 1 Getting Organized 195 2 Reviewing the Design 196 3 Some Specific Design Ideas 198 4 Construction Issues 198 Section P Procurement 200 1 Getting Organized 200 2 Evaluating Suppliers 201 3 Expediting and Inspection 202 4 Some Specific Procurement Ideas 202 5 Payment Terms 204 Section Q Installation and Construction 205 1 The Key Staff 205 2 Construction Planning 207 3 Work Packaging 210 4 Construction Site Work 210 5 Some Specific Construction Ideas 213 6 Establishing Authority 214 Section R Subcontracting 215 1 Questions to Ask Before Subcontracting 215 2 Contracting Checks 216 3 Management Issues 217 4 List of Some Subcontracts 217 Section S Commissioning and Setting To Work 219 Section T Contract Completion - Close Out 222 1 Handover of Documentation 222 2 Handover of Equipment 223 3 Clean Up 223 4 Disposal of Surplus Material 223 5 Closing Contracts 224 6 Financial Matters 225 7 Close Out 225 Section U Post Project Activities 227 1 Completing the Records 227 2 Post-project Appraisal – Internal Performance Review 227 3 Project/Client Review Meeting/Lessons Learned 228 4 Historical Report 230 5 Client Follow-up and Marketing 230 6 Internal Projects Benefits 231 Part V Specialist Topics 233 Section A Completed and Inspected Work 234 1 Completed Work 234 2 Inspecting Work 236 Section B Coordination Procedure 238 1 Basic Organizing Information 238 2 Coordination with the Company 239 Section C Cultural Issues 243 1 Some Definitions of Culture 243 2 A Seminal Grouping of Cultures 244 3 Some Cultural Issues to be Aware of 244 4 Management Style 246 Section D Documentation 247 1 Contractor’s Own Documents and Drawings 247 2 Vendor Drawings and Documents 249 Section E Estimating and Contingency 250 1 Types of Estimate 250 2 Estimate Planning Sequence 252 3 The Estimating Process 253 4 Estimate Information and Content 255 5 Contingency Estimation 259 Section F Filing and Archiving 261 1 The Filing System 261 2 Archiving 263 3 Master File Index: Recommended Minor Categories and Suggested Subjects 264 Section G Financial Appraisal 270 1 Cash versus Profit 270 2 Simple Project Appraisal Methods 272 3 Payback 273 4 Discounted Cash Flow Techniques 273 5 Internal Rate of Return – IRR 276 6 Sensitivity and Risk Analysis 277 7 Financial Appraisal Conclusion 277 Section H Incoterms® 280 1 Rules for Any Mode or Modes of Transport 280 2 Rules for Sea and Inland Waterway Transport 281 3 Transfer of Risks and Obligations 281 4 Sellers’ and Buyers’ Detailed Obligations 282 5 Additional Information 282 Section J Joint Associations 283 1 Reasons for Joint Association 283 2 Documentation and Legal Requirements 284 3 Selecting a Partner 284 4 Joint Association Risks 285 5 Steps to Evaluate Joint Associations 285 6 Key Issues for a Joint Association 287 7 Steps in Tendering 288 8 Control of the Work 289 9 Financial Control 289 10 Essentials for Success 290 11 Why Joint Associations Fail 290 Section K Performance Appraisals 292 1 Purpose and Preparation 292 2 The Interview 292 3 Post-interview Actions 293 Section L Performance Measurement and Earned Value 295 1 Design/Engineering Performance 295 2 Procurement Performance 297 3 Construction Performance 297 4 Practical Performance Details 298 5 Linking Deliverables to Programme 299 6 Recording and Comparing Data 300 7 Earned Value Terminology 302 8 Useful Health Ratios or Indices 302 Section M Risk and Risk List 303 1 Process Model 304 2 Prioritising Risk 306 3 Risk List 309 4 People and Risk 312 5 Country Risk Assessment 313 Section N ‘S‘ Curves 315 1 Interpreting the Curves 315 2 Change Orders 319 Section O Site Checks 323 1 Country Data 323 2 Site Data 323 3 Local Authorities 323 4 Suppliers and Local Contractors 323 5 Labour Availability 324 6 Non-manual Employees 324 7 Housing and Camp 324 8 Shipping and Handling 325 Section P Surety Bonds 326 1 Types of Bonds 326 2 Characteristics of Bonds 328 Section Q Selecting and Building the Team 329 1 Selecting the Team 329 2 Building the Team 332 3 New to the Team 336 Section R Team Roles 337 1 Specification of the Eight Team Roles 337 2 A Suggestion for a Project Manager 341 3 Matching the Roles to the Project Process 342 Section S Value Management/Engineering 343 1 VM/VE Process 343 2 Group Process 346 Part VI Skills Check Lists 349 Section A Communications 350 1 Correspondence 351 2 Documents 353 3 ElectronicMedia 354 4 Oral 357 5 Social 358 6 Visual 359 7 Other Communication Tools 359 8 Translators 359 9 A Difficulty 360 10 Some Reminders 361 Section B Leadership and Motivation 362 1 Consensus to Dictatorial Continuum by Tannenbaum and Schmidt 363 2 The Three S’s of Group Communications 364 3 Situational Leadership by Kenneth Blanchard and Dr. Paul Hersey 365 4 Task, Team, Individual – Action Centred Leadership by John Adair 367 5 Leadership and Management Roles 368 6 Management by Walking/Wandering Around MBWA 369 7 Responsibility 369 8 Leadership – More Than a Management Model 370 9 Thoughts for the Day 371 Section C Managing and Conducting Meetings 373 1 Planning the Meeting 373 2 The Agenda 374 3 Manage the Process and the People 375 4 Control the Discussion 377 5 Construct Decisions and Summarize 378 6 Record and Notify 379 Section D Negotiation 381 1 Preparation for Negotiation 381 2 Discuss Interests 382 3 Signal 382 4 Propose for Movement 383 5 Package 383 6 Bargain 383 7 Close the Deal 383 8 Agree the Deal 383 9 Techniques and Tricks 384 Section E Personal Skills 386 1 Planning an Interaction with Others 386 2 The Exchange 387 3 Asking Questions 388 4 Changing Style 388 5 Team Role Style 390 6 Finalizing the Interaction 391 7 Giving and Receiving Feedback 391 8 Dealing with Difficult People 392 9 Being Angry 394 10 Priorities 395 11 Time Management 395 12 Learning 396 13 Motivating Skills 397 14 Some Personal Advice 397 15 Questionnaires 398 Section F Politics in Projects 399 1 Typical Destructive Behaviour 400 2 Dubious Behaviour? 401 3 How Politics Can Affect a Project 402 4 Some Advice 403 5 Something to Think About 405 Section G Presentation Skills 406 1 Fundamentals for All Presentations 406 2 Format for a Presentation to Inform/Explain 408 3 Presentation to Influence/Convince 409 4 Presentation Expressing a Viewpoint/Opinion 410 5 Team Presentations 410 6 Your Audience 411 7 Presentation Skills Analysis 412 8 Organizing the Location 413 9 Visual and Other Aids 415 10 Dealing with Questions 416 11 Summarizing a Presentation 417 Section H Prioritising Techniques 418 1 Group Work Using Flip Charts 418 2 Graphical Plots 418 3 Binary Decision-making 420 Section J Problem-solving Process 422 1 Define the Problem 423 2 Define the Objectives and Success Criteria 423 3 Analyse the Problem 423 4 Create and Propose Solutions 424 5 Evaluate, Forecast Consequences, and Select 424 6 Recommend, Plan Action, and Implement the Solution 425 7 Evaluate the Outcome and Follow Up 426 Section K Problem-solving Techniques 427 1 Brainstorming 427 2 Check Sheets 428 3 Pareto and Other Diagrams 429 4 Cause and Effect – Ishikawa or Fish Bone Diagram 430 5 Force Field Analysis 430 Section L Report Writing 433 1 The Report Objective 433 2 The Reader 433 3 The Material for the Report 434 4 The Report Structure 435 5 The Executive Summary 435 6 Introduction to the Report 435 7 The Body of the Report 436 8 Writing the Report 436 9 Conclusions and Recommendations 438 10 Appendices 439 11 Finalizing the Report 439 Abbreviations 441 Index 447

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe second volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsGraphene is a valuable nanomaterial used in technology. This handbook features graphene topics related to Physics, Chemistry, and Biology. The Handbook of Graphene, Volume 2 delivers an overview on the numerous and diverse graphene research directions and innovations. The handbook covers a range of areas including graphene in optoelectronic devices and as a detector of biomolecules.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe third volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsGraphene is a valuable nanomaterial used in technology. This handbook is focused on Graphene-Like 2D Materials. The Handbook of Graphene, Volume 3 covers topics that include planar graphene superlattices; magnetic and optical properties of graphene materials with porous defects; and nanoelectronic application of graphyne and its structural derivatives.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe fourth volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsThe Handbook of Graphene, Volume 4: Composites looks at composite materials exclusively. Topics covered include graphene composites and graphene-reinforced advanced composite materials. The following graphene-based subjects are discussed: ceramic composites; composite nanostructures; composites with shape memory effect; and scroll structures. Chapters also address: the fabrication and properties of copper?graphene composites; graphene?metal oxide composite as an anode material in li-ion batteries; supramolecular graphene-based systems for drug delivery; and other graphene-related areas of interest to scientists and researchers.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe fifth volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsGraphene is a valuable nanomaterial used in technology. The Handbook of Graphene: Graphene in Energy, Healthcare, and Environmental Applications is the fifth volume in the handbook series. The book''s topics include: graphene nanomaterials in energy and environment applications and graphene used as nanolubricant. Within the handbook, three-dimensional graphene materials are discussed, as are synthesis and applications in electrocatalysts and electrochemical sensors. The battery topics cover: graphene and graphene-based hybrid composites for advanced rechargeable battery electrodes; graphene-based materials for advanced lithium-ion batteries; graphene-based materials for supercapacitors and conductive additives of lithium ion batteries. The book''s graphene-based sensor information addresses flexible actuators, sensors, and supercapacitors.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe sixth volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsThe Handbook of Graphene, Volume 6: Biosensors and Advanced Sensors discusses the unique benefits that the discovery of graphene has brought to the sensing and biosensing sectors. It examines graphene''s use in leading-edge technology applications and the development of a variety of graphene-based sensors. The handbook looks at how graphene can be used as an electrode, substrate, or transducer in sensor design. Graphene-based sensor detection has achieved up to femto-levels, with performances delivering the advantages of greater selectivity, sensitivity, and stability.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe seventh volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsThe Handbook of Graphene, Volume 7: Biomaterials presents an overview of various graphene research initiatives and specific biomedical applications, where the properties of graphene are used differently. The book shares information on how graphene and graphene-based materials are utilized for the following types of applications: bio-targeting; medical and biomedical; drug delivery; antibacterial; and biological, biosensing and bioimaging. Topics covered include the role of graphene-based materials in: regenerative medicine; resistive memories and transistors; and implants in biomedicine. The impact of graphene-based biomaterials on biomedical applications is discussed, as are graphene-based systems in the delivery of therapeutics to the brain and central nervous system.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe eighth volume in a series of handbooks on graphene research and applicationsThe Handbook of Graphene, Volume 8: Technology and Innovations discusses the role of graphene-based applications in technological advancements. Topics include graphene materials used in circuit board repairs; RFID antenna and sensor fabrication; and wearable healthcare electronics. Chapters present detailed information on: modeling methods used in graphene research; applications of graphene-on-silicon photonic integrated circuits; the development of graphene for engineering applications; and other graphene subjects of interest to scientists, chemists and physicists.

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn informative introduction for those considering a career in project management Project Management JumpStart offers a clear, practical introduction to the complex world of project management, with an entertaining approach based on real-world application. Fully revised to align with a Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge PMBOK Guide, 6th edition, this book provides an overview of the field followed by an exploration of current best practices. The practical focus facilitates retention by directly linking critical concepts to your everyday work, while the close adherence to PMBOK guidelines makes this book the perfect starting point for those considering certification to earn either PMP or CompTIA Project+ credentials. Project management is a top-five, in-demand skill in today's workplace, and the demand has spread far beyond IT to encompass nearly every industry; any organization that produces goods or services, whether for pTable of ContentsIntroduction xiii Chapter 1 Building the Foundation 1 The Project Management Journey 2 Is It a Project? 3 Where Are We Going? 4 A Bird’s-Eye View 5 Know the Structure of Your Organization 8 Benefiting from Project Management Practices 14 Tools of the Trade 16 Understanding Project Processes 18 Twenty-first Century Project Management 23 What’s Old Is New Again 24 Constraints 24 Where Do You Go from Here? 27 Becoming PMP® Certified 28 Certifying with CompTIA®’s Project+ 29 Formal Education Programs 29 Terms to Know 30 Review Questions 31 Chapter 2 Developing Project Management Skills 33 A Little Bit of Everything 34 Communication Is the Key 35 Organizing Techniques 35 General Management Skills 42 People Management Skills 43 Communicating Your Style 44 Exchanging Information 45 Active Listening 49 How Many Connections Are There? 51 Ten Tips for Communicating Effectively 52 Terms to Know 53 Review Questions 54 Chapter 3 Initiating the Project 55 Selecting Projects for Success 56 How Projects Come About 57 Project Generators—Needs and Demands 58 Project Requests 59 Business Case 62 Selecting and Prioritizing Projects 64 Feasibility Study 70 Meeting the Stakeholders 71 Working with the Project Sponsor 71 Documenting Stakeholder Roles and Responsibilities 73 Competing Needs of Stakeholders 75 Creating the Project Charter 76 Purposes for the Charter 76 Essential Elements of a Project Charter 78 Holding the Project Kickoff Meeting 81 Creating the Agenda 82 Terms to Know 83 Review Questions 84 Chapter 4 Defining the Project Goals 85 Agreeing on the Deliverables 86 Goals and Objectives 86 Deliverables 89 Discovering Requirements 90 The Role of the Business Analyst 91 Requirements-Gathering Process 92 Critical Success Factors 94 Identifying Assumptions and Constraints 96 Defining Assumptions 97 Defining Constraints 98 Creating the Project Scope Statement 99 Contents of the Project Scope Statement 100 Obtaining Sign-off 102 Creating the Project Scope Management Plan 103 Creating the Communications Plan 103 Terms to Know 105 Review Questions 106 Chapter 5 Breaking Down the Project Activities 107 Constructing the Work Breakdown Structure 108 Organizing the WBS Levels 109 Work Packages 111 Identification Codes 112 Outline View 113 Defining Tasks and Activities 114 Managing the Work 114 Activity Sequencing 116 Determining Milestones 117 Constructing the Responsibility Assignment Matrix 118 Estimating Activity Durations 120 Expert Judgment 120 Parametric Estimating 120 Establishing Dependencies 121 Constructing a Network Diagram 122 Precedence Diagramming 123 Activity on Node 124 Diagramming Method of Choice 124 Terms to Know 124 Review Questions 125 Chapter 6 Planning and Acquiring Resources 127 Planning the Project Team 128 Skills Assessment 129 Deciding Who’s Needed 131 Negotiating for Team Members 132 Staffing Assignments 134 Acquiring Materials, Supplies, and Equipment 135 Questions to Ask 136 Make or Buy 138 Procurement Plan 139 Resource Plan 139 Contracting for Resources 140 Request for Proposal and More 141 Soliciting Bids 142 Choosing a Supplier 143 Awarding the Contract 145 Closing Out the Contract 145 Terms to Know 145 Review Questions 146 Chapter 7 Assessing Risk 147 Identifying Risks 148 Types of Project Risks 150 Common Project Risks: Where Are They Hiding? 150 Identification Techniques 154 Risk Analysis Techniques 160 Risk Probability and Impact 160 Risk Tolerance 163 Planning for Risks 164 Responding to Risks 165 Escalate 166 Accept 166 Avoid 166 Transfer 167 Mitigate 167 Exploit 168 Share 168 Enhance 168 Contingency Planning 168 Residual and Secondary Risks 169 Risk Management Plan 169 Terms to Know 171 Review Questions 172 Chapter 8 Developing the Project Plan 173 Creating the Project Schedule 174 Project Schedule Assistance 175 Project Schedule Components 176 Program Evaluation and Review Technique 176 Calculating the Critical Path 180 Working with the Project Schedule 185 Schedule Display Options 189 Quality Management Plan 191 Documenting the Plan 192 Cost of Quality 194 Terms to Know 195 Review Questions 196 Chapter 9 Budgeting 101 197 What Makes Up a Budget? 198 Project Costs 198 Direct Costs vs. Indirect Costs 200 Gathering the Docs 200 Budgeting Process 201 Budget Items 201 Budget Woes 202 Following the Processes 203 Estimating Techniques 204 Analogous Estimating 204 Bottom-Up Estimating 204 Resource Cost Rates 205 Parametric Estimating 205 Computerized Tools 205 Ask the Experts 205 Ask the Vendors 206 Estimating Costs and Finalizing the Budget 206 Questions to Ask 208 Finalizing the Budget 208 Down Memory Lane 210 Are You in Control? 210 What’s the Cost? 211 Budget Approvals 212 Establishing a Cost Baseline 212 Call It a Plan 214 How Big Is It? 215 Obtaining Approvals 216 Terms to Know 217 Review Questions 218 Chapter 10 Executing the Project 219 Assembling the Team 220 Project Team Kickoff Meeting 221 Five Stages of Team Development 222 Effective Team Characteristics 225 Negotiation and Problem-Solving Techniques 226 Start at the Beginning 227 The Five Approaches to Problem Resolution 228 Project Manager’s Role in Team Development 230 Rewarding Experiences 230 Leadership Power 234 Gaining Trust and Respect from Team Members 235 Professional Responsibility 237 Progress Reporting 240 Who Gets What? 240 Status Reports and Action Logs 240 Taking Corrective Action 244 Terms to Know 245 Review Questions 246 Chapter 11 Controlling the Project Outcome 247 Change Happens 248 How Changes Come About 249 Establishing Change Management Control Procedures 251 The Purpose of the Change Control System 251 Establishing a Change Control Board 253 Tracking Changes 254 Assessing the Impacts of Change 255 Calling in Reinforcements 256 Adjusting for Scope and Schedule Changes 256 Managing and Revising Costs 259 Monitoring and Controlling Project Processes 260 Performance-Reporting Tools 260 Risk Monitoring 262 Is the Project in Trouble? 263 Just Say No 263 Early Warning Signs 264 Terms to Know 265 Review Questions 266 Chapter 12 Closing the Books 267 Happy Endings 268 Details, Details 269 Breaking Up Is Hard to Do 274 Training and Warranty Period 275 Implementing the Project 276 Documenting Lessons Learned 277 Obtaining Project Sign-Off 278 Is the Customer Happy? 280 Archiving Project Documents 281 It’s Party Time! 282 Agile Project Management 282 Agile Roles and Responsibilities 284 Sprint Planning 285 Daily Standups or Scrum Meetings 286 Sprint Review and Sprint Retrospective 287 Terms to Know 288 Review Questions 289 Appendix A Answers to Review Questions 291 Chapter 1: Building the Foundation 292 Chapter 2: Developing Project Management Skills 292 Chapter 3: Initiating the Project 293 Chapter 4: Defining the Project Goals 294 Chapter 5: Breaking Down the Project Activities 295 Chapter 6: Planning and Acquiring Resources 296 Chapter 7: Assessing Risk 297 Chapter 8: Developing the Project Plan 297 Chapter 9: Budgeting 101 298 Chapter 10: Executing the Project 299 Chapter 11: Controlling the Project Outcome 300 Chapter 12: Closing the Books 300 Appendix B Sample Project Management Forms and Checklists 303 Glossary 333 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings contains a collection of 23 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 41st International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 22-27, 2017. This issue includes papers presented in the following symposia: Symposium 1 Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics and Composites Symposium 2 Advanced Ceramic Coatings for Structural, Environmental, and Functional Applications Symposium 4 Armor Ceramics: Challenges and New Developments Symposium 5 Next Generation Bioceramics and Biocomposites 6th Global Young Investigators ForumTable of ContentsIntroduction ix MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR AND PERFORMANCE OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES The Effects of Diamond Grit Characteristics on the Microstructure and Abrasion Resistance of PCD Sintered by HPHT 3Lifen Deng, Roger Nilen, and Serdar Ozbayraktar Crush Strength Analysis of Hollow Glass Microspheres 11Ben Dillinger, David Clark, Carlos Suchicital, and George Wicks Use of Electrical Resistance and Acoustic Emission during Fatigue of Woven SiC/SiC Composites under Different Conditions 27Zipeng Han, Gregory N. Morscher, Manigandan Kannan, and Emmanuel Maillet Mechanical Behavior of Wound All-Oxide CMC 37S. Hackemann Oxidative Exposure of Ceramic Matrix Composites: Post Flex and Acoustic Emission Analysis 49G. Ojard, D. Goberman, J. Cardinale, and J. Holowczak Dry Sliding Wear and Friction Behavior of Hybrid ZA-27 Alloy Composites Reinforced with Silicon Carbide and Stone Dust Particulates 55S. S. Owoeye and D. O. Folorunso High Hardness and Toughness Nano-CBN-WC-W(RE) Composite 65T. Semenic and O. Sudre Fracture Toughness of Glasses as Measured by the SCF and SEPB Methods 75G. D. Quinn and J. J. Swab Use of Electrical Resistance as a Non-Destructive Evaluation Tool in Health Monitoring and Damage Evaluation of Ceramic Matrix Composites 89Yogesh P. Singh, Michael J. Presby, K. Manigandan, and Gregory N. Morscher Potentials of Niobium Carbide (NbC) as Cutting Tools and for Wear Protection 99Mathias Woydt, Hardy Mohrbacher, Jef Vleugels, and Shuigen Huang ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS Effect of Microstructural Characteristics on Thermal and Electrical Properties of Thermally Sprayed Ceramic Coatings 115F. Azarmi, E. Mironov, I. Shakhova, and A. Safonov Magnetic Studies of Copper Incorporated Iron Nitride Thin Films 125Hrishikesh Kamat, Xingwu Wang, Yueling Qin, James Parry, and Hao Zeng EBC Slurry Infiltrated Matrix/Coatings for Woven SiC/SiC Composites 137Jianyu Zhou, G. G. Chase, Amjad Almansour, G. N. Morscher, Bryan Harder, and Dennis Fox ARMOR CERAMICS The Role of Inertia in Armor Ceramics 149Erik Carton, Geert Roebroeks, Jaap Weerheijm, and André Diederen Molecular-Dynamic Modeling of Propagation of Shock Wave in Porous Ceramic Materials 159I. V. Kartuzov, V. L. Bekenev, and V. V. Kartuzov Evaluation of Temperature Jump at the Front of Comminution and Compaction of the Ceramic Target Material at High-Velocity Impact 165B. A. Galanov, V. V. Kartuzov, S. M. Ivanov. and A. A. Pryadko Computer Modeling of Projectile Penetration into Hybrid Armor Panel with Regular Packing of Ceramic Discrete Elements 175V. Mikhailov, I. V. Kartuzov, and V. V. Kartuzov Improved De-Gassing and De-Agglomeration of ISOBAM Gel Casting System for Alumina using Micro-Computed Tomography 183Carli A oorehead, Victoria L Blair, and Jennifer M Sietins Synthesis, Sintering, Structure and Properties of AlB12C2–Based Materials 195Prikhna, R. A. Haber, P. P. Barvitskiy, V. B. Sverdun, S. N. Dub, V. B. Muratov, V. Domnich, V. Karpets, V. E. Moshchil, G. Loshak, V. V. Kovylaev, and O. O. Vasiliev Analysis of the Interaction of Projectiles with Ceramic Targets by Means of Flash X-Ray Cinematography and Optical Methods 205E. Strassburger and S. Bauer NEXT GENERATION BIOCERAMICS Development of Strong and Tough Bioactive Glass Composites for Structural Bone Repair 223Mohamed N. Rahaman and Wei Xiao Three-Dimensional Printing of Si3N4 Bioceramics by Robocasting 235Mohamed N. Rahaman and Wei Xiao Challenges in Development of Easy-To-Use Torsion Test Method for Bioceramics—Toward ISO Standard Proposal 247Kouichi Yasuda and Sadami Tsutsumi

Read more less